Owner’s Manual

Thank you for choosing Mahindra vehicle.

We are privileged to welcome you to the Mahindra family.

Your vehicle represents Robust Quality, Ruggedness, Safety, Precision Workmanship and Distinctive Styling , which are our traditional values.

This documents contains important information on vehicle operation, that will help you make full use of the technical features available. To exercise better control on road, we suggest you to please take time to read, understand and familiarise with vehicle and its features. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

When it comes to service, note that your Mahindra Authorised Dealer knows your vehicle best, has company trained Technical Experts, Mahindra Genuine Parts and very much cares about your satisfaction.

We extend our best wishes for safe and pleasurable motoring

MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD.

Important Information – Quick Reference
We strongly urge that you read the information provided in pages referred hereunder which will help in road safety and prevent inconvenience

1	Warranty Coverage.............................................................................................	Refer WSIG* (P.g. 15)
2	Roadside Assistance ....................................................................................	Refer WSIG* (P.g. 11)
3	Schedule Service (Free/Paid).................................................................	Refer WSIG* (P.g. 24)
4	Maintenance Schedule Chart.................................................................................	Refer WSIG* (P.g. 26)
5	Lubricants And Capacities.............................................................................	Refer WSIG* (P.g. 30)
6	Location Of Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).................................................	Refer (P.g. 1-7)
7	Location Of Fuse Box And Fuse Details............................................................	Refer (P.g. 10-10)
8	Changing A Flat Tyre................................................................	Refer (P.g. 10-21)
9	Understanding The Warning Lamps..........................................................	Refer (P.g. 3-38)
10	Use Of Seat Belts And Child Restraint......................................	Refer (P.g. 2-11)
11	Understanding The Airbag Function.........................................................	Refer (P.g. 2-30)
12	If Your Vehicle Is Submerged.....................................................	Refer (P.g. 8-8)
13	Driving Through Water..................................................................................	Refer (P.g. 8-8)
14	Opening And Closing the Bonnet.........................................	Refer (P.g. 5-22)
15	Location Of Battery And Its Maintenance.....................................	Refer (P.g. 11-8, 11-9 & 11-16)
	*Warranty and Service Information Guide

1 GENERAL AND SAFETY PRECAUTION

1.1 Servicing and Summary Data

We suggest that you record the vehicle servicing data in the Warranty and Service Information Guide for future references

We recommend you always use Mahindra Genuine Parts when performing repairs on the vehicle.

For all issues concerning the vehicle and for any need of Genuine spare parts, contact the Mahindra Authorised Dealer

1.2 Safety Symbols

Carefully read, understand and follow the safety symbols/ instructions given in this manual.

Legend of the Symbols

To emphasis the information and procedures regarding safety, use, maintenance, etc., the following symbols are used throughout the manual:

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or property damage.

NOTICE indicates important information relevant to the vehicle, the vehicle's use or to sections of this manual to which particular attention must be paid for optimum use of the vehicle.

If you see this symbol, it indicates “no,” “ do not,” “do not do this,” or “never”.

1.3 General Safety Information and Instructions

First-aid kit is placed in the glove box of the vehicle. Ensure it is not taken out of the vehicle at any point of time.

Please note that throughout this manual, reference is made that “an accident” could occur. An accident could cause you or a bystander to sustain personal injury, or result in property damage.

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays or wear in the seat belt webbing, or loose buckles, retractors, anchors or other loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.

The lifespan of Mahindra products depends on many factors. Improper use, abuse or harsh use in general may compromise the integrity of the vehicle and significantly reduce its lifespan. The vehicle is also subject to wear over a period of time. Please have your vehicle regularly inspected by a Mahindra Authorised Dealer or a qualified Technician . If the inspection reveals any damage or excessive wear, immediately replace, or have the component serviced.

The vehicle identification plates are the only legal identification reference; hence it is necessary to keep them in good condition. Never modify data on the plates or remove them. It is illegal to remove or alter the numbers in the VIN plate.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When the vehicle is fully loaded, drive at a slow speed, especially when turning. Note that the center of gravity of the vehicle changes when the vehicle is fully loaded, and also if luggage is mounted on the roof carrier.

1.4 To Users of a Mahindra Vehicle

When first driving the vehicle after long periods of non-usage, you may experience a temporary drive disturbance. This is a characteristic of the tyres and should be no reason for concern. The condition should correct itself within 5-15 kilometers. of driving. If the disturbance persists, have the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Driving and Drugs/Medication

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired through the use of prescription or non-prescription drugs or medication (even cough syrup). If you are taking any sort of drug or medication, be sure that it will not affect your driving ability.

Mobile Phones Warning

Use of electronic devices such as mobile phones, handheld devices, computers, portable radios or other by the driver while driving is dangerous. In exceptional condition, if use of a mobile phone is necessary despite this warning, use a handsfree system to ensure that the hands are free to drive the vehicle. Even handsfree do not ensure distraction free drive. Please comply with the legal regulations in your country, concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles .

Driving Long Distances

When driving long distances, follow these tips to have a safe journey:

•

Take breaks at regular intervals

•

Lack of sleep or fatigue will impact your ability to drive safely

•

Exercise your eyes by shifting the focus of your eyes to different parts of the road

•

Use stimulating beverages such as coffee or tea

•

Relax and stay calm

Running-in

Driving smoothly during first 1,000 kilometers. will help to prevent abnormal and premature system wear. Proper running-in will improve the life of drivetrain and vehicle components.

A new engine may consume more oil during the first 1,000 kilometers. of running. This should be considered as a normal part of break-in and not interpreted as any problem with the engine.

Mahindra Genuine Parts

Mahindra uses high quality parts for building the vehicles. In the event that any parts need replacement, we recommend that you use only Mahindra genuine parts.

Non-Mahindra parts may harm vehicle performance and will not be covered by your Mahindra warranty.

The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non genuine parts

Mahindra Genuine Accessories

A wide selection of quality accessories are available through your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. These accessories have been specifically engineered to allow you to personalize your vehicle to suit your requirements and complement its style and aerodynamic appearance.

Each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets Mahindra's rigid engineering and safety specifications. Every Mahindra accessory installed according to the Mahindra installation provisions comes with the respective accessory warranty.

Consult your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for detailed information about accessories available for your specific model variant.

For maximum vehicle performance and safety considerations, always keep the following information in mind:

•

The company shall not be liable / responsible for any damages / injuries, including consequential damages / injuries, resulting due to fitment of unauthorised aftermarket accessories and / or tapping / cutting wires in the wiring harness When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front and rear axle. Consult Mahindra Authorised Dealer for specific weight information

•

Bull bars and nudge guards are not recommended

•

Accessories causing any change in vehicle specifications like wheel rims, bull bars, etc., may affect the performance of safety systems

•

Mobile communication systems such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters and installed in your vehicle should comply with the local regulations and should be installed only by your Mahindra Authorised Dealer and can potentially affect the vehicle performance.

Vehicle Safety

When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:

•

Always remove the ignition key when you park the vehicle

•

In case of PKE, please lock and take the key fob with you

•

Close all the windows completely and lock all the doors

•

Do not leave any valuables in your vehicle. If you must leave something in your vehicle, hide them and securely lock all the doors

When Sleeping in Your Vehicle

Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In particular, if you stay or sleep in the car with the engine running and the air conditioner or heater turned on, you can suffocate to death

Sleeping in a closed space with the engine running puts you at high risk of suffocation from the exhausts

While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear shift lever or accelerator and thereby cause an accident

While sleeping in the car with the engine running, you may accidentally step on the accelerator, thereby overheating the engine and exhaust pipe and causing a fire

Hazardous Materials: Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they can explode and cause a fire.

Fire Extinguisher: For safety, we strongly recommend that you have fire extinguisher in your vehicle. Keep it ready for use at any time. Be familiar with how to use it

When Passing the Intersection or Railway Crossing

When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the vehicle to check the safety and drive through as fast as you can while using low speed gear and without shifting the gear. If the engine is turned off in the middle of the intersection or railway crossing, get someone to help you and move the car to a safe place quickly.

Do not Switch off the Engine While Driving

Do not switch off the engine while driving. Otherwise, it makes the steering wheel heavier, influence the brake performance and consequently dangerous

System Safety Mode : The protective measures including illumination of engine warning lamp and reduced engine power are taken (engine turned off in extreme case) when there is a critical fault in the system or a malfunction in the major electrical or fuel system. This indicates the system entering the safety mode to protect the vehicle’s drive system.

•

If the safety mode is activated, pull over and stop the vehicle to a safe location immediately and contact your Mahindra dealer. Then drive slowly or have the vehicle towed to a Mahindra Authorised Dealer according to the dealer’s instruction and have your vehicle checked by a Technician

•

If you continue to drive in this state, normal driving is not maintained due to the fixed engine rpm and engine can stop. But even more importantly, continued driving with this state may damage the drive system

Do Not Modify This Vehicle: If unauthorised modifications are made on the vehicle, the company is not liable for repairing the modified parts even during the term of warranty. Other part problems caused by modification are also not covered.

•

The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number of precision parts that have passed through countless experiments and tests.

•

These parts are deeply and systematically interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or altered without authorization, may under perform or cause critical damage to the vehicle and human life

Protecting Our Environment: As a responsible citizens, all of us have an important role to play in protecting our environment. Judicious vehicle usage and ensuring hazardous waste disposal (including cleaning and lubrication fluids) are important steps towards this initiative.

Body Repairs: If your vehicle is in a collision, contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer to ensure that it is repaired with Mahindra Genuine Parts. Mahindra has collision repair centers that meet strict requirements for training, equipment, quality, and customer satisfaction. Some repair shops and insurance companies might suggest using non-original equipment to save money. However, these parts do not meet Mahindra’s high standards for quality, fit and corrosion resistance. In addition, non-genuine parts or equipment might lead to damages or failures of the vehicle’s systems.

End of Line Disposal

Composition: Vehicle is made from steel, Aluminum, Lead, Copper, Wood, other plastics & miscellaneous parts. These materials are reusable by recycling them through a proper procedure. Some are hazardous to environment and living beings to be disposed as per local pollution board regulations.

Disposal: As batteries are made of lead, lithium & Iron phosphate with solvents as electrolyte which are harmful. They can impact on environment and are to be disposed as per local pollution board regulations. Certain components of this vehicle such as seat belt pre-tensioner, airbag and battery may contain hazardous material. Special handling may be required for service or vehicle end-of-life disposal.

Similarly ABS & other plastic panels, materials used are to be disposed to accredited agencies for recycling.

Most of other materials are reusable, hence components are to be segregated as per their composition as hazardous and non-hazardous, disposed to accredited recycling agencies. Hence it is advised to contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further information

1.5 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is the legal identity of your vehicle. The vehicle identification number is stamped on the VIN Table riveted on to the bottom of the B-Pillar on the driver side. It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN

Never modify data on the plates or remove them. It is illegal to remove or alter the numbers in the VIN plate.

1.6 Engine Number

Petrol	Diesel

The engine number is punched on the crankcase near starter motor.

1.7 Chassis Number

The chassis number is punched on the right side chassis side member below the front fender. It is also stamped on to the bottom of the B-Pillar on the driver side

1.8 Front Overview

1.9 Rear Overview

1.10 Instrument Panel/Door Trim Overview

1.11 Roof Overview

1.12 AdrenoX Connect

The AdrenoX Connect mobile app provides an information in your mobile phone about location & status of the vehicle and allows to control certain vehicle features in a secured way for both Android and iOS platform.

Kindly use the AdrenoX Connect mobile app for connected car related features.

1.12.1 KYC ( Know Your Customer) Registration

To activate connected car features including access to AdrenoX Connect mobile app, KYC process must be completed successfully.

•

Customer must have valid mobile number, communication address & email ID for KYC registration purpose.

•

Preferred mobile number provided during the KYC process will used to login the AdrenoX Connect mobile app.

•

After successful KYC registration, customer must download the “AdrenoX Connect” mobile application from Google Play store or iOS app store.

1.12.2 Login & Registration

Follow the below steps for Login and Registration:

You can select sign up option from login page which redirects to sign up page

Enter registered Mobile number given for KYC process form for connected services and click on Generate OTP

OTP with a validity will be sent to the same mobile number

If OTP is not received, you can request the OTP again by clicking on "Resend OTP"

After entering valid OTP, click on “Verify My account”

On successful verification you will be notified with a message " Account Verified"

You will be directed to "Terms and Condition" with "I Agree" option on successful authentication

1.12.3 Forgot/Change Password and Change Pin

This Feature allows the existing user to change Password and change PIN.

In case user forgets the Password and PIN below flow helps to create PIN and password.

Forgot your password

In case you forget your password:

•

Tap on the Forgot Password? option available in login page

•

In forgot password page, enter the registered mobile number for connected services and click on Generate OTP

•

Enter the OTP and click on Next button

•

Enter New Password and Confirm Password and tap on Save button

Change your password

To Change your password on app if you are already logged in:

•

Tap on the top Left corner menu icon from home screen

•

Click on My Account and select Change Password

•

Page will allow to set a new password by entering the existing password

•

Fill old password, New password and confirm password fields and tap on save button

1.12.4 AdrenoX Connect Features

FEATURE	DESCRIPTION
Alerts
Over Speed Alert	Alerts when your car exceeds the set speed limit. This speed limit value can be set under alert configuration in mobile application
High Engine Temperature Alert	Alerts when Engine temperature beyond the predefined limit
Tyre Pressure Alert	Alerts on excessive/very low and high tyre pressure and assist with nearby petrol station
Lamp Status Alert	Alerts when vehicle park lamp left in ON condition while locking the vehicle Notifies when the vehicle park lamp is left in ON condition and helps to turn OFF remotely via mobile application
Vehicle Start/Stop Alert	Notifies when normal vehicle start /stop event is detected
Door Open Alert	Notifies when any of the doors open while vehicle is moving and also when you trigger for door lock and the door remains open unintentionally
Geo-Fence Alert	Alerts when your vehicle moves out of a set boundary area Helps you to create virtual boundary for any region and will be notified whenever your vehicle moves in or out of that boundary
Unauthorised vehicle entry Alert	Alerts the user when any unauthorized entry in the vehicle is detected
Low Fuel Alert	Identifies low fuel level and notifies in your mobile application. Helps in assisting you to nearby fuel station
Route Deviation Alert	Alerts the user when the vehicle deviates from the pre-defined path
Time Fencing Alert	Notifies you when any movement of vehicle is detected during set time period
Seat Belt Alert	Notifies you whenever the driver/ co-driver is not wearing the seat belt during vehicle movement in mobile application
Driver Drowsiness Alert	Alerts the user when the driver is detected to be drowsy while driving
Insurance expiry Alert	Suggests in advance to renew the Insurance as expiry date of Insurance approaches Notifies you in advance when the insurance is about to expire
PUC expiry Alert	Notifies you in advance when the PUC is about to expire
Engine Idle Alert	Alerts when engine idling is detected for a set period of time. Time can be configured in mobile application
Location Based Service
Live tracking	GPS based vehicle tracking system for tracking vehicle’s location anywhere and at any point of time Helps to provide the real time vehicle location when vehicle is in movement Helps in sharing the vehicle location for a set time to your family and friends
Save Route / Save Place	Provision to save a route /place
Find my car	Helps to identify the vehicle’s location and directs you to locate your vehicle
Share my car location	Share your car's location with friends and family
Push to car	Allows the user to push routes/location from the mobile app to the vehicle
Sync location on SUV	Provides updates of any upcoming event by syncing with the calendar
Ecosense	Provides the details about the driving behavior for each trip
Trip History	Provides detailed information about the trips
Weekly Report	Provides details about various vehicle parameters for a defined time period
Trip Replay	Provides glimpse of the trip in a form of a short video
Pit Stops	Provides information and navigational access to nearby restaurant, ATM, Mahindra Dealership and so on
Read Vehicle Status
Check door status	Allows the user to view the current status of the vehicle door
Check tyre pressure	Allows the user to view the current status of tyre pressure
Check lamp status	Allows the user to view the current status of vehicle lamps
Check ODO	Allows the customer to check the odometer of the vehicle
My SUV info	Essential information about the vehicle like VIN, Variant and so on
Check AC Status	Allows the user to view the current status of the AC
Check Distance to empty	Helps to check distance to empty range i.e. the distance can be covered with the available fuel
Seat Belt Status	Helps the user to check the Driver/Co-Driver seat belt is buckled or not
Safety
E-Call	In case of accident, Emergency call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to With You Hamesha & Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location.
SOS Button	In case of SOS is initiated, SOS call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to With You Hamesha & Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location
Road Side Assistance	Allows the user to reach out for help with Mahindra Roadside Assistance team in case of vehicle breakdown
Remote Function
Remote Sunroof control	Allows the user to remotely control Sunroof using mobile app
Remote Start/ Stop	Allows the user to remotely start or stop the vehicle using mobile app
Remote Climate control	Allows the user to remotely configure the in- vehicle temperature during remote start using mobile app
Remote Window Up/Down	Allows the user to remotely control the Driver & Co-driver window (with anti-pinch) using mobile app
Remote Door Lock/Unlock	Provide access to the vehicle by remotely locking and unlocking the doors when vehicle is stationary
Remote Lamp On/Off	Allows the user to remotely turn on or off the lamps using mobile app
Locate my SUV	Allows the user to remotely locate the vehicle by turning on the horn and lights
In-Car Applications
Horoscope	Allows the user to view daily fortune as per his/her zodiac sign.
Just dial	Allows the user to search for various services using the Just Dial app in the infotainment screen
Zomato	Allows the user to search for various restaurants and cuisines using Zomato app in the infotainment screen
India Today	Allows the user to browse news using India Today app in the infotainment screen
Weather Update	Allows the user to view weather information using the Accuweather app in the infotainment screen
Travel Explorer	Allows the user to search for amusement places and more using the Travel Advisor app in the infotainment screen
What 3 Words	Allows the user to navigate to any what 3 words address. (See what3words.com for more details)
Others
ETA	Allows the user to know the Estimated Time of Arrival of your vehicle at your current mobile location.
In-Home Alexa	Allows the user to check the vehicle status and perform remote function using Alexa Home devices (voice commands)
Valet Mode	Allows the user to set the vehicle in a predefined state when giving the vehicle for valet parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234 1. Infotainment will be inaccessible, 2. Speed limit to 80 kmph & 3. Geofence alert for 5km
Contact us	Any Query / Enquiry about the product, Get info on Mahindra. Send an Inquiry on any car model. Dealers will get back to the customer on details
Smart Home Control	Allows the user to control the smart appliances via Geofence of vehicle location
Log Book - Fuel(Fuel Diary)	Maintains a systematic log of the all the fuel filling events and provides a clear representation of the fuel filled and the amount spent
mGreetings	Greetings to the user on special occasions
Do-Not Disturb	Avoids distraction while driving by not pushing any AdrenoX Connect app notification when mobile is detected inside the vehicle
Journey Planner	Allows the user to plan a journey by providing desired location on a specific Date & Time
Request app Access	Allows the user to share the vehicle access to two more users
My Documents	Storage and retrieval of documents such as Driving license, Insurance, PUC, RC
Profile Manager	Allows the user to configure the vehicle settings to maximum of two profiles. Vehicle settings such as climate settings, Audio settings, Audio source, Key fob etc.,
To-do list	Allows the user to create time based/location- based events that remind the user at the specified time
Smart Wearables	Allows the user to perform all the read and remote functions through the smart watch (applicable for both Android and iOS)
Pick up Reminder	Allows the user to create an event that reminds the user at the specified time
Service Booking	Allows the user to schedule a service by directing to the With You Hamesha app
Personalised Safety Alert	Alerts the user via a personalised beloved ones voice prompt when the vehicle crosses the speed limit
what3words via Alexa Voice	Allows the user to navigate/find current location of what3words address via voice. Eg: "Alexa, Ask what3words to navigate to decking butter sheets” Note: Use Alexa Companion mobile app to enable location service permission if requested. Routing via Native navigation Only English inputs

1.12.5 Branded Audio (If equipped)

We all love music which gives emotional experience. The premium Immersive 3D Sound System, allows to feel like passengers are right in the middle of favorite concert.

The ultimate audio listening experience comes from core of the system with perfectly placed 12 speakers

1.12.6 Blue Sense (If equipped)

The Blue Sense mobile app provides information from mobile phone allows to control certain vehicle features in a secured way for both Android & iOS platform of non - Telematic variant models.

Kindly refer the BLUE SENSE mobile app for in car features.

Bluesense app connects with vehicle Infotainment System to experience in-car control features.

Connect Android / iOS Mobile device over Bluetooth with Infotainment System.

Procedure for Bluetooth Connection:

•

Turn ON Bluetooth in Mobile device

•

Navigate to “Settings -> Connectivity -> Add Device” option in Vehicle Infotainment System

•

Choose Mobile Device Name to connect from List of Available Devices

•

Select “Pair” and pick user Mobile device name

After successful Bluetooth connection with Infotainment follow below steps to connect Bluesense App.

Procedure for Bluesense App Connection:

•

Open Mahindra Bluesense App from Mobile Device

•

Automatically Auto Connection process starts otherwise select “Connect” icon from home screen

•

On Successful connection, “Connect” gets changed as “Connected” in home screen

•

Now Bluesense features are accessible to explore / use

Select ”Audio Control” from Bluesense App Home screen to experience Audio Controls (Source Change, Volume Control, Next, Prev, Fast Forward & Rewind).

Below listed Audio Sources supported by Bluesense App (Based on applicability)

•

Bluetooth Audio

•

USB Audio

•

Tuner (AM/FM)

•

AUX

•

My Drive Audio

•

iPod

1.13 Alexa Reference Guide

2 SEATS AND SAFETY

2.1 Seats

Sitting in Correct Position

Follow the tips below for a comfortable and safe journey:

•

Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine pressed against the seat back

•

The driver and front passenger seat head restraint has 5 positions. Adjust it as close as possible to the above specified position, with the top of the head restraint even with the top of your head

•

Maintain sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Maintain at least a Ten inch (10") distance from the centre of the steering wheel to your chest

•

Fasten your seat belt correctly and adjust both the shoulder and lap strap

•

The top curve of the steering wheel should align with your chin for ideal road visibility

•

Adjust your seat and seat back angle such that your wrists rest on the steering wheel

•

Ensure your legs are in bent position while fully depressing the clutch pedal

The seat should be adjusted while still maintaining control of the foot pedals (able to fully depress the clutch pedal), steering wheel (rest the wrists on the steering wheel) and your view of the instrument panel controls.

Never adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion. The seat movement may be more than expectation and cause the driver to unintentionally operate the accelerator or brake, or turn the steering wheel, causing loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stationary.

Never put objects under the seats. They may interfere with the seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly activate the seat position adjusting lever, causing the seat to suddenly move, resulting in loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury.

While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts. This may lead to injuries.

2.1.1 Front Seat

Front Seat Slide

Move the seat forward or backward by lifting the adjustment lever located under the seat front and release once the desired position is reached.

While adjusting the seat, make sure the latch engages fully and the seat is locked firmly in the desired position. An unlocked seat may move in a sudden stop or collision, causing injury to the person in that seat. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is locked.

Front Seat Recline

To adjust the seat back, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back, and release the lever at the desired position.

To return the seat back, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or the shoulder strap may contact your neck.

The more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of serious injury.

When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back while operating the lever.

Front Seat Height Adjustment

The driver seat height can be raised or lowered with the help of height adjust handle.

To RAISE the seat height, operate the seat height adjust handle in the upward direction. Repeat this till the desired height is achieved.

To LOWER the seat height, push down the seat height adjust handle while seated in the driver seat. Repeat this operation until the desired seat height is reached

Do not adjust the height of seat while vehicle is in motion.

Driver Seat Lumbar Adjustment (if equipped)

The driver seat back features lumbar adjustment. The lumbar contour of the lumbar support can be adjusted by means of the adjusting wheel on the outer side of the seat cushion.

Properly adjusted lumbar support provides adequate back support essential during long journeys.

Do not use force, rotate the lumbar adjustment knob beyond the extreme stop positions in either direction.

Power Seat (Driver Side only) (if equipped)

The power seat switches are provided on the driver seat side valance cover. The Power seat provides 6-way electrical adjustments for the driver seat.

It is equipped with electrically-operated power slider, power recliner and power height adjustment mechanisms. The shape of the switches guide you to the function it has been assigned.

During vehicle running, Seat movement is not allowed for short duration considering user safety.

•

Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stationary, otherwise there is a risk of accident. The seat should be adjusted so that the brake/ clutch pedal can be pressed fully.

•

Be cautious when adjusting the seat, you may suffer injuries without paying proper attention while adjusting seat.

•

Driver side electric seat can be adjusted in ignition off also, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle, as there is a risk of injury!

•

Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery discharge, we suggest that you adjust your seats when the engine is running

•

Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the seat comes in contact with any other object and cannot be adjusted anymore.

•

If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be checked and fixed before driving

•

Do not put any luggage/water bottles below driver seat as they can obstruct power seat movement or damage seat mechanism/motor

•

Do not remove vehicle battery while seat is in motion

•

Do not operate both the switches at a time which may cause malfunctioning.

2.1.2 Second Row Seats

Second row seat is of 60:40 split configuration and also has a foldable armrest.

Loading luggage on the seats is dangerous. The luggage can become a projectile that could hit and injure passengers in a sudden stop or collision. Luggage should always be kept on the floor.

To avoid serious injury, do not sit on or place objects on a folded seat back while the vehicle is moving.

Second Row Seat Recline (if equipped)

To change the second row seat back angle, lean forward slightly while raising the recline lever on the side of the seat cushion, lean back to the desired position and release the recline lever.

Make sure the recline lever returns to its original position and the seat back is locked in place by rocking the seat back forward/ backward.

When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back while operating the lever.

Second Row Seat Folding (Third Row Seat Entry/Exit Access)

The second row 40P/Captain seat can be tumbled forward to provide access to the Third Row Seat.

•

Operate the lever on the side of the seat. This lever actuates the one-touch fold and tumble mechanism of the 40P/Captain seat.

Captain seat armrest to be kept in unfold condition before actuating the lever.

To fold the 2nd row seat, Please move the Co-driver seat forward and ensure the seat back angle is in normal position and proceed for seat fold and tumble operation as given below.

60/40 Seat

Captain Seat

•

To tumble the Second Row 40P/Captain seat while sitting on the Third Row seat, pull the lever behind the 40P/Captain backrest.

•

In order to use the 2nd Row Seat to load cargo, first tumble the seat as explained above. Then, push the seat downward of the vehicle (>45 kg) until the two latches underneath the seat lock onto the floor.

•

To tumble the seat from the back folded (cargo) condition, first make the seat back upright. Then operate the one-touch fold and tumble lever.

The seat tumble mechanism cannot be operated when the seat is in the folded position.

Return the seat back to its upright position in one continuous motion to securely lock the seat and in turn avoiding seat flipping forward suddenly leading to injuries

If this happens, release the seat lock by pulling the lever and repeat the procedure.

Be cautious when placing your hands around the seat anchors. You could pinch your hands or fingers between the seat anchor and the seat. Hold the edge of the seat when lowering it into place. Never place your hands between the seat anchor and the seat

To avoid Personal injury keep legs away from the seat anchor when relatching the seat back to the fold position.

Second Row Seat Folding (For Luggage)

The 2nd Row 60P and captain seat back can be folded to load cargo on top of it. Operate the lever on the side of the seat. This lever actuates the backrest fold mechanism. Release the lever once the backrest has folded completely. To bring the seat back to upright position and push the seat back until it locks into the desired reclining position.

Second Row Armrest (If equipped)

The Second Row 60P seat features armrest with cup holder.

•

To open the armrest, simply pull on the tab given at the top of the armrest (as shown).

•

When armrest is not required, push back the armrest into the 60P backrest.

Second Row Captain Seat arm rest fold and unfold (If equipped)

While folding the seat back ensure arm rest is in unfold condition.

2.1.3 Third Row Seats

The third row front facing seat can be fold and tumble to accommodate extra luggage based on customer needs.

•

Pull the strap rearwards to unlock the seat back as shown in image

•

Again pull the strap from bottom of the seat to tumble the seat as shown in the image.

•

Then push the seat to the tumble condition.

There is a strap on the right side seat cushion pocket which need to be hooked on to the second row head rest rod to avoid seat falling back from the tumble condition.

Remove the hook from 2nd row head rest rod and place it in the pocket provided on the cushion.

To back fold the seat from the tumble position, Pull the seat back holding by hand slowly untill it gets locks into the desired position.

To pull the seat back into desired reclining position.

2.2 Head Restraint

The head restraint comprises the padded portion which contacts your head and is inserted/locked in receptacles on the top of the seat back. Vehicle seats are equipped with head restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of rear collision.

Always align top of the head restraint with the top of your head or as close to it as possible. To raise the head restraint, pull the restraint up.

To lower the head restraint, press the lock knob and push the head restraint down. The head restraint can be pulled out completely by depressing the locking button while pulling the restraint out. Align the head restraint shafts over the holes on the seat top and push the restraint straight down till you hear the lock click. Keep the seat back as upright as possible so the headrest is behind, not beneath, and almost touching your head.

Never drive with the head restraints not properly adjusted, head restraints removed or inserted in a flipped condition. With no support behind your head, your neck could be seriously injured in a collision.

Head restraints are provided for the front row and second row outboard & 3rd row occupants only.

2.3 Seat Belt

2.3.1 General Warnings and Instructions

At least once each month, inspect the seat belt webbing for any cuts, tears, or other signs of wear (such as fraying along the edges). Also inspect the anchors, retractors, and buckles to be sure they are tight and operational.

•

All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. In an accident, an un-belted passenger becomes a projectile, and can cause serious injury to himself or another passenger.

•

In a rollover crash, an un-belted person is significantly more likely prone to Injury than a person wearing a seat belt

•

In order to be properly buckled, you must always sit up straight and keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part must be worn low and tight across your hips, just touching the top of your thighs. While fastening the seat belt, the shoulder strap of the seat belt must pass over your chest and top of your shoulder. It must never touch your neck, face, the side of your shoulder, arm, or pass under your arm. The belt must always be flat against your body and not twisted in any way. Nothing, such as an arm rest, a pocketbook, or any external objects should be between you and the seat belt. Improperly worn of a seat belt will reduce the protection in an accident.

•

Seat belts should be adjusted as tightly as possible, consistent with comfort to properly secure the wearer in the seat.

•

The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for adults must be properly used and maintained.

•

For usage of adult seat belt to secure children, refer to section of manual for child seat positions and use a child restraint systems

•

Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is in motion. Passenger who does not wear the seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the vehicle inside hard parts, against other occupants or out of the vehicle during emergency stop or collision.

•

Do not use any accessories on seat belts or modify in any way the seat belt system. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash

•

An accident or emergency stop, can damage your seat belt system, even if the accident is “minor”. Please have your Mahindra Authorised Dealer inspect the seat belt system after an accident

•

Please be aware that any unsecured item in your vehicle, such as your pet, unsecured child restraint system, a laptop or mobile phones, can become a projectile in the event of an accident or sudden stop, causing injuries to occupants in the vehicle

Never use a damaged seat belt system. A damaged seat belt will not provide protection in an accident, resulting in serious injury.

•

Seat belt systems are prone to abuse. They are not indestructible. They must be handled with care to avoid damage

•

Keep the belts clean and dry. Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and webbings are soiled. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners. These chemicals will severely weaken the belts

•

Retractors in 3-point type seat belts retract the seat belts when not in use. The inertia lock and coil spring allow the belts to remain comfortable on users during normal driving. During accidents or abrupt stops, inertia locks restrict the sudden forward movement of the wearer

Prevention of seat belt Slow retraction:

1. Check if there any twist on in-board or out-board side of safety belt.

2. Check if dust accumulated on outer parts such as Webbing , D-Loop, Tongue stopper and Tongue.

3. Remove the dust from D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue stopper by compressed air or air blower.

4. Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt parts D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue stopper. Do not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids could damage the seat belt assembly.

5. Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance. Safety belt assembly cleaning required if seat belt retraction becomes very slow due to dust and soil accumulation on safety belt assembly, then below cleaning procedure to be followed:

1. Appropriate Procedure of disassembly of all pyrotechnic devices to be followed for pretensioner seat belt. The Battery terminal to be removed before disassembly of pretensioner, otherwise there will be error codes registered in Airbag ECU and Airbag ECU will show malfunction.

2. Open Pillar trims and take out Seat belt assembly on bench by carefully disassembly of connector and Lap Pretensioner/ Anchor wire assembly (if equipped). Kindly follow correct safety belt pretensioner handling procedure in case of pretensioner safety belts. Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt assembly. Do not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids could damage the Seat belt webbing and other parts.

3. If seat belt movement is sticky due to dust accumulation. Then please contact the dealer for help in cleaning.

4. In case of soiling on the belt, use a mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 liter of lukewarm water.

5. Care to be taken to prevent contact of soap water with Pretensioner .

6. Clean dust accumulated on D-Loop, Webbing and overall assembly by close inspection of D-Loop and Webbing using lint free cloth.

7. After cleaning safety belt they should be dried by lint free dry cloth.

8. After cleaning kindly inspect Webbing movement through D-Loop slot for any sticky movement of webbing .

9. Assemble the safety belt using correct torque. Re-assemble all trim parts.

10. Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance.

Seat Belts - Patients: Persons with serious medical conditions should also wear a seat belt. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations before travel.

Seat Belts - Pregnant Women: Pregnant women must also wear seat belts. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations.

The lap belt should be worn snugly and as low as possible over the hips. The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder, but never across the stomach area.

When worn properly, the seat belt will protect both the mother and the foetus in an accident or emergency stop.

A pregnant woman should never wear the seat belt across the stomach area. This could lead to serious injuries to the foetus and/or the pregnant mother.

Never wear twisted seat belts. Excessive forces will be transferred from the belt to the wearer, in a collision, resulting in serious personal injury.

Each seat belt is meant for use by one person only. Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. The seat belt will not be able to absorb the impact forces properly leading to serious injuries.

Never wear a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap. This could lead to serious injuries.

Seat Belt Usage is Necessary to:

•

Reduce the possibility of being out from your vehicle during an accident.

•

Reduce the possibility of injuries to upper body, lower body and legs during an accident

•

Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle

Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the vehicle seat belts. The lap portion should be snug fastened on the hips and as low as possible and the shoulder belt should be rout across the child's shoulder, not across neck or face. If you are unable to position the belt across the child's shoulder, the child should be seated in a booster seat. Frequently check the seat belt to be sure it remains snug and in position. A squirming child could cause the seat belt to come out of position.

2.3.2 Seat Belt Configuration

To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used by all occupants inside of your vehicle.

Seat Belt Types with respect to Location

Seat Location	Seat Belt Type	Description
Driver Seat	3-Point	Seat belt with Emergency Locking Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL), & Anchor Pretensioner
Co-Driver Seat	3-Point	Seat belt with Emergency Locking Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL) & Anchor Pretensioner
2nd Row LH (40P)	3-Point	Seat belt with Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
2nd Row CTR	2-Point	Lapbelt
2nd Row RH (60P)	3-Point	Seat belt with Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
3rd Row LH	3-Point	Seat belt with Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
3rd Row RH	3-Point	Seat belt with Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR): The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) allows the driver seat belt to freely extend and retract with occupant movement, yet locks the belt during a sudden stop or upon impact.

Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL): A pretensioner is designed to retract some of the webbing of a seat belt the instant a collision occurs, tightening the seat belt to restrain occupants quickly and reducing the amount they are thrown forward in a moderate or severe frontal crash.

Load limiters help protect occupants from seat belt-inflicted injury. In the event of a crash, the pretensioner restrains the occupant until certain amount of force is applied. At this point the load limiter releases the webbing gradually so as not to exert too much force on the chest of the occupant.

2.3.3 Seat Belt Pretensioner

In the event of a crash being detected, the belt pretensioner locks the seat belt by drawing back the seat belts on the driver’s and passenger’s torso and pelvis to prevent the driver and passenger being thrown forward. The seat belt pretensioner combined with the seat belt and airbag further increases safety.
	This vehicle is provided with a anchor pretensioner for driver seat (in the sill board area) and is used to help to protect occupant in the sever crash events .
Its activation through Airbag ECU is signalled by pulling down of the metallic cable and removes slack in in seat belt.

To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt on shoulder keeping it firmly close to the chest and bottom part of the seat belt on pelvis.

In case of side impact collisions, front air bags are not inflated, but seat belt pretensioners located in the same position with impact direction will be deployed together with side air bag

Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed again. Have the deployed seat belt pretensioners replaced by an Authorised dealer.

Operation of pretensioner
	When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt pretensioners pull back the seat belts immediately to restrain the occupants to their seats.

Operation of load limiter
	After frontal collision, the load limiter releases the seat belt to prevent the occupant from being injured due to belt force.

Fastening the seat belt: Even if seat belts are not worn, the air bag will deploy in case of impact, collision triggered. In addition, airbags can protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their seat belts. Airbags may cause injuries to occupants if they do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.

•

Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not, the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden manoeuvring of the vehicle

•

Sometimes you may have to apply strong force to pull the webbing out of the retract

•

Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time

•

Seat belts and airbag’s can significantly minimise possible injury to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from fatal collisions or injury

•

Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts should be checked and repaired by only a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service centre

•

An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant or child restraint

2.3.4 Fastening the Seat Belt (3-Point type)


	Adjust the seat as needed, sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your seat belt, pull the webbing out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle.

An audible “click” would be heard when the tab locks into the buckle. Pull up on the shoulder strap to tighten the lap belt across your hips. The seat belt retractor will pull in any slack in the shoulder strap. A slow and easy motion will allow the belt to extend and let you move your body around freely.
Periodically check the seat belt as you ride to be sure it remains snug and in position. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock (restrict) if you try to lean forward too quickly.

If the driver or co-driver seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched ON, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates and chimes beat will turn till seat belt fastened. Refer “Warning Lamps” in the “Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details.

2.3.5 Fastening the Seat Belt (2-Point Lap type)

This seat belt is applicable to the second row middle passenger seat. Insert the tongue into the buckle until it snaps. Position the lap belt on the hips as low as possible.

The lap belt and shoulder belt are secured across the pelvis and rib cage, which are better able to withstand crash forces than other parts of your body.

Place the shoulder belt across the middle of your chest and away from your neck.

The lap belt rests across your hips, not your stomach.

“NEVER” put the shoulder belt behind your back or under an arm.

2.3.6 Seat Belt Release (both 3 Point & 2 Point)


To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

Never insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent from properly latching the tongue and may cause damage to the buckle mechanism, thereby making the seat belt ineffective in an accident, resulting in serious personal injury.

2.3.7 Unlatching of Second Row Seat Belt

After unlatching the seatbelt, the occupant needs to make sure the tongue is repositioned to it’s designed condition.

It must be ensured that the webbing doesn’t get entrapped between the seat and the trim.

It must be ensured that the tongue is not diagonally placed.

2.3.8 Driver Seat Belt Reminder Indication

The driver seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will blink in instrument cluster if driver doesn’t wear the seat belt and will be continuous until belt is buckled. Chime will be activated when vehicle travels more than 500 metres or attains 25 Kms/Hrs of speed while vehicle is in motion which will be ON for 95 seconds

2.3.9 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS) & Seat Belt Reminder Indication

PODS detects the presence of occupant in the passenger seat.

If Occupant is present on passenger seat and not wearing the seat belt, Seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will glow on the center fascia switch provided in vehicle instrument panel and will be continuous until the seat belt is buckled. It should be noted that the PODS require a minimum weight hence children may not be detected by PODS. Along with this warning symbol, a Chime in Cluster will be ON for 95 seconds. Do keep in mind that after market seat covers also may deteriorate the detection senor performance, don’t use the non recommended/non authorized seat covers.

Seat belt reminder warning lamp for passenger seat may glow in case of child is present in passenger seat.

Strong advice not to carry children in front seat without child restraint seat. Also do not use adult seat belt which is designed to harness person taller than 140cm Always ensure Passenger Airbag is turn OFF before you carry child on passenger seat. We strongly urge that children should be in middle row using the child seats with the ISO FIX

2.4 Child Restraint System (CRS)

Anchorage Location

Child restraint anchor fittings are installed at the points as shown in the figure on the rear seat outer.

•

This is a universal i-Size Child Restraint System. It is approved to regulation No. 129, series of amendments for general use in vehicle seat positions, marked with the i-Size logo.

•

The seat is also suitable for fixing into vehicle seat positions, approved as i–Size positions (as detailed in the vehicle handbook), listed in the separate list. 2nd row outboard Seating positions in the vehicle are suitable to accept this child restraint.

•

If in doubt, consult either the child restraint manufacturer or the retailer.

Seat Belts For Older Children, over 1.50 m in height can wear seat belts instead of using child restraints

Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the seat belt properly fits the child or if they should still use a Group 2 or Group 3 child restraint to improve the fit of the seat belt:

Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?

Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the way back?

Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between the neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach?

Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no”, then the child still needs to use a Group 2 or 3 child restraint in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/ shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly

Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle as long as possible. Infants up to 13 kg must be restrained in a rear-facing seat like the child seat shown in fig. A. This type of child restraint supports the child’s head and does not induce stress on the neck in the event of sudden decelerations or a crash. The rear-facing child restraint is restrained by the vehicle’s seat belts, as shown in fig. A. The child seat restrains the child with its own harness.

Children who weigh between 9 kg and 18 kg may be carried in a Group 1, forward facing seat like the one in fig. B. This type of child restraint is for older children who are too big for a Group 0 or 0+ child restraint.

Children who weigh between 15 kg and 25 kg and who are too big for the Group 1 child restraint may use a Group 2 child restraint system. As shown in fig. C, the Group 2 child restraint system positions the child correctly with respect to the seat belt so that the shoulder belt crosses the child’s chest and not the neck, and the lap belt is snug on the pelvis and not the abdomen.

Children who weigh between 22 kg and 36 kg and who are tall enough to use the adult shoulder belt may use a Group 3 child restraint. Group 3 child restraints position the lap belt on the child’s pelvis. The child must be tall enough that the shoulder belt crosses the child’s chest and not their neck. Fig. D shows an example of a Group 3 child restraint system correctly positioning the child on the rear seat.

Suitability of Passenger Seats for i-Size Child Restraint System Use:

The second-row outboard seats of the vehicle are type-approved for i-Size child restraint systems. These child restraint systems, built and type-approved according to the i-Size (ECE R129 & ECE R145) standard, ensure better safety conditions to carry children on board a vehicle.

•

The child must be transported rearward facing until 15 months.

•

Child restraint system protection is increased in the event of a side collision.

•

The use of the ISOFIX system is promoted to avoid faulty installation of the child restraint system.

•

Efficiency in the choice of the child restraint system, which isn't made according to weight anymore but according to the child's height, is increased:

•

Compatibility between the vehicle seats and the child restraint systems is better:

•

The i-Size child restraint systems can be considered as "Super ISOFIX"; this means that they can be perfectly fitted in type-approved i-Size seats but can also be fitted in ISOFIX (ECE R44) type-approved seats.

The vehicle seats, i-Size type-approved, are marked by the symbol shown in the image

Unrestrained infants and small children could be injured

•

Never transport them unless they are properly restrained

•

Use restrained system which meet safety standard

•

Follow directions provided by the manufacturer

Type of child seat	i-Size child seats
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)	X
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)	X
2nd row outboard seats	i - U
2nd row centre seat	X
3rd row outboard seats	X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing, and rear-facing. X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.

•

It is not allowed to mount the child seat in a front passenger seat with an activated airbag.

•

Kid i-Size can only be installed rear facing with the i–Size anchorage in a car equipped with i–Size anchorage points.

•

Kid i-Size is approved for children with a stature height from 61 to 105 cm, rear facing with a max. weight up to 18 kg.

•

The harness straps must always be locked when the child is in the seat.

•

The harness straps must be tightened without slack and not twisted.

•

The seat cover contains magnets in the areas with the orange indications. Magnets can influence electronic equipment such as pacemakers (If equipped)

•

The floor support must always be used. Make sure that the floor support is fully pushed down.

•

When installed with i–Size: Make sure the indicators are green before you drive.

•

We recommend that this seat is used only for children who can sit upright, so not younger than 6 months.

•

For children under 1 year and/or under 10 kg weight, we recommend that the most reclined sitting position and the body hugger and baby cushion (extra available accessory) are used.

•

Remove the baby cushion (extra available accessory) when the child is older than 1 year.

•

Remove the body hugger when the child is older than 2 years.

•

When the child weighs over 18 kg or the shoulder height grows above the highest position of the shoulder straps, the child restraints shall be changed to which is suitable for children with a weight above 18 kg.

•

After an accident, the seat must be replaced. Although it may look undamaged, if you were to have another accident, the seat may not be able to protect your child as well as it should.

•

Prevent the seat from becoming trapped or weighed down by luggage, seats and/or slamming doors.

•

Before every use, make sure the harness is not damaged or twisted.

•

Make sure you can fit no more than one finger between the harness and your baby (1 cm).

How to use the i–Size Lower Latch Anchor/ i–Size Rods

1. i–Size Marking gjkkllool 2. Latch anchor/ i–Size rod

•

The i–Size lower latch anchors (rods) are located in rear seats bottom position. Their locations are shown in the illustration

•

Insert the child restraint attachments into the i–Size lower latch anchors (rods) until it clicks. Refer Child seat installation manual.

•

Do not use the seat belt for installing the i–Size child restraint

i–Size system is a standardized method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult Seat belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker installation.

•

When using the “ i–Size” lower latch system (rod), all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of un-retracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the un-retracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint.

•

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle

How to use the Top Tether/Rear Anchor
60/40 Seat	Captain Seat

There are two top tether rods/rear anchors on the seat base back side of the rear row front facing seats.

Remove the headrest from the rear row seat

Place the child restraint on the rear row seat

Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the top tether rod/ rear anchor. Securely tighten the child restraint by adjusting the webbing of the child restraint system (CRS) tether connector. Follow the clear instructions provide in the CRS manual

•

The top-tether/ rear anchor is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the i–Size rod/lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.

•

If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation

•

Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are Firmly latched to the i–Size rod/lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound/ latch indications provided on seat.

•

Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury.

•

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints

•

The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct top tether rod/rear anchor provided on seat back.

•

Don’t put the top tether strap over the head restraint of rear row seat which is not the correct methods and may cause risk.

•

Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely installed. Refer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

•

Do not install the child restraint of such size if it hinders the operations of front seat which may cause problem to front occupants.

Table of Information on i-Size Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various Seating Positions

Mass group	Restraint Device Figure	Seating position
		First Row	Second Row			Third Row
		LEFT	LEFT	CENTER	RIGHT	LEFT	RIGHT
Group 0 Up to 10 kg	Rear Facing Child Seat	X	i-U	X	i-U	X	X
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg	Rear Facing Child Seat	X	i-U	X	i-U	X	X
Group I 9 to 18 kg	Forward Facing Child Seat	X	i-U	X	i-U	X	X
Group II 15 to 25 kg	Booster Seat	X	i-U	X	i-U	X	X
Group III 22 to 36 kg	Booster Seat	X	i-U	X	i-U	X	X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing, and rear-facing. X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.

Table of Information on i-Size Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various i-Size Positions

Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on i-Size Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various i-Size Positions

Mass group	Size Class	Fixture	Vehicle i-Size Positions
Mass group	Size Class	Fixture	Rear out board
Carry cot (Newborn Baby)	F	ISO/L1	X
Carry cot (Newborn Baby)	G	ISO/L2	X
Group 0: up to 10 kg (~9 months)	E	ISO/R1	IL/IU
Group 0+: up to 13 kg (~0 – 2 years)	E	ISO/R1	IL/IU
	D	ISO/R2	IL
	C	ISO/R3	X
Group I 09 to 18 kg (~9 months – 4 years)	D	ISO/R2	IL
	C	ISO/R3	X
	B	ISO/F2	IUF
	B1	ISO/F2X	IUF
	A	ISO/F3	IUF

Key of letters be inserted in the above table

IUF: Suitable for i–Size forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group.

IL: Suitable for particular i–Size child restraint systems (CRS). These CRS may be are those of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-universal’ categories.

IU: Suitable for using rearward facing child restraint system with i–Size & Top-tether (or) i–Size Base with Support leg.

X: Seat position not suitable i–Size child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.

A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 720mm)

B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)

B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)

C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System

D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System

E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System

F -ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)

G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)

Use the manufacturer recommended Child Restraint System (CRS) and locations to fit in vehicle. Please read the installation instructions provided in manual carefully before use.

Warning for Child Restraint

•

Use only the approved Child Restraint System (CRS) for better safety of your child.

•

Mahindra is not responsible for the personal injury and property damage due to the defect of child restraint system.

•

Use the proper type of child restraint system suitable for the weight and size for your baby.

•

Use the child restraint system at recommended seating location only and follow the instructions.

•

Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as below:

1	GROUP 0 : 0 ~ 10 KG	4	GROUP II : 15 ~ 25 KG
2	GROUP 0+ : 0 ~ 13 KG	5	GROUP III : 22 ~ 36 KG
3	GROUP I : 9 ~ 18 KG

•

Group 0 & 0+ : Rear-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of i–Size with Base & Support Leg is recommended).

•

Group I: Forward-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of i–Size & Top Tether is recommended).

•

Group II & III: Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened. Always follow the installation procedure and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.

Cautions for i–Size Seat usage

•

The anchor provided on rear seat base back is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.

•

Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound and color indications.

•

The child restraint seat strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct seat back anchor provided on the rear seat base back side behind the seat carpet. Follow the instructions provided on the seat back for the details of anchor location.

•

Make sure that the child restraint system is firmly secured by rocking it in different directions.

•

Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury.

Securing Child Seats with Seatbelt

Mass group	Restraint Device Figure	Seating position
		Passenger Seat		Second Row			Third Row
		Activated front Passenger Airbag	Deactivated front Passenger Airbag	LEFT	CENTER	RIGHT	LEFT	RIGHT
Group 0 Up to 10 kg	Rear Facing Child Seat	X	U	U	X	U	X	X
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg	Rear Facing Child Seat	X	U	U	X	U	X	X
Group I 9 to 18 kg	Forward Facing Child Seat	U	X	U	X	U	X	X
Group II 15 to 25 kg	Booster Seat	U	X	U	X	U	X	X
Group III 22 to 36 kg	Booster Seat	U	X	U	X	U	X	X

U:The seat is suitable for the child seat category “Universal” and is permitted for use in this weight group

X:Not suitable for universally approved child seats.

2.5 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) includes airbags, pre-tensioners and ECU. The airbags are designed to provide further protection to the vehicle occupants in addition to the primary protection provided by the seat belts and seat belt pre-tensioners.

The primary components of the system are the sensors which measure the crash severity. In the event of a significant frontal impact, the SRS airbags inflate to work in conjunction with the seat belts and help reduce injuries mainly to the driver's or front passenger's head/chest.

Seat belts are the primary restraint system in the vehicle. An airbag provides supplemental protection in addition to the seat belts.

All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts irrespective of presence of airbag to minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash.

Airbags are more effective in reducing injuries when the seat belts are worn.

Airbags

Your vehicle has the following airbags:

A:Driver Airbag

B: Front Passenger Airbag

C:Two side (seat) impact airbags (if equipped)

D: Two curtain airbags (if equipped)

2.5.1 Driver and Front Passenger Airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and front passenger seating positions. The indications of the system's presence are the letters “SRS AIRBAG” embossed on the airbag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbag only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than ± 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.

Driver Airbag

Front Passenger Airbag

Front airbag are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front airbag will not deploy in frontal crashes which are below the prescribed deployment threshold where risk of serious injuries is low.

Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself. It cause injuries.

2.5.2 Side Impact Airbag (If equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with side impact airbag in both the front seats. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection during side impacts or collisions.

The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. To minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash, every passenger must always wear their seat belt (see the chapter on Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags inflate very quickly with great force. Do not position any part of your body too close to airbag, you or especially children could be seriously injured/killed by a deploying airbag.

•

In the case of a side collision, the curtain airbag may be deployed together with the relevant side airbag on the side the collision occurs

•

The side impact airbag is supplementary to the seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants

•

For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, all seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passengers arms and hands should be placed on their laps

•

Do not use any accessory seat covers. Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system

•

Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag

•

Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the air bag and yourself

•

Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the door and the seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplementary side impact airbag inflates

Do not cover the front seats with anything. It hinders the air bag inflation

An airbag is not designed to deploy in every type of crash. Depending on the type of accident or impact, the front airbags independently deploy thereby protecting the occupants. It is not necessary that ALL the airbags deploy during an accident.

2.5.3 Side Curtain Airbag (If equipped)

The side curtain air bags are contained between right above the front and rear doors and the end of the vehicle roof.

The Side Curtain air bags are located along sides of the roof rails on the A & B pillars. They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain airbag are designed to deploy depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations.

•

In the case of a side collision, the side airbag may be deployed together with the relevant curtain airbag on the side the collision occurs

•

In order for side and curtain airbag to provide the best protection, both front seat occupants and outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened. Importantly, children should sit in a proper child restraint system in the rear seat

•

When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to position the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a locked position

•

Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain airbag

2.5.4 Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation

The passenger air bag activation/deactivation option is available in Instrument cluster menu.

Select Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation option in center fascia switch to activate/deactivate (not inflatable) the front passenger airbag as per below reference images

A: MENU button

B: UP

C: OK

D: Down

Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator

This Warning indicator glows on center fascia switch on IP when passenger airbag “OFF” position.

Passenger Airbag ON Indicator

This Warning indicator symbol glows on center fascia switch on IP when selecting the passenger airbag “ON” option to enable the passenger airbag.

2.5.5 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp

Airbags do not require any regular maintenance or service. The airbag system malfunction lamp illuminates when the ignition is ON, and it turns OFF after about two seconds as self check confirming normal operations of airbag system and malfunction lamp.

This lamp monitors airbag sensor assembly, airbag sensors, indicator lamp, seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.

If either of the following conditions occur, there is a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioner. Immediately contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

•

The lamp does not glow when the ignition is switched ON or glows beyond six (6) seconds after switching the ignition ON

•

The lamp comes ON at any other time, even briefly

•

The lamp comes ON intermittently

Never make any modifications to your vehicle which could affect the performance of airbag system. In particular, changes to the vehicle frame, bumpers, bull bar, front fenders, ride height, suspension, seat belts, interior trim, seats or steering wheel (especially covers, pads or other trim), could prevent proper deployment of the airbag. If you need to make any modifications to accommodate any disability you may have, please contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Never try to open or strike the airbag cover. If the airbag cover is cracked or damaged in any way, the airbag may not function as intended. Take the vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Even if the airbags do not deploy during an accident, take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for a thorough inspection of the airbag and seat belt systems, no matter how minor the accident. The airbag system could have been damaged, and may not work as intended in the future, resulting in serious injury.

2.5.6 Airbag Inflation/Deployment

The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. This initiates a chemical reaction which quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas.

Upon deployment, tear seams moulded directly into the pad covers separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the airbags. A fully inflated airbag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to manoeuvre or operate other controls.

Deployment of the airbags happen in a milliseconds, producing a loud noise releasing a ‘white smoke’ and residue along with a non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue with soap and water as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation. Exit the vehicle as soon as possible after the accident.

Airbag deployment may cause windshield to break.

•

Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent them from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in serious injury

•

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment. The airbags inflate only once

•

Do not cover the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats with any object (e.g. dash panel covers, seat covers) which may prevent the airbags from inflating properly

•

The airbags inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can also cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant's hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. Sit straight and well back into the seat. Move your seat as far back as practical to allow room for airbag inflation, while still allowing you to properly operate/drive the vehicle

The front passenger should never sit on the edge of the seat, stand near the glove compartment, rest feet or other parts of the body on the dashboard when the vehicle is moving.

The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard can be seriously injured during airbag deployment.

•

The driver must sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle

•

The front passenger must sit as far back as possible from the dashboard

•

Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying airbag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury

•

Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, on the seat cushion centre with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor

•

All vehicle occupants must be properly restrained using the seat belts

•

All infants and children must be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle in a child restraint seat and be properly restrained by seat belts

•

Front airbags can injure occupants who are improperly positioned in the front seats

•

Even with airbags, improperly belted and un-belted occupants can be severely injured when the airbag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, airbags and occupant safety contained in this manual

•

Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system or side impact airbags

•

Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses

2.5.7 Child Restraint and Airbag

Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it

In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the following position. On the front passenger’s sun visor

Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!

Never put a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it can cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured in the event of a crash. All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.

Instal the child restraint system on the rear outboard seats, and securely lock the child restraint system in position with the help of i–Size.

Always Buckle Children (ABC) in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride.

2.5.8 Airbag Deployment

The images shown in this section are for illustrative purpose only. They may not look like your model/variant or vehicle.

Front Airbag

Front airbag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.

2.5.9 Airbag Non-deployment

Impacts below a pre-determined threshold level may not cause the airbag to deploy in the following cases:

Collision with Utility Poles or Trees :
	Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.

Frontal Impact :
	Frontal impact beyond 30º range from head-on to the vehicle.

Frontal Side Swipe Impact:

Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not provide the deceleration force necessary for airbag deployment.

In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any airbags.

Under-ride Situations :

Running under a truck's tailgate may not provide the decelerations necessary for airbag deployment.

Airbags will not inflate in this “under-ride” situation where deceleration forces that are detected by sensors are significantly low.

Rear-end Collisions :

Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, where occupants are moved backward away from the airbags by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.

Potholes or Stepped Surfaces :

Driving into a big pothole, stepped surface or hitting the far side of a hole/incline will not inflate the airbag.

Rollover:

Airbags will not inflate in rollover accidents where airbag deployment would not provide protection to the occupants. However, side impact and curtain airbags may inflate only when severe side impact causes rollover.

2.5.10 Airbag Service

Airbag Replacement: Self-servicing or tampering with the airbag system is dangerous. An airbag could accidentally deploy causing serious injuries, or will not deploy when there is a need. Always take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for inspection and repairs.

Removing SRS Related Parts: We do not recommend removing the instrument panel, steering wheel, seats or airbag related parts or sensors by any individual or garages which are not recommended. Airbags could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries, or they may not deploy when there is a need. Visit an Mahindra Authorised Dealer if these parts must be removed.

Airbag Disposal: Improper disposal of an airbag or a vehicle with live airbags can be extremely dangerous. Approach an Mahindra Authorised Dealer to do these jobs.

Airbag Repair: If the front airbag cover or instrument panel airbag cover shows signs of damage or having been removed, the vehicle should be towed to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for repair. Do not attempt to self repair or reinstall the cover.

Airbag Maintenance: For cleaning the airbag covers/areas, use only a soft dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system.

3 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES

3.1 Instrument Cluster Overview

High

Low

3.1.1 Speedometer

High	Low

The speedometer indicates actual vehicle speed in kilometers per hour.

The vehicle speedometer is affected by size of the tyres used. If the size of the tyres are changed from those fitted at the factory, the speedometer might not display the correct road surface speed and distance travelled.

Over Speed Alert Buzzer

Primary level: Buzzer will trigger single chime in every 2 minutes when the vehicle speed reaches 80 kmph. once primary level chime is triggered, it will continue playing until speed is reduced to 76 kmph or goes beyond 120 kmph.

Secondary level: Buzzer will trigger periodic chime when the vehicle speed reaches 120 kmph and chime will continue playing until vehicle speed is reduced to 114 kmph. Below this speed primary level chime will be triggered and will continue till 76 kmph.

3.1.2 Tachometer

High	Low

The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of RPM (revolutions per minute). Each division is 1000 RPM. Operating the engine at very high RPM may lead to excessive engine wear and low fuel economy. Maintain steady engine speed below 2500 RPM and do not accelerate or decelerate abruptly.

Do not over-accelerate the engine during idling, this can cause severe engine damage and would be treated as abuse of the engine which is not covered by warranty.

Tacho red band range:

Gasoline 5500 - 7000 rpm

Diesel 5000 - 7000 rpm

Diesel (High Variant): Tacho red band shall change based on engine parameters

3.1.3 Fuel Level Gauge

High	Low

The fuel level gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It gives the status of the fuel level in the fuel tank. F indicates the tank is full (57 +/- 2 liters), E indicates the tank is empty.

When the fuel level reaches the reserve, the last bar will be displayed and low fuel telltale will be ON (approx 12 liters). when the fuel tank is completely empty, last bar goes off from display and low fuel telltale will be blinking . The amount of fuel required to fill the tank up may be less than the specified tank capacity, as a small amount of reserve fuel always remains in the tank.

On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel level may fluctuate or the last bar may flash earlier than usual. Always check the fuel level when the vehicle is on level road. If the last bar is still off and telltale is blinking even after filling sufficient fuel, contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.

When all the bars in the display starts blinking/flashing, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer at the earliest.

It is highly recommended to start the fueling at ignition OFF condition and turn on the ignition only when fueling is finished to get correct fuel level.

IGN ON fuel filling may lead to inconsistency and can cause for DTE fluctuation.

3.1.4 Temperature Gauge

The engine coolant temperature gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It indicates the instantaneous engine coolant temperature. The coolant temperature varies with changes in weather, load on engine and driving pattern.

If the gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward “H” mark. it indicates the engine overheating that may damage the engine. Allow engine to cool. In such situations switch OFF the AC and observe any improvements in the temperature gauge. If not, stop the vehicle and allow the engine to cool down. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir and top-up if required. If the engine is still overheating, contact your nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

High	Low

Never remove the Degassing tank cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could splash on to skin/eyes causing severe burns. Wait for the engine to cool down before adding coolant to the reservoir.

Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This will lead to damage of engine components and engine seizure.

3.1.5 Outside Ambient Temperature (if equipped)

High	Low

This Screen shows the outside ambient temperature and we can change units based on infotainment setting.

3.1.6 Gear Information

Gear information shows the actual gear the vehicle is currently in.

Based on the various parameters, it will also provide an up shift / down shift recommendation for better fuel economy.

High	Low

Operating Conditions

UP/DOWN arrows recommend to up shift / down shift the drive gear.

3.1.7 Odometer

The odometer records and displays the total distance travelled in Km. Odometer cannot be reset.

High	Low

3.2 Drive Mode (If equipped)

Drive modes shall change driving characteristics by changing elements such as Engine power, Traction control, Climate control and Steering weight settings.

The vehicle has selectable drive modes like Zip, Zap and Zoom. The selection of drive mode is made via dedicated button or switches.

Drive selection menu part of cluster and cluster will display the current drive mode.

Refer Drive modes in the “Starting and Driving chapter” for further details

3.3 4XPLOR Mode (If equipped)

4XPLOR Drive Mode System is designed to adjust the vehicle’s driving dynamics for the type of terrain you’re driving on. It uses throttle position, vehicle speed, and steering angle to determine how your vehicle is responding compared to your commands. Torque is then adjusted front to rear and side to side in a split second to enhance traction

Refer 4XPLOR mode in the “Starting and Driving chapter 1” for further details

3.4 Instrument Cluster Control Switches

The instrument cluster menus can be changed using the cluster control switches on the Steering wheel or the Driver side switch bank.

Driver side switch bank is located on the right hand side of the Instrument Panel.

A: UP button: Used to scroll vertically up direction

B: Down button: Used to scroll vertically down direction

C: Menu button: Horizontal scrolling i.e., change in menu

D: OK button: Select a option

The right most steering wheel switches are used to control the instrument cluster menus.

A: Menu button: Horizontal scrolling i.e., change in menu

B: UP button: Used to scroll vertically up direction

C: OK button: Select a option

D: Down button: Used to scroll vertically down direction

E: Favorite button: Select a Favorite option

3.5 Instrument Cluster screen flow

3.6 Drive Info

High	Low

Drive info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering Wheel/Driver side switch bank.

Use OK button to enter Drive info page.(High)

3.6.1 Trip Meter

High	Low

Two trip meters are available with max range of 9999.9 km. These are available in drive info menu and can be accessed using UP/DOWN switch.

Trip meter can be reset by long press of OK. Resetting trip will reset average speed and drive time associated with the particular trip.

It is recommended to reset the trip meters when battery is disconnected and reconnected

3.6.2 Drive Time

High	Low

Drive Duration is the elapsed time from the start of this trip cycle.

Drive time is part of trip page. Drive time will reset along with trip reset.

3.6.3 Average Speed

High	Low

Average Speed is calculated based on the total distance covered and time taken from the start of this trip cycle. Average speed info is part of trip page. Average speed will reset along with trip reset.

3.6.4 Clock & Date

High	Low

The time on the clock & date is in sync with the infotainment. Any change in infotainment will reflect on the cluster. Refer settings for changing clock type.

3.6.5 Driver Drowsiness Index (If equipped)

Drowsiness detection is a safety technology that can prevent accidents that are caused by drivers who fell asleep while driving.

Cluster will display the 5 level of driver attention level based on drive Pattern

5 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is Completely Awake.

4 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is Quite Awake.

3 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is Neither Awake nor Sleepy.

2 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is slightly sleepy and can stay awake with effort.

1 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is extremely Sleepy and can’t stay awake

Refer DDD section in “Starting and Driving the vehicle” chapter for more details

3.6.6 REGEN (If equipped)

High	Low

This page will appear only when vehicle is capable of Park regeneration (DPF telltale ON or Blinking) along with REGEN telltale.

Refer fuel emission control section for more details on Park regeneration.

3.7 Fuel Info

Fuel info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
High	Low

It displays data related to fuel consumption pattern of vehicle. Use OK button to enter Fuel info page (High)

3.7.1 Distance to Empty (DTE)

High	Low

Distance to Empty is the approximate distance that can be covered with the available fuel.

3.7.2 Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE)

AFE is calculated based on the last AFE reset cycle.

High	Low

AFE can be reset by long press of OK button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.

Additional options to change AFE reset to every ignition ON or after every fuel refill are present in the settings menu.

3.7.3 Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE)

High	Low

Instantaneous Fuel Economy is calculated based on your current driving pattern. Higher value on display means vehicle is consuming less fuel, lower value on display implies it is consuming more fuel.

3.7.4 DEF Level (If equipped)

High	Low

Instrument cluster will display the amount of DEF present in the DEF tank

3.7.5 ECO Score (If equipped)

High	Low

It displays the average Eco Score from your Ecosense screen in the Infotainment.

3.8 Digital Speed

Digital speedometer displays the speed of the vehicle numerically. It provides an immersive experience by having option to switch off the lights of Speedometer and Tachometer.

High	Low

Digital speedometer can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.

Use OK button to enter Digital Speed page.

3.9 Vehicle Info

Vehicle info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.

High	Low

It displays data related to vehicle information like TPMS , Roll & Pitch and 4WD Torque distribution.

Use OK button to enter Vehicle info page.

3.9.1 Tyre Pressure (if equipped)

Tyre Pressure is an electronic system designed to monitor the air pressure inside pneumatic tyres.

This system will alert the driver if the tyre pressure falls below the low pressure or raises above high pressure warning limit for any reason. Including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tyre. The Tiretronics will continue to alert the driver and will not turn off untill the tyre pressure is inflated to the recommended pressure.

Refer Tiretronics chapter for more details.

3.9.2 Power & Torque (If equipped)

This screen indicate the current power and torque with respect to max power which can be achieved.

3.10 Navigation (If equipped)

Navigation can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.

It displays data related to map view which is displayed in infotainment.

Use OK button to enter Navigation page.

Cluster will display the Navigation information.

Like Turn By Turn Navigation and Full / Partial Map view from Android auto (If available) or native navigation.

Partial Screen Navigation	Turn by Turn Navigation

To enter Full navigation if you are at partial Navigation screen, Long Press the OK switch to view full map.

3.11 Cluster Setting (if equipped)

High	Low

Settings can be accessed by pressing MENU switch. To enter inside settings, press ok.

Use UP / DOWN button to navigate setting features

Following settings are available:
1. AFE Auto Reset 2. Passenger Airbag 3. Drowsiness Detection* 4. TPMS – Auto Learn * 5. Tyre Fill Assist *	6. Sound* 7. Clock Type 8. Date * 9. Time * 10. Factory Reset *- if equipped

3.11.1 AFE Auto Reset

High	Low

1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.

High	Low

2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to AFE Auto Reset option

High	Low

3. Press OK to enter AFE Auto Reset option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.

After Ignition : After a predetermined time where the vehicle’s ignition is OFF the AFE will reset.

After Refuelling : Refuelling at ignition OFF and then driving will reset the AFE.

3.11.2 Passenger Airbag

High	Low

1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.

High	Low

2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Passenger Airbag option

High	Low

3. Press OK to Select following screen will appear. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select, a pop-up will appear to confirm the selection

High	Low

4. Press OK to select a option. Confirm your selection by selecting Ok or Cancel.

3.11.3 Drowsiness Detection(if equipped)

	1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
	2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Drowsiness Detection Option
	3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the Drowsiness Detection Option.

3.11.4 TPMS-Auto Learn (if equipped)

	1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
	2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to TPMS-Auto Learn Option
	3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the TPMS-Auto Learn Option.

3.11.5 Tyre Fill Assist (if equipped)

	1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
	2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Tyre Fill Assist Option
	3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the Tyre Fill Assist Option.

3.11.6 Sound (if equipped)

Turn Indicators, Notifications Sound are having options to select different sounds and Volume level adjustment.

	1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
	2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Sound Option.
	3. Press ok to enter Sound Option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to enter Sound Options
	4. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.
	5. Use Up/Down button to Select the volume Level. Press OK to enter Volume Option.
	6. Up/Down button to select the volume levels. Press OK to select. Once selected it will return to previous page.

3.11.7 Clock Type

1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.

2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Clock Type Option.

3. Press ok to enter Clock Type option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.

3.11.8 Date (if equipped)


1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.	2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to date Option.

3. Press ok to enter date option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.	4. Use Up/Down button to select date format and set date. Press OK to set.

3.11.9 Time (If equipped)


1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.	2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to time option.

3. Press ok to enter time option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.	4. Use Up/Down button to select time format and set time. Press OK to set.

3.11.10 Factory Reset

1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.

2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Factory Reset Option.

3. Press OK to Select following screen will appear. Use Down button to select Confirm. Press OK to start factory reset process.

To go to the main settings screen from any settings menu, use Up/Down buttons to go to the top of the menu screen and press the OK button.

In the settings screen, if no option is selected for a long time. The screen will go to the previous displayed screen.

3.12 Alert History

Alert History can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.

Use OK button to enter Alert History page

Alert history allows to check any active applicable vehicle warnings in the instrument cluster display.

Live warnings shall displayed in the cluster center display area and warning count will decrease if viewed in the warning history page.

3.13 General Alerts

Display	Operating Conditions
	This alert is displayed when any doors are open and show the door identified as open.
	This alert is displayed when the check engine warning telltale is ON and engine is running.

Display	Operating Conditions
	This alert is displayed when engine temperature high telltale is ON and engine is running.
	This alert is displayed when an ABS related malfunction is detected.
	This alert is displayed when low brake fluid is detected and engine is running.
	This alert is displayed when the park lamp is ON and the ignition is turned OFF.
	This alert is displayed when low fuel warning telltale is ON or blinking and engine is running.
	This alert is displayed when the engine oil pressure warning telltale is ON and engine is running.
	This alert is displayed when either of driver or passenger (if occupied) seatbelt is unbuckled.
	This alert is displayed when water is detected in fuel filter and engine is running. It is applicable for the diesel variant only.
	This alert is displayed when passenger airbag is turned OFF.
	This alert is displayed when brake EBD related malfunction is detected.
	This alert is displayed when the ESC malfunction is detected and engine is running.
	This alert is displayed when EPC related malfunction is detected
	This alert is displayed when Sunroof is left open at ignition off.
	The alert is displayed when ignition is off, driver door is open and the driver has forgotten their phone in the wireless charging tray.
	The alert is displayed when 4WD system related malfunctions is detected.
	This alert is displayed when Zip drive mode is activated.
	This alert is displayed when Zap drive mode is activated.
	This alert is displayed when Zoom drive mode is activated.
	Instrument cluster shall monitor some of the internal parameters and if any malfunction is detected it will display the “Contact Dealer” alert. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately when “Contact Dealer” alert is displayed in cluster.
	The alert is displayed when the driver becomes very drowsy and is not able to stay awake. The alert indicates the driver to take an immediate break.
	This alert is displayed when malfunction in Attention Assist system is detected.
	This alert is displayed when the Hill Descent Control function is not available because of a malfunction in the system.
	This alert is displayed when the Hill Hold Control function is not available because of a malfunction in the system.
	This alert is displayed when the vehicle is driven above 120 kmph.
	This alert is displayed when you try to move the vehicle and the park brake is still engaged.
	This alert is displayed 200 Kms before the scheduled service limit.
	This alert is displayed when a coin or metallic object is placed on the wireless charging tray & the phone is kept on the object leading to poor charging of phone. This will also be displayed if the phone is detected in a incorrect position on the charging tray. Adjust the phone to allow it to charge optimally.
	This alert is displayed when a NFC enabled card is placed on the wireless charging tray & a phone is placed on top of. Kindly remove the card to protect the card.
	This alert is displayed when the Skyroof is open and vehicle speed in high.
	This alert is displayed when the Sunroof is not learnt.
	Rain Sensor/Non Rain Sensor Variant: This alert will displayed when low wipe is ON for more than 10 seconds or high wipe is ON for more than 5 seconds in both RLS & Non RLS variants.

3.14 Partial Alerts

Display	Operating Conditions
	This message comes when auto light is turned OFF.
	This message comes when auto light is turned ON.
	This message comes when auto wiper is turned OFF.
	This message comes when auto wiper is turned ON.
	This message comes when cruise mode is turned ON.
	This message comes when cruise mode is turned OFF.
	This message comes when brake pedal is pressed when in cruise mode or if trying to activate cruise control when vehicle speed is below the cruise threshold.
	This message comes on when HDC function is enabled by pressing the HDC switch and the conditions for HDC are met . The brakes will then maintain the vehicle speed while descending the Hill
	This message comes on when the Hill Descent Control is disabled manually by pressing the HDC Switch.
	This message comes on when the Hill Descent Control is enabled manually by pressing the HDC Switch and is ready to control, but the conditions for HDC are not met yet.

3.15 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS) (if equipped)

Tyre direction monitoring system or TDMS assists you when vehicle has just started and you are about to move the vehicle. It tells you about the current direction in which tyres are aligned at very beginning of manoeuvring the vehicle. TDMS works only when vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged or when vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch is not engaged

<Level 5>

<Level 3>

<Level 0>

Operating Conditions

Tyre alignment is displayed in 6 levels (level 0 to level 5) depending on the alignment degree when the ignition switch is turned to "ON" position from "OFF" position

Working conditions:

1. When vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged.

2. When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch is not engaged.

3.16 Favorite Function

Favorite button short press, Cluster will display the screen which was already saved as favorite.

User can set as favorite any one of the menu screen (Vehicle info, Fuel info, Digital speed, Drive info, Navigation, Driver Assistance, Audio, Display Layout & Setting Level 1) except settings (Level 2,3,4) REGEN function & Warning history.

Favorite Feature

Non–Favorite Feature

Each time user make a screen as favorite by pressing Favorite button long press during the previously added favorite screen will be replaced by the current screen.

3.17 Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument Cluster

High

Few Tell Tales grouped in to same slot and this will be cyclic based on tell tale status.

Low

Sr. No.	Warning Lamp/Telltale	Lamp Pre-check	Lamp Status while Engine running	Action/Remarks
1	Left Turn Indicator	No	Slow or Fast Blinking	Indicates left turn lamp is blinking Slow Blinking: Normal operation Fast Blinking: One / more left turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced
2	Right Turn Indicator	No	Slow or Fast Blinking	Indicates right turn lamp is blinking Slow Blinking: Normal operation Fast Blinking: One /more right turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced
3	Cruise Control telltale*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates vehicle is in Cruise mode
4	Water-in-Fuel Warning telltale*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates water-in-fuel. Drain the water from filter or contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance
5	Immobiliser lamp	No	Continuously ON / Blinking	SLOW BLINKING: Vehicle is armed with the remote FAST BLINKING/CONTINUOUSLY ON: Indicates a system malfunction Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
6	ABS Warning telltale	Yes	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction of the ABS system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
7	Park Brake / EBD / Low Brake Fluid Telltale	Yes	Continuously ON	Either one of the below conditions: 1. Park Brake might be engaged 2. Brake fluid level might be low 3. There is a malfunction in brake EBD.
8	Parking Lamp telltale	No	Continuously ON	Indicates Park Lamp is ON
9	Airbag Warning telltale	Yes	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction of the airbag system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
10	HHC Malfunction*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
11	Door Ajar Warning telltale	No	Continuously ON	Indicates any doors, boot or hood are open
12	Low Fuel Warning telltale	No	Continuously ON/Blinking	Indicates fuel level has reached the reserve level. Refuel immediately
13	ESC OFF telltale*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates ESC has been switched OFF
14	ESC Malfunction Warning telltale*	Yes	Continuously ON or Blinking	BLINKING: Indicates ESC has taken control of the vehicle stability CONTINUOUSLY ON: Indicates a malfunction in the ESC system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
15	Front Fog Lamp telltale*	No	Continuously Lamp ON	Indicates front fog lamp is ON
16	Tiretronics telltale*	No	Continuously ON or Blinking	Indicates low/high tyre pressure or possible malfunction in Tiretronics. Refer to Tiretronics section in INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES/WHEELS AND TYRES chapter for further details
17	Seat Belt Warning telltale	No	Continuously ON	If telltale is not turning OFF even after fastening the seat belt, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance
18	SCR/DEF malfunction telltale*	No	Continuously ON	It indicates that either DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has been filled or DEF Dosing is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”
19	DPF telltale*	No	ON/Blink	If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DPF regeneration has not happened. Follow the instructions mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”
20	Glow Plug telltale*	No.	Continuously ON	Indicates glow plugs are active.
21	Head Lamp High Beam	No	Continuously ON	Indicates Head lamp high beam is ON
22	OBD telltale	Yes	Continuously ON or Blinking	Telltale will be ON till engine starts. After engine starts, if is still ON there is a potential malfunction related to emission system, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
23	EPS Warning telltale*	Yes	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction on Electronic Power steering system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
24	Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning telltale	No	Continuously ON	Telltale will be ON till engine starts. In engine ON condition, it indicates engine oil pressure is low. Check oil level and top-up or contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance
25	Check Engine telltale	Yes	Continuously ON or Blinking	Indicates a potential malfunction in engine electronics, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
26	Battery Charging System Warning telltale	No	Continuously ON	Indicates that the alternator is not charging the battery. Contact Normal Operation: This lamp comes ON when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF once the engine starts. When continuously ON lamp indicates that the battery is not charging. Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance
27	High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning telltale	No	Continuously ON or Blinking	Engine temperature very high. Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
28	REGEN telltale*	NO	ON/Blink	ON: Regeneration is required Blink: Regeneration is in progress
29	AT Warning telltale*	No	Continuously ON or Blink	Telltale is used to indicate an AT fault. Telltale Continuous ON means AT Fault. Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately if the MIL Lamp doesn’t turn off after an ignition reset. Blinking Telltale implies overheating of clutch due to abuse conditions. This is only to warn the customer and to prevent clutch damage. Telltale will turn off once the clutch temperature has becomes normal.
30	HDC Malfunction telltale*	No	Continuously ON	Indicates malfunction of Hill Decent Control. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
31	Engine Start/Stop telltale*	No	Continuously ON or Blinking	CONTINUOUSLY ON: Engine is in auto stop mode Blinking: Stop/Start is about to stop the engine FAST BLINKING: Stop/Start is inhibited due to conditions not met.
32	4WD High*	No	Continuously ON or Blinking	Blinking: indicates 4 wheel drive high engagement is in progress. ON: 4 wheel drive high is engaged..
33	4WD Low*	No	Continuously ON or Blinking	Blinking: Indicates 4 wheel drive low engagement is in progress. ON: 4 Wheeldrive low is engaged.
* if equipped / select models or variants only

3.18 Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster

3.18.1 Turn Lamps

The turn lamp arrows in the instrument cluster flash showing the direction indicated by the turn signals. A sudden increase in the rate of flashing indicates failure of one or more of the lamp bulbs. Have them replaced as soon as possible.

3.18.2 Cruise Indicator (if equipped)

The lamp indicates the status of the cruise mode. Lamp ON indicates the vehicle is in cruise mode by pressing the SET+ button on the steering wheel switch bank.

Blinking indicates that the accelerator pedal is pressed when in cruise mode allowing for an overtake.

When CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel switch bank is pressed, cruise mode is deactivated and the lamp goes OFF indicating that the vehicle is not in cruise mode.

If the lamp does not illuminate when the vehicle is in cruise mode or does not go OFF when the vehicle is out of cruise mode, there is a possible malfunction in the lamp or the cruise control system. Have the vehicle checked by a Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

3.18.3 Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp (if equipped)

The water-in-fuel warning lamp illuminates when the accumulation of water in the fuel filter reaches the maximum permissible limit. The fuel filter needs to be drained. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Do not continue driving the vehicle with the Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp ON. This may result in fuel pump / other fuel system component damage, which will not be covered by the warranty.

3.18.4 Immobiliser

Immobiliser Lamp flashes intermittently (few secs. frequency) once the ignition is switched OFF and the vehicle security system is armed (when locked using the RKE).

Fast blinking indicates a malfunction in the engine immobiliser system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.

3.18.5 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Malfunction Lamp

If the ABS malfunction lamp is ON when driving ABS will not operate. But the brake system will still operate conventionally. In this condition, the wheels can lock during severe braking. Have the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.

However, if ABS malfunction lamp and brake warning lamp are simultaneously glowing, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS. Operate the vehicle with extreme care and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

if ABS malfunction lamp and parking brake warning lamp are simultaneously ON, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately

In this case, the ABS function is not available, but the conventional brake system is properly working

3.18.6 Parking Brake Lamp

The lamp illuminates when Parking brake is engaged or when brake fluid level is low or there is malfunction in EBD. If the lamp illuminates while driving, do the following:

A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the brake as well as ABS warning lamps.

•

Check if the parking brake/ Electric parking brake is engaged. If yes, disengage it

•

Check if brake fluid level is low. If yes, top-up brake fluid to the required level

Clean the top of the brake fluid reservoir before removing the cap. Make sure no dirt, impurities or other items fall into the reservoir. Do not leave the cap off for more than a few minutes. Any contaminants, impurities or moisture in the brake fluid can affect brake operation, resulting in an accident.

If the brake warning lamp comes ON while driving, the brake system might not be working properly. The pedal might be harder to operate or might go closer to the floor and it can take longer to stop. Pull off the road carefully and stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for checks or repairs.

Driving the vehicle with the brake warning lamp ON or when you suspect brake trouble is very dangerous and could result in serious injuries. Have your vehicle towed to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

When the EBD system is not functioning the vehicle could be unstable during the hard braking. Therefore you must pay attention to the driving conditions while this warning light.

3.18.7 Park Lamp

The Park lamp indicator illuminates whenever park lamp is switched ON through Combination switch. When ignition is switched OFF and if park lamp is ON with driver door open, and alert will be audible.

3.18.8 Airbag Warning Lamp

If the lamp remains ON continuously or flash intermittently, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.

Following conditions indicate airbag malfunction:

•

Lamp fails to go OFF after engine is started

•

Lamp does not illuminate at all

•

Illuminates while driving

Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately when the airbag warning lamp indicates a system malfunction. The airbag may not deploy when needed, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly or unnecessarily, which may result in personal injury.

3.18.9 HHC malfunction (if equipped)

HHC Malfunction Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 seconds. if there is any malfunction in hill hold control system of the vehicle.

There are chances of vehicle rolling down when starting on a hill. No assistance will be available from ESC system.

If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre

3.18.10 Door Ajar Warning Lamp

The door ajar warning lamp illuminates when any of the doors including the hood and back door are open during ignition ON. The buzzer chimes when the vehicle speed more than 2 kmph. The lamp and chime goes OFF when all the doors are closed properly.

3.18.11 Low Fuel Warning Lamp

When the fuel level in the fuel tank falls below the reserve limit, the low fuel warning lamp is illuminated. Refuel sufficiently and the lamp goes out. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after refuelling, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

3.18.12 ESC OFF Lamp (if equipped)

The ESC OFF lamp illuminates when the ESC has been switched OFF manually.

This lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 seconds. Pressing and holding the ESC OFF switch (for more than 3 seconds) turns on the indicator lamp indicating that the ESC function is deactivated.

3.18.13 ESC System Warning Lamp (if equipped)

While driving, if the ESC system warning lamp blinks, it indicates that ESC has taken control of the vehicle stability. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates the malfunction in the ESC System. Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre

3.18.14 Front Fog Lamp (if equipped)

The front fog lamp telltale indicates the status of the front fog lamp. The front fog lamp can be switched ON only when the parking lamp is ON.

Fog lamp will turn ON, if fitted in the vehicle.

3.18.15 Engine Stop/Start Lamp (If equipped)

The Engine Stop/Start lamp flashes when the vehicle/engine is about to stop through the Engine Stop/ Start System. The lamp illuminates continuously when the vehicle/engine has been switched OFF by the Engine Stop/Start System. On restarting the vehicle / engine again by using the clutch/key, the lamp goes out.

3.18.16 Tiretronics (if equipped)

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION : Tiretronics lamp Blink for approx. 90 sec & then Continuous ON.

SYSTEM WARNINGS: Tiretronics lamp Continuous ON.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION: System fail to function normally due to system failure/Sensor failure.

SYSTEM WARNING: indicated Low/High Tyre pressure, High Temperature, Air Leakage.

3.18.17 Seat Belt Warning Lamp

The seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the buzzer chimes reminding the driver to fasten the seat belt when the ignition is ON and vehicle running condition. The lamp will continue to illuminate till the driver fastens the seat belt properly.

3.18.18 DPF Indicator Lamp (If equipped)

If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DPF regeneration has not happened. Follow the instructions mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”.

3.18.19 DEF Indicator Lamp (If equipped)

If the DEF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has been filled or DEF Dosing is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM’.

3.18.20 Glow Plug Indicator (If equipped)

Glow plug indicator illuminates when the ignition is turned ON and Glow plug is activated. It automatically goes OFF when the glow plug reaches the required temperature. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer, if it illuminates while driving.

3.18.21 Head Lamp High Beam

The head lamp high beam telltale illuminates whenever the head lamps are switched ON to high beam or when the head lamp flash is used.

3.18.22 OBD Check Lamp

The OBD check lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and remains ON till the engine is started indicating normal status. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates a potential malfunction.

There may be a malfunction in:

•

The fuel management system

•

The emission control system

•

Systems which affect emissions

Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.

3.18.23 EPS Warning Lamp (if equipped)

The lamp Indicates malfunction on Electric Power steering system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.

When EPS is failed. vehicle can still be driven with increase in steering effort.

3.18.24 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp

The low engine oil pressure warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF when the engine is started. If the lamp remains ON even after starting the engine, or illuminates while driving, stop immediately, check the oil level after 2-3 minutes. If low, add engine oil to the “MAX” level and check status. If problem persists, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.

Operating the vehicle with the low oil pressure warning lamp ON could cause sudden unexpected engine failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Do not run the engine with low oil pressure warning indicator ON. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.

3.18.25 Check Engine Lamp

Indicating normal status. The lamp blinks or illuminates continuously if there is a fault in the engine management system. Switch OFF the engine immediately. Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for necessary repairs.

3.18.26 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp

The battery charging system warning lamp illuminates when the battery is not being charged or when there is a malfunction in the alternator.

This lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out as soon as the engine is started. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after starting the engine, it is an indication that the battery is not being charged or there is a malfunction in the alternator. Check the alternator drive belt for looseness/breakage. If the drive belt is okay, switch OFF all unnecessary electrical equipment and recheck. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.

3.18.27 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp

The high engine coolant temperature warning lamp flashes when the coolant temperature is above 113ºC . It starts to flash when the temperature reaches 113ºC and will be continuously ON with buzzer alert when the temperature reaches 115ºC.

The bars in the temperature gauge also flash in the same frequency as the high temperature warning lamp when the above set temperature thresholds are reached.

Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.

3.18.28 Regen Indicator Lamp (If equipped)

if it is continuously ON, It indicates the DPF Manual Regeneration is required. It will blink when Manual regeneration is in progress. Follow the instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM’.

3.18.29 AT Warning Lamp (If equipped)

•

This warning lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned on and it goes off when the engine is started.

•

If the lamp stays ON or comes ON while driving, some of the Transmission control components including sensors and devices may be malfunctioning.

•

If the Indicator lamp is blinking continuously, reduce the vehicle speed until the lamp stops blinking. Contact the Mahindra dealer as soon as possible.

3.18.30 HDC Malfunction (if equipped)

The lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off after about 4 seconds. Hill Descent Control or HDC malfunction warning lamp indicates malfunction in HDC system. Contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre

3.18.31 4WD High (If equipped)

This lamp indicates that the vehicle is driven in the 4WD high gear. Driving in this mode gives more traction while driving on cross-country roads .

3.18.32 4WD Low (If equipped)

This lamp indicates that the vehicle is running in the 4WD low gear. Driving in this mode gives maximum traction while driving on all adverse conditions.

4 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Your Vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations.

There are three emission control system which are as follows.

Crankcase emission control system

Evaporative emission control system

Exhaust emission control system

To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorised Mahindra dealer.

Emission Control Systems for Petrol vehicles

It is a highly effective system that controls exhaust emissions from an engine. It is crucial for meeting emission standards specified by law.

Your vehicle is equipped with a three-way catalytic converter (TWC) for meeting BS VI emission norms.

For optimal functioning of the emission control system, it is mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained by a Authorised Mahindra Dealer. The maintenance schedule in owner’s manual should be followed.
In addition, it is important to use the correct grade of fuel, confirming IS 2796:2017 BS VI specification.

Three-Way Catalytic Converter (TWC)

It is an exhaust after treatment component that is designed to convert carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC), nitrogen oxides (NOx) into carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N) and water (H2O).

Emission Control System for Diesel vehicles

The emission control system is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions from the engine and crucial for meeting emission norms specified by law.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following emission control systems for meeting BS VI emission norms.

Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)

Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR)

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control systems, it is mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained by a Authorised Mahindra Dealer. The maintenance schedule in the Warranty & Service Information Guide need to be followed.

It is also extremely important to use correct grade of fuel, Confirming to IS 1460:2017 BS VI Specification.

4.1 Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)

A diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) is an after-treatment component that is designed to convert carbon monoxide (CO) and hydrocarbons (HC) into carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O).

4.2 Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR)

Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is an advanced active emission control technology system that injects a liquid-reducing agent through a special catalyst into the exhaust stream of a diesel engine. The reductant is called as Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF). The DEF sets off a chemical reaction that converts nitrogen oxides into nitrogen and water which is then expelled through the vehicle tailpipe.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) MaxiCLEAN

To enable the SCR system to work efficiently and to ensure emission compliance, it is recommended to use MaxiCLEAN DEF meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification.

Replenishing DEF is part of regular maintenance service. DEF consumption is highly dependent on driving conditions/pattern and it may be necessary to refill the DEF reservoir in-between the scheduled service if need be, You are advised to monitor DEF Indicator Tell Tale and symbols/text messages displayed on the Cluster.

MaxiCLEAN DEF is available at all the Authorised Mahindra Dealers in packs of variable capacities. Individual DEF Packs may have specific filler neck, for filling DEF in the vehicle. While refilling DEF, take care to avoid spillage on your body or outer panels of the vehicle to avoid any stains or inconvenience.

It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the after-treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use DEF which does not meet the above specification. Further, this may lead to emission non-compliance and warranty getting void.

•

Use Genuine DEF MaxiCLEAN always.

•

Incase of non-availability of the above mentioned MaxiCLEAN Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be used.

•

Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary specifications and the after treatment system of your vehicle may be damaged.

•

Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never exceed 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component failure.

•

DEF quality and purity can be ensured only if it is stored as per recommendations. Hence ensure to store DEF in a cool, dry place.

•

Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This may cause damage to the after treatment system.

•

While refilling DEF be careful not to allow any foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to get inside the system. These may clog or damage the system.

•

While refilling DEF, use only the pipe supplied with the MaxiCLEAN. Do not use any funnel or container. Any contamination with Diesel or oils will cause malfunction of the after treatment system.

•

If DEF accidently spill over vehicle components or metal surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF residues will corrode the components, metal surfaces and painted body panels.

•

DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel system could get damaged.

•

In such a case, do not start the engine and immediately contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance.

Contamination/ Incorrect DEF: If incorrect or contaminated fluid is filled inside DEF Tank, contact an authorized M&M dealer to determine the appropriate repair procedure.

Handling of DEF

•

Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes, or clothing

•

Keep DEF out of the reach of children

•

In case if any part of the body comes in contact with DEF, clean affected area immediately with plenty of water

•

If DEF comes in contact with eyes, flush with plenty of water immediately and seek medical help.

•

If DEF is swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water, drink plenty of water immediately and seek medical help.

•

Refrain from storing DEF refill containers inside the vehicle. Ammonia vapors may escape from the container which have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, mucous membranes and eyes. Inhaling ammonia vapors may cause irritation to the eyes, nose and throat, as well as cough.

•

When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Therefore ensure to refill DEF in a well- ventilated area only.

•

If Diesel Exhaust Fluid is spilled on metal surfaces rinse and clean immediately with water. Failure to do so may leave permanent corrosive stains on the metal surfaces which cannot be removed.

DEF Operating Condition: DEF will freeze at -11°C (12.2°F). This is a natural phenomenon. The DEF system in the vehicle is designed considering this and does not require any external heating or additives to avoid freezing.

The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system purges to prevent damage from freezing. Do NOT disconnect battery power within 20 minutes of switching the ignition key off. Failure to comply may result in vehicle or property damage.

Refilling DEF: Your Vehicle DEF Filler Neck is located beside the Fuel filler Neck. The DEF storage tank is located under the body.

Following below are the steps to refill the DEF:

1. Park the vehicle on level ground and switch OFF the ignition.

2. Press the key fob unlock button and Press the fuel lid gently once to open.

3. Rotate the DEF filler cap in anti-clockwise direction and remove.

4. Fill DEF from the Container Pack. Each container pack has a unique mouth and filling provision. Ensure utilizing the same to avoid spillage. Example. 10 Liter Pack provided with filler tube.

5. Fill DEF as required. Maximum Storage capacity is 20 liters. Minimum quantity to be filled is 6.0 liters.

6. Rinse with water or use sponge wetted with water to clean the components/surfaces in case the DEF spills over.

7. Put the DEF filler cap back in its place and tighten in the clock wise direction, then close the fuel lid shut.

8. Switch the ignition ON

9. Verify that there is no warning regarding DEF low level. If the DEF Level Low warning is still appearing, check if enough quantity is filled, If still problem persist contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.

10. DEF is being monitored through iSmart tool during regular service at dealership and the required quantity will be filled accordingly.

It is highly recommended to DEF filling always at Ignition off condition only

4.2.1 SCR Alerts

Introduction

DEF telltale will turn ON and an error message with code will be displayed on the cluster screen due to any of the following reasons:

•

DEF level low

•

Incorrect DEF detected

•

DEF dosing malfunction

It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the after-treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use DEF which does not meet the specification. Further, this may lead to emission non-compliance and warranty getting void.

4.2.2 DEF Level Indication

When DEF level in the tank falls below pre-defined values, warnings are flashed in stages as explained below:

Irrespective of the warning stages, once DEF level is low, a minimum of 6.0 liters of DEF needs to be filled. If the warnings continue even after refill, contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.

E31	E31	E32

E33	E34	E35

In absence of DEF level low warning, refilling is not recommended.

Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never be more than 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component failure. Only a Authorised Mahindra Dealer will be able to correctly determine the quantity of DEF present inside the tank. Hence if you are refilling the DEF yourself, fill only 6.0 liters in case the DEF Low level warning is flashed.

If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF level, refill the DEF tank. Failure to refill may cause engine start restriction.

4.2.3 DEF Quality

If SCR system detects the quality of DEF inside the tank is not meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification, warnings will be flashed in stages as explained below:

E11	E12	E13

E14	E15

If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF quality, visit the nearest Authorised Mahindra dealer to have this repaired. Failure to repair the system may cause the engine start restriction.

4.2.4 DEF Dosing Malfunction

If SCR system detects any malfunction due to failures in components or tampering, warnings are flashed in stages as explained below:

E21	E22	E23

E24	E25

If the DEF telltale turns on due to dosing malfunction, visit an Authorised Mahindra Dealer to have this repaired. Failure to repair the system may cause engine start restriction.

4.3 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

The Diesel particulate filter (DPF) is an integral part of the vehicle exhaust gas emission reduction systems and it removes the soot (Particulate matter) from the exhaust gas. Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF is a regenerative filter. Regeneration is triggered automatically according to vehicle driving conditions which burns the accumulated particles/soot from the DPF. The process is called as DPF Active Regeneration.

However, if the vehicle continues to be driven in the below conditions the accumulated soot may not be automatically removed because of low exhaust gas temperatures.

1. Heavy traffic driving conditions, especially in the city

2. Frequent short trips

3. Low speed for a long time

When more than a certain amount of soot gets deposited, the DPF telltale turns ON along with the DPF clogged alert.

If the DPF telltale turns ON when driving the vehicle, it indicates that the DPF regeneration has not occurred successfully. At this moment, we suggest DPF regeneration must be done as mentioned below:

Take the vehicle to an empty stretch of road/highway and drive for 20 – 30 mins @ speeds above 60 km/hr until the telltale turns off.

•

Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by local jurisdiction while driving.

If the DPF telltale starts blinking, perform DPF park regeneration following the below procedure.

If the OBD telltale is ON & DPF telltale blinking. Stop the vehicle and contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra dealer for assistance.

Continuous driving with DPF telltale blinking may lead to failure of exhaust system components

DPF Park Regeneration

DPF park regeneration is the procedure to start a DPF regeneration when the vehicle is stationary from the instrument cluster. Follow the below steps to perform Park Regeneration. The DPF park regeneration is only possible when the REGEN telltale is ON in the instrument cluster.

•

Park the vehicle safely in a well ventilated levelled open space and free of any flammable material.

•

Shift the gear lever to Neutral with the engine running and apply the parking brake.

•

Access the Drive info menu in the instrument cluster and press the down button to go to the REGEN screen, REGEN screen will appear only when the REGEN telltale is ON.

•

REGEN screen will go OFF if REGEN telltale turns OFF.

•

When in the REGEN screen of the drive info menu, long Press OK button on the steering wheel or the driver side switch bank to start park regeneration.

•

Once regeneration starts, “In Progress” text will appear below REGEN. The engine idle speed will increase indicating regeneration has started.

•

Park Regeneration can take up to 30 minutes to complete. Once completed the REGEN telltale in the instrument cluster will turn OFF. The engines idling speed also returns to normal.

•

To abort the Park regeneration in case of any emergency, turn OFF the ignition or press any of the Accelerator, Brake or Clutch Pedals.

•

If the Park Regeneration gets aborted by itself or does not start, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance.

•

During the regeneration process, ensure not to park the vehicle close to any flammable materials as you may observe hot emission gases from exhaust pipe.

•

To avoid burns & personal injury, keep yourself away from exhaust system.

Park Regeneration process will not start if CHECK ENGINE LAMP or OBD are ON in the cluster. Take your vehicle to a Authorised Mahindra dealer for assistance.

When Park regeneration is happening do not press the Accelerator, Brake, Clutch pedals or change the gear from Neutral or Park as this will abort the regeneration process.

Diesel Fuel

It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel confirming to IS 1460: 2017 spec only.

If the diesel fuel with high sulfur content (more than 10 PPM) and unspecified additives are used, it can cause damage to the DPF system and will not be covered under warranty.

4.4 Instrument Cluster Telltales for DPF & SCR Systems

For other regional languages, Kindly refer the Annexure chapter at the end of this manual.

Do's & Don’ts

Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)

•

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be used.

•

Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary specifications and the after-treatment system of your vehicle may be damaged.

•

Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This may cause damage to the treatment system.

•

Total DEF quantity inside the DEF tank should never exceed 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component failure.

•

While refilling DEF inside tank be careful not to allow any foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to get inside the system. These may clog or damage the system.

•

DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel system could get damaged

•

If DEF is spilled over vehicle components and metal surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF residues will corrode the components and metal surfaces, painted body panels

•

Do not refill the DEF with Engine ON or ignition ON state

•

When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Refill DEF in a well - ventilated area only.

•

Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes, or clothing

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF): During the regeneration process, ensure not to park the vehicle near any flammable materials as you may observe hot emission gases from exhaust pipe.

To avoid burns & personal injury, keep yourself away from exhaust system.

Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by local jurisdiction while driving.

5 OPENING AND CLOSING THE VEHICLE

Your SCORPIO-N comes with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) depending on the variant. The keys operate all locks in your vehicle including those of the doors and ignition with steering lock.

Key Tag: Your key has a unique tag number which will be used incase of key lost. It is given on the tag attached to the key. It is recommended that you record the key tag number and store in a safe place.

Never leave the key in the ignition switch with children in the vehicle. A child could switch on the ignition, start the engine, operate power windows and other controls, or move the vehicle, resulting in personal injuries to the by stander and/or children seated inside.

5.1 Doors

5.1.1 To Open a Door from Outside

Pull the door handle firmly outwards to unlock and swing the door to open.

5.1.2 To Open a Door from Inside

Pull the door lever away from the door and push the door outward to open.

5.1.3 Locking / Unlocking Individual Doors from Inside

Individual doors can be locked/unlocked from inside by the respective door lock tabs.

Pull the lock tab outwards to unlock or push the tab inwards to lock that particular door.

A: Unlock

B: Lock

Locking the driver door from inside activates the central locking system, thereby locking/unlocking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.

5.1.4 Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside

The driver door can be manually locked/unlocked from outside by using conventional key.

The key is bidirectional. You can insert it into the keyhole either way. Turn the key anti-clockwise to lock or clockwise to unlock the door.

A keyhole is provided in the driver door, to lock/unlock the doors manually from outside. Locking the driver door from outside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.

5.1.5 Locking / Unlocking the Tailgate

	Press the Tailgate release button for 2 seconds on the remote to unlock the tail door. The hazard lamp flash three times indicating the same.
	Then press the tail gate release switch on the tailgate handle within 45 second as shown in the illustration and pull tailgate to open.

To close the tailgate, Push the tailgate door will be locked automatically

5.2 Central Locking System

All doors of the vehicle can be simultaneously locked or unlocked from the driver door.

5.2.1 Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from Outside

To manually lock/unlock driver door and Tail doors from outside using the conventional key, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise respectively in the driver door keyhole.

If any door was unlocked or not closed completely when central locking activated. It will only get locked when the door is completely closed..

Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done using the key fob. Refer the relevant sections in this chapter for more details.

5.2.2 Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from Inside

Pull the driver door lock tab outwards to unlock or push the tab inwards to lock all doors simultaneously

	A: Unlock B: Lock
(or)
	Driver can simultaneously lock/unlock all the doors by pressing this switch as shown in the image.

Anti-Lock Out

Master Actuator Lock at Door open (Except Driver Door) If any door is opened and driver door is in closed condition:

•

Vehicle speed is below 7 kmph - On actuating master actuator lock manually, master actuator will get lock & unlock immediately for the first time. On actuating master actuator lock again, vehicle will get locked.

•

Vehicle speed above 7 kmph - On actuating master actuator lock manually, vehicle will get locked for the first time itself.

If driver door is open and master actuator lock is performed, vehicle will not get locked

5.2.3 Child Safety Rear Door lock (If equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with left and right-side child safety rear door locks. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the rear door(s) cannot be opened from the inside. The door(s) can only be opened from the outside.

To activate the child safety right rear door lock, push the lever down (A) till you hear a distinct click indicating the activation of the child lock.

To de-activate the child safety right rear door unlock, pull the lever up (B) till you hear a distinct click indicating the deactivation of the child lock.

A: Unlock

B: Lock

If the rear doors are not operable from inside, ensure that the child safety locks have been disabled.

Mahindra strongly recommends that the child safety rear door locks be used whenever there are children travelling in the rear seat.

5.3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System enables you to LOCK or UNLOCK your vehicle without manually lock/unlock the doors.

Precautions while Handling Remote Key:

•

Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF signal

•

Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or bonnet under direct sunlight

•

Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer

A: LED

B: Lock

C: Tailgate Release / Search

D: Unlock

5.3.1 Remote Key Status LED

LED present on Remote would be indicating the user about the Remote lock/unlock/trunk button input.

5.3.2 To Lock and Arm the Vehicle with RKE

Press the LOCK button on the RKE key fob for locking and arming the vehicle.

Hazard lamps flash once - if all the doors in the vehicle are locked and armed successfully using RKE.

Hazard lamps flash five times along with an alarm - if any of the doors (including bonnet) in the vehicle are open.

If alarm is in mute condition only the Hazard lamps will flash. If alarm to be activated then Press Lock & Unlock button together to unmute the alarm. Now both Hazard lamps flash and alarm will work.

5.3.3 Unlock and Disarm the Vehicle with RKE

Press the UNLOCK button on the RKE key fob to unlock and disarm the vehicle.

Hazard lamps flash twice - if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.

Front DRL & Tail lamps flash twice (If equipped) - if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.

Hazard lamps flash four times along with an alarm - if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.

“Selective Unlock” Driver Door - “Selective unlock” should be enabled in Infotainment System for using this feature. Once enabled, if RKE unlock button is pressed, only Driver door will be unlocked. RKE unlock button has to be pressed again to unlock other doors.

Upon the remote lock, if any of the doors are not closed properly or left open, the hazard lamps will flash five times to indicate the same.

5.3.4 Search Function

Press the Tailgate button on the key fob 2 times within 2 seconds to locate the vehicle in a parking lot. Search alarm can also bring attention to the vehicle and surrounding area, warning about an intruder or seek for help.

When the SEARCH function is ON, the hazard lamps flash along with an alarm for 30 sec. In this mode:

•

Pressing any button on the key fob again switches OFF the alarm

•

Pressing the UNLOCK button switches OFF the alarm and disarms/unlocks all doors

The search function works both during the Locked/Unlocked conditions of the vehicle.

5.4 Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) System (if equipped)

Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) System enables you to enter or exit your vehicle without the need to manually lock/unlock the doors. You can start/stop, lock or unlock the vehicle using PKE. To do this, you only need carry the PKE key fob with you.

A: LED

B: Lock

C: Tailgate Release / Search

D: Unlock

The front side of the PKE key fob has three control buttons: Unlock (D), Lock (B) and Tail gate release (C) buttons. There is also a emergency key release button, which releases a mechanical key for emergency purposes (E.g. when PKE battery is low). To remove the metal key, press and hold the release button and pull the mechanical key out.

•

While locking and unlocking the vehicle Passively, the distance between the Smart Key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3ft (1m).

•

Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves

•

Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or bonnet under direct sunlight

•

Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer

•

The PKE can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity

Carrying the PKE along with you, you can lock or unlock the doors and tail door and even start and stop the engine without inserting the key. Functions of the buttons on a PKE is similar to the remote keyless entry.

Locking the vehicle

1. Carry the Key fob

2. Close all the doors

3. Press the button in the door handle.

4. The hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate the locking (5 blinks and 5 chirps will be provided if engine bonnet is open while locking)

5. Make sure that the doors are locked by pulling at the outside door handles

•

Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside door handle

•

Vehicle can be locked centrally by pressing the button in the door handle with the PKE key fob in the proximity (PKE key fob should be nearer to the triggered side). For E.g., locking/unlocking of the driver door is possible only if PKE is around the driver area

•

Even after pressing the outside door handle button, if the doors do not lock, a chime is heard along with the hazard blinking for 5 times, then one of the following situations are possible reason:

–

PKE Key fob is left inside the vehicle

–

One of the doors not closed properly

•

On attempting to lock by pressing the button in door handle, an alert will displayed in cluster, if the steering is not locked

•

With the one PKE Key fob inside, on locking the vehicle using other key fob/2nd key fob, the key which is kept inside would get deactivated completely for the security of the vehicle. To make the key active again, the vehicle should be unlocked either using PKE or by pressing remote unlock using the other key fob with which previously the vehicle was locked.

•

On performing PKE passive lock with key fob in your possession in ignition ON state, "Key Not in Vehicle" alert will be triggered in cluster along with chirp & hazard lamps flash for 5 times and vehicle will remain in unlock state.

•

On performing key fob remote lock with all doors closed in ignition ON state, no alert will be triggered and vehicle will remain in unlock state.

Unlocking the vehicle:

Carry the PKE Key fob

Press the button in the door handle

All doors would unlock and Front DRL & Tail lamps flash twice.

•

Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside driver door handle

•

Vehicle can be unlocked centrally by pressing the door handle only when the key is in same side of the driver door handle is pressed

Unlocking the Tail door alone:

1. Carry the PKE Key Fob

2. Press the button in the tail door handle and pull the tail door.

3. Tail door would unlock and hazard warning lights will blink 3 times

4. On closing the door, tail door would get locked automatically

•

Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside door handle

•

Tail door can be unlocked by pressing the button in the tail door only when the key is in range from the tail door

Mute/Unmute the Alarm/Beeps

The chirps can be muted / unmute. Press the LOCK & UNLOCK buttons together for 3 sec. to toggle between MUTE/UNMUTE mode. Hazard lamps will flash once to indicate unmute to mute condition. Hazard lamp & chirp will flash once to indicate Mute to unmute.

Only the door open beeps and alarm can be muted. The PKE alerts cannot be muted.

5.4.1 START/STOP Switch ( SSS) (if equipped)

The engine can be started or stopped by pressing the Start Stop Switch (SSS), with the valid PKE Key Fob inside the vehicle.

Whenever the doors are opened or the door handle button is pressed, the engine start/stop switch will be illuminated and will go off after few seconds.

Upon any fault identification by the system in the start/stop switch (SSS), an alert would be provided in the instrument cluster for few seconds. Please visit the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately to rectify the problem.

Even with the failure in the start/stop switch, vehicle's normal function may work which depends on the severity of the failure. Please visit the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer to rectify the problem immediately.

Engine start/stop Switch positions:

To operate the engine start /stop switch to its intended function, PKE Key Fob should be inside the vehicle.

OFF: To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and press the engine start/stop switch once. Status LED in the engine start /stop switch goes OFF to indicate the OFF position.

If the Engine is not switching off after pressing the Engine Start Stop switch (One Press), then press and Hold start/stop switch for more than 3 seconds ( Long press SSS) or rapidly press & release the engine start/stop switch 3 times within 3 seconds. On doing so, the vehicle ignition(IGN) status is changed to ACC position. Vehicle ACC mode will get off after 30 second OR user is opening Driver door. However, you can still lock the vehicle using mechanical key. Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer at the earliest

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-theft steering column lock. The steering wheel locks when the engine start/stop switch is in OFF position to protect against the theft. The steering wheel locks automatically when the driver door is opened or 30 seconds after engine start stop Switch changes to OFF position. If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver door and on attempting to lock the vehicle, a warning chirp along with the hazard blinks thrice. Try locking the steering wheel again (by toggling Engine Start/Stop switch). If the problem is not solved, we recommend to take the vehicle to nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.

Ignition ON: To switch ON the ignition, press the engine start/stop switch when the switch position is in OFF/ACC without depressing the clutch pedal and with the PKE Key Fob inside the vehicle. Status LED in the engine start/stop switch will turn red to indicate the IGN ON position and the vehicle is ready for starting.

OFF	ACC	ON

Keeping the system in the ignition ON position for longer time (will be noticeable by the LED lamp of the SSS remaining ON) without engine running, can drain the battery. Switch OFF the system if engine is not to be started for long duration.

Vehicle ignition would not turn to ON position on any of the following conditions:

•

If the electronic steering lock is not getting unlocked

•

A warning would be displayed in the cluster screen for few seconds.

. If the steering wheel doesn’t unlock properly, press the start/stop switch while turning the steering wheel right/left to release the tension on the lock.

Still if you are not able to turn ON the IGN, please contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Service Centre.

•

When engine start/stop switch is ON or engine is in running condition with vehicle at standstill and if any door is opened & closed, the system checks for the PKE Key fob.

If the PKE Key Fob is not inside the vehicle, an alert in the instrument cluster is displayed along with hazard lamps flash & chirp for 5 times to indicate that key is not detected inside the vehicle

Bring the PKE Key Fob inside the vehicle or keep the key in the detectable position whenever you are inside the vehicle.

Starting the vehicle

Manual Transmission: To start the engine, press the clutch and press the engine start/stop switch once with the key inside the vehicle. The engine can be started from any position (OFF / ACC / ON) of the start/stop switch.

Automatic Transmission: To start the engine, Gear Lever shall be in Park Position, press the Brake pedal and press the engine start/stop switch once with the key inside the vehicle. The engine can be started from any position (OFF / ACC / ON) of the start/stop switch.

Ensure the gear lever is in neutral/Park position before starting.

If engine start/stop switch is pressed without pressing the clutch (MT) / Brake (AT) pedal, engine will not start, and the vehicle power modes will change as follows: OFF→ ON →OFF→ ON

If the engine start/stop switch is pressed from the OFF position directly, along with the clutch (MT) / Brake (AT) in depressed position, there may be a small delay in the engine cranking. This is normal and is not a fault.

Never press the engine start/stop switch while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of direction control and braking function, leading to an accident.

Even if the key fob is not there in the cabin. The engine will keep running, until it is switched off, after that it can not be restarted in absence of the key Before leaving the driver seat, always make sure engine start/stop switch is in OFF position and always take the PKE Key Fob with you. If the Ignition remains ON and the doors are locked. The central locking system will give 3 chirps and flashes to indicate. This can cause battery to be drained off.

As a emergency procedure (if any failure of brake or clutch switch). If the SSS is pressed continuously for more than 10 seconds then the engine can be started.

Emergency stop: To turn the engine OFF in an emergency, press and hold the engine start/stop switch for more than 2 seconds or rapidly press and release the engine start/stop switch 3 times within 3 seconds. On doing so, the vehicle ignition is changed to ACC position.

BACK up Start: If the key fob battery is low, the key may not be detected on pressing SSS and SSS LED will be blinking in red color. In such a situation, press the start/stop switch once while the status LED in the button is blinking Red and the below error message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Now place the key fob in the key fob tray with the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal pressed and then push the Start-Stop switch twice to Start the engine.

On pressing the Start/Stop switch 1st time with the key fob in the key fob tray below the armrest. The Start-stop switch LED will blink in red color, with the above error message will be displayed again in the cluster. In this case, if you press the Start/Stop switch again vehicle will start in Back-Up mode, if the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal is pressed.

Back-up Mode : When the key fob battery is critically low to detect the key fob inside the vehicle or the battery is dead or not available. This mode is triggered by the PKE to understand the condition to Switch ON ignition and to start the vehicle engine.

If key fob battery is detected low by the PKE system, an alert would be triggered. Change the battery by following the procedure as mentioned in the section for battery replacement.

Key fob battery low can be detected only if the key has been continuously used in the vehicle. Keeping the key outside the vehicle for longer duration and then using it with the drained battery cannot be detected.

5.4.2 Vehicle locking/Unlocking in an Emergency Situation

If the PKE Key Fob does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the doors by using the mechanical key:

Refer to Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside (Mechanical/Electrical Handle) section for more details.

It is strictly not advisable to leave the key fobs in the vehicle. Vehicle can be started by any unauthorised person.

A maximum of 2 Keys can be registered to a vehicle. If you lose a key, we strictly recommend to contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately to block the lost key and to get a new key.

The PKE Key Fob may not work if any of the following occurs:

•

If the vehicle is close to a radio station, airport, or an area where there is a possibility of large radio transmissions which can interfere with the normal operation of the PKE/RKE

•

The PKE Key Fob is near a mobile or a cellular phone or some electronic gadgets like Laptop/Tablets. The signal from the PKE/RKE could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smartphone . Avoid placing the PKE/RKE and your electronic gadgets in the same trouser or jacket pocket or in the bag and maintain adequate distance between the two devices

•

Another vehicle PKE key fob is being operated close to your vehicle

•

PKE Key Fob kept inside the glove box or top bin in the instrument panel may not be detected sometimes. Keep the PKE Key Fob in the visible zone or in your pocket for getting it detected

•

Keep the PKE key fob away from the water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty

Make sure the vehicle ignition is in OFF state, whenever leaving the vehicle even with the key. By keeping the vehicle ignition in ON/ACC state will hamper the vehicle security.

Do not hand over the PKE Key Fob to any unauthorized person or service provider. Your vehicle security system may be compromised in doing so.

5.4.3 PKE Alerts

Display	Operating Conditions
	The warning will be triggered when the vehicle Ignition is in ON condition with the Brake pedal pressed & the user is pressing SSS to start Vehicle & Gear position is not in park or neutral. (If equipped)
	The warning will be triggered when vehicle Ignition ON or Engine running condition, user is pressing SSS to turn OFF Vehicle & Gear position is not in park. (If equipped)
	The warning will be triggered when Start Stop switch is Malfunction . Kindly contact the nearest Mahindra dealer
	The warning will be triggered when Key fob is not getting detected by the system. Users need to keep the key in the armrest Key fob Tray and then press the start/stop switch to turn ON the vehicle.
	The warning will be triggered when vehicle ignition in OFF condition. When user tries to lock the vehicle using driver door & co-driver PKE trigger switch, but key is inside the vehicle.
	The warning will be triggered when vehicle is in cranked or in ignition ON condition, but key is not inside the vehicle.
	The warning will be triggered when Key Fob battery is Low.

5.4.4 Steering Lock Alerts

Display	Operating Conditions
	A warning will be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel doesn’t unlock properly, press the start/stop switch while turning the steering wheel right/left to release the tension on the lock.
	If the electronics Steering Wheel not getting locked even though all locking conditions are satisfy then this warning is displayed.
	A warning will be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel lock unit has system failure. in this case please contact Mahindra dealership to check system failure.
	A warning will be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel does not pair with PKE ECU. in this case please contact Mahindra dealership to check system.

5.5 Remote Battery

Battery Specification

Battery Voltage	3 V
Battery Capacity	225 mAh
Battery Model No.	2032

Remote Battery Replacement

If the Remote operation is inconsistent when any of the buttons are pressed, then it indicates that the Remote battery is weak.
	The rear side of the Remote is snap fitted. Flip open the key blade and use two fingers on the side of the fob and gently pry open the battery cover.

Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently pry out the battery to and discard the same. Insert new batteries of 3V type (Battery No. 2032). While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the Remote casing and press to snap fit. Check operation of the Remote.

While prying the Remote case, take care not to damage the battery.

Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

Pull out the battery and discard the same. Insert new battery of same type. While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the Remote casing and press to snap fit. Check operation of the Remote.

The Batteries are Lithium Ion batteries. They should be kept away from children.

This product contains a lithium button cell. If the button cell is swallowed, severe internal burns can occur within a mere two hours and lead to death.

Keep new or removed batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, discontinue use and keep away from children. If you think that batteries have been swallowed or stuck in any part of the body, seek medical help immediately.

5.6 Remote Functions

5.6.1 Auto Locking

All doors will get locked automatically when;
All doors are closed properly
Vehicle speed is greater than 7 kmph

Auto Locking ON DOOR OPEN: Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the auto lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 20 kmph

Auto Locking ON MASTER ACTUATOR UNLOCK :Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the auto lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 20 kmph

5.6.2 Auto Unlocking

Auto Unlock of all doors will happen when Ignition is switched from ON to OFF, or In the event of a crash

5.6.3 Auto Re-locking

Auto Re-lock of all doors will happen when;
No door status change for 45 seconds after unlocking the vehicle using RKE/PKE

5.6.4 Mute/ Unmute Function

The chirps can be muted / unmute. Press the LOCK & UNLOCK buttons together for 3 sec. to toggle between MUTE / UNMUTE mode.

Hazard lamps will flash once to indicate unmute to mute condition. Hazard lamp & chirp will flash once to indicate Mute to un-mute

In the unmuted condition, alarm chirps can be heard during Auto Re-lock (1 Chirp), RKE Lock when door open (5 Chirps) and RKE Unlock if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period (4 Chirps). In the mute condition, only hazard would flash and alarm chirps would not be audible.

5.6.5 Theft Alarm

Vehicle enters alarm mode when there is a change in door status/ignition status provided the vehicle was locked through RKE.

Hazard Lamp and Alarm will flash 27 seconds.

After the alarm period, there will not be any alarm again till any further change in the door/ignition status.

The security system will be activated when the vehicle is locked using the PKE/RKE key fob. Locking the doors with the manual key will not activate the security system.

When the vehicle is armed by RKE, opening the door from the inside by operating the door inner handle or opening the door from the outside using the key will be treated as unauthorised activating the vehicle security alarm. If this occurs, the alarm can be disarmed by either pressing the ‘UNLOCK’ button on the RKE or turning ON the ignition followed by a successful authentication.

5.6.6 RKE Operating Range

Using RKE key fob , you can lock/arm or unlock/disarm the vehicle from distances approximately 9 m (30 ft) This is in open area.

If there is reduction in RKE range, please follow the steps below:

Check the distance: The RKE may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or bad weather
Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the RKE higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a radio transmitter such as radio station tower, airport transmitter, mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in range of RKE
Check the RKE battery: See battery replacement procedure, given later in this section
If the RKE is still not working correctly, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer

5.7 Key Fob Tray

The Key fob is to be kept in the above shown key fob tray when the system requests, like in the case of the below error message in the instrument cluster.

This message is displayed only when the PKE system fails to detect the key fob which is inside the vehicle when the user is trying to Switch ON the ignition.

In this case, if you press the Start/Stop switch again before the above error message in the instrument cluster goes away the 2nd time, the vehicle will start in Back-Up mode, if the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal is pressed.

5.8 If PKE/RKE Key fob is Lost

If you have lost the programmed PKE/RKE Key fob , contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for procuring a new Smart Key.

While programming a new key set, you will have to submit all the keys available with you, to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Please note that there is a limitation (max. 2 keys at a time) to the number of keys that can be ordered. The minimum timeframe required to supply the duplicate keys is 10 days after all the formalities are completed. Please contact the Mahindra Authorised Dealer to understand the formalities involved.

If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to deactivate the anti-theft devices or start the engine.

If the key is stolen or lost, communicate to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for de-activating the function of the lost or stolen key. This is essential to avoid unauthorised access using the misplaced key.

Only PKE/RKE transmitters programmed to your vehicle electronics can be used for remote locking and unlocking of your vehicle.

5.9 Key Fob Limitations

When the vehicle key fob is not working properly, It may be due to Radio Frequency (RF) interference caused by an external source like transformer, Amateur Radio, etc.. which emits power levels that is higher than the vehicle Key Fob. This interference may be resulting in RF signal not being received by RKE/PKE system controller.

Customer may not get Panic due to this non-function of key fob. After moving from the interference Zone, Key Fob may start working properly.

If still key fob not working then contact Mahindra Authorised service center for assistance.

5.10 Engine Immobiliser System

An Engine Immobiliser System is a security system that prevents the vehicle from being operated by an unauthorised person. The Engine immobiliser prevents the engine from being started unless it recognizes signals from the correct coded key. When a wrong key is inserted or a theft attempt is detected, the alarm is set off, and the hazard lamps flash along with a siren.

The system is automatically activated when the key is removed from the ignition.

5.10.1 Features of the Immobiliser System:

•

Prevents the vehicle being started by anyone not in possession of the correct vehicle key

•

The vehicle is automatically protected after the key is removed from the ignition/vehicle in PKE. At every ignition ON, if the vehicle does not recognize the correct key code, the engine check lamp will blink and security tell tale lamp will illuminate and the engine cannot be started.

•

The vehicle will not be protected until the key has been taken out of the ignition/vehicle in PKE.

If the engine check lamp flashes or remains continuously illuminated after the ignition being switched ON, there is a system malfunction. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.

With the correct coded key in the vehicle and pressing the SSS ON, automatically recognizes and authenticates the system. It enables the engine to start.

In the event of the vehicle not starting with the correct key, switch off the ignition for a minimum of 1 minute and attempt to start the vehicle again.

Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobiliser system. Any unauthorised changes or modifications can affect proper operation of the system and will void your warranty.

The security system will be activated when the vehicle is locked using the PKE/RKE key fob. Locking the doors with the manual key will also activate the security system.
Using the ignition key blade to open the diver door, when the vehicle was locked and armed with PKE/RKE key fob, in this condition if any of the door is opened which results in door switch status change will be treated as unauthorised by the system setting and this will trigger the alarm. Press the unlock button on the PKE/RKE key fob to off the alarm.

5.11 Opening and Closing the Bonnet

The bonnet release lever is in the driver side foot well area, below the instrument panel. To open bonnet follow the steps below:

1. Pull the lever below the driver side instrument panel to release the bonnet.

2. Lift the bonnet a little to access the safety latch holding the bonnet striker. This safety latch is located below the bonnet at the center.

3. Lift the safety latch and lift the bonnet.

4. bonnet is supported by a stay rod.

Be careful while opening the bonnet immediately after a drive; the engine compartment will be very hot

Always double check to be sure that the bonnet is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched properly, the bonnet can open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a loss of visibility, resulting in an accident

Do not move the vehicle with the bonnet in the raised position, as vision is obstructed

To close the bonnet, follow the below steps:

Remove the stay rod supporting the bonnet by slightly lifting the bonnet

Bring the bonnet near to its self-opening/closing position

Now, push the bonnet to close and ensure the primary latch is engaged

Before driving off, check bonnet is locked properly with primary latch fully engaged

Bonnet Open Hazard - When the bonnet is open and vehicle is in unlock condition:

•

Hazard lamps flash continuously to alert the user that the bonnet is open

•

Hazard cluster telltale also flashes

To stop the warning, do any one of the following:

•

Close the bonnet

•

Press the hazard button TWICE

•

Change the turn signal stalk position

•

Drive the vehicle > 10 km/hr.

5.12 Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing

Follow the below steps to open the Fuel lid:


1. Press the UNLOCK button on RKE/PKE.	2. Then press the fuel lid gently once to open.

Diesel	Petrol
`
Diesel should be filled in diesel filler cap.	Petrol should be filled in petrol filler cap.
Diesel should not be filled in blue (DEF) filler cap.

3. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise to open. Refuel and put the cap back in its place and tighten in the clockwise direction till three distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid shut and press the fuel lid once again to make it flush with body.

Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before starting the vehicle.

Fuel filler lid cannot be released whenever the vehicle locked condition.

5.13 Manual Fuel Lid Override

Follow the below process to open the fuel lid manually in case of any issue in electrical circuits:

	1. Press and Open the trim cover on Left side of luggage compartment.
	2. Unhook and Pull the blue color knob as shown in the illustration to unlock the fuel lid manually.

3. Then press the fuel lid gently once to open.

4. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise to open. Refuel and put the cap back in its place and tighten in the clockwise direction till three distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid shut and press the fuel lid once again to make it flush with body.

Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before starting the vehicle.

Do not pull the cable with high force or pull excessively as it may damage the locking mechanism.

6 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS 1

6.1 Control Switches

The driver door switch bank is located on the driver door armrest/handle and controls and the various functions:

A	ORVM Folding/Unfolding Switch
B	ORVM Adjustment Switch
C	Driver Door Window Switch
D	Rear RH Door Window Switch
E	Door Lock/Unlock Switch
F	Window Lock Switch
G	Rear LH Door Window Switch
H	Co–driver Door Window Switch

6.1.1 Driver Door Power Window Switch

Power windows can be operated when the ignition is in “ON” position.

The driver can operate all the power windows in the vehicle through the Driver door window switch on the driver door armrest/handle.

Other passengers in the vehicle can raise or lower their respective window glasses individually by using the separate switches provided on each of the door trim pads/armrests.

To lower/raise the window glass, press/lift the respective power window switch accordingly

Do not operate the power windows frequently when the engine is OFF. This will drain the vehicle battery.

If you operate the switches often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain duration to prevent damage due to overheating. The system will return to normal functioning shortly. In such scenario, customer should wait for 1-2 minutes & should not operate the switch during this period. After 2 minutes operate the switch for Open/Close the windows.

It is recommended to operate one window switch at a time.

To avoid any personal injuries always check and ensure that there are no obstructions like head, hand, etc. while operating the 'power windows'.

6.1.2 Power Window Lock Switch

The power window quadruple switch in the driver door trim has a power window lock switch to enable or disable operation of rear passenger window switches.

To disable the rear passenger power windows, press the window lock switch down.

To revert to normal operation, press the window lock switch again.

6.1.3 Door Lock/Unlock Switch

The Door lock/unlock switch is located on the driver door trim. Driver can simultaneously lock/unlock all the doors by pressing this switch as shown in the image.

6.1.4 Smart Power Window with Anti-Pinch (If equipped)

Smart power window is one of the significant safety features with the anti-pinch function, which automatically reverses the direction of glass if an obstruction is detected during the auto up mode.

This is applicable for driver and co-driver door.

This Smart power window has three functions:

•

Auto UP

•

Auto DOWN

•

Anti-Pinch during Auto UP

•

Extended Operation

Auto UP: Pull the power window switch up for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way up automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass closes.

Auto DOWN: Press the power window switch down for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way down automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass comes down.

Anti-Pinch during Auto UP (If equipped): During auto UP if any obstacle is detected with the force value less than 100 N, The controller senses the load and reverses the direction of the glass by 180 mm from the point of pinch detection. Anti-pinch is available in 0-250 mm from the top.

Driver and co-driver door power window can be opened or closed through Remote also. Press PKE/RKE lock button more than 1 seconds to close the power window. Press RKE unlock button more than 1 sec to open the power window. (If equipped)

Thermal Protection is active for all modes of operation, and once activated up movements are not allowed for 30s, and down movements are allowed if the window is not stalled in either of the stall positions (top stall/bottom stall).

Thermal Protection is tuned for 16 Cycles before 1st activation and inhibition duration is 30 Seconds.

After 30s thermal protection is de-activated, and the number of cycles available after inhibition is dependent on the idle duration. Right after thermal protection inhibition duration of 30 seconds 2 cycles are available.

Do not remove vehicle battery while power window is in motion

Extended Operation : All doors power windows can be operated UP/DOWN within 3 minutes after ignition off.

6.2 Mirrors

6.2.1 Manual ORVM (if equipped)

Exterior Rear view mirror on both left and right sides provides the maximum side rear view information to the driver.

Fold	Adjustment

Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.	Adjust the mirror manually by pressing the mirror as required.
Both the ORVMs are hinged and can be manually folded or unfolded. This avoids hindrances in narrow areas and parking slots. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support, while folding or unfolding.

Objects seen in convex mirrors are much closer than they appear. Do not overestimate the distance of the objects that you see in the mirrors.

6.2.2 Electric ORVM (If equipped)

Electric Adjustable ORVM

The electric exterior mirror adjustment switch is located on the driver door trim/handle. The joystick on the switch can be used to select the left/right mirror and also to adjust the respective mirror.

ORVM Folding/Unfolding

Mirror Fold Function: To fold the ORVM assembly, press towards the right side of the switch with ignition ON condition.

ORVM folds automatically when:

•

The doors locked with the remote from outside the vehicle

For Auto fold function, the switch should be in neutral position.

Mirror Unfold Function: To unfold the ORVM assembly, press towards the left side of the switch with ignition ON condition.

ORVM unfolds automatically when:

•

Mirror is already in folded condition and ORVM switch is neutral condition and IGN is turned ON

6.3 Interior Rear-view Mirror (IRVM)

The interior rear view mirror provides the rear view information to the driver through the rear windshield. It also assists during reversing.

You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or pulling its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to other vehicles behind you

When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night, adjust the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and pushing or pulling it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear view.

6.4 Storage Compartments

6.4.1 Rear Luggage Compartment

Third row can be folded for keeping bigger/large objects.

Fold down the third-row seats. (refer to “Folding the third-row seat” section in Seat chapter)

Now the bigger object can be placed with seat folded condition.

When you put the luggage on the folded seat, make sure that the luggage is placed firmly enough to avoid being shaken while driving. A shaky or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver or passenger. Besides, ensure that the luggage does not obstruct the field of the rearview

Do not sit on the folded seat because the seat belt and other safety devices would not be able to protect you. It may cause serious injury in case of an accident

6.4.2 Sun Glass Holder

Roof mounted sunglass holder is an integral part of the front interior lamp.

Press the lid to release the latch and lower the holder. It is strategically positioned to be accessed easily by both the driver and front passenger.

Do not access the sunglass holder while you are driving. It may distract your concentration and could lead to an accident.

6.4.3 Glove Box

Glove Box : The glove box is located on the Left side of Instrument panel. To open the lid, gently press the unlock push button. To close the glove box, raise the lid all the way up and gently press to lock the lid.

It is suggested to keep copies of all vehicle documents along with the Owner’s Manual Kit in the glove box for reference when needed.

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, glove box Lid should be kept closed when the vehicle is in motion.

Glove Box Lamp (if equipped):

This lamp is located inside the Glove box. It will get switched ON when Glove box is opened and switch OFF when it is closed.

Cooler (Air vents)

In select variants, a cooler (air vents) is provided in the glove box. You can cool cans, small bottles, etc. by opening the air vents. Turn the cooler clockwise to open the air vents, or anti-clockwise to close the air vents.

6.4.4 Centre Console Storage

By pressing up the console knob, you can use the compartment in the console storage.

The console storage can also be used as an armrest for both the driver and the passenger.

To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.

Do not store items that are damageable or cause noises since they can move around in the compartment while driving.

Do not store any flammable materials such as cigarette lighter in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they may explode and cause a fire.

Only sealed cans/bottles to be stored in the cooler. Any spilled beverage can damage the interior trim and electrical components/cooler.

6.4.5 Cup Holder

Front Cup Holder:

A cup holder is located in the floor console between the front seats, It can be used for small cups or cans that are closed or have a lid.

Type 1	Type 2

Second row cup holder and armrest (if equipped)

Two cup holders are available in the Second Row 60P seat.

•

To open the armrest, simply pull on the tab given at the top of the armrest (as shown)

•

When armrest is not required, push back the armrest into the 60P backrest

Only sealed cups/cans with lid to be used in the cup holders.

Use caution when using the cup holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure driver or passengers. Spilled liquids can also damage interior trim and electrical components. Any spilled beverage can also startle the driver and cause a loss of control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

6.4.6 Bottle Holder

Bottle and Umbrella holders are located on both the front door lower trims. You can use them to store umbrella, maps, papers, small books, bottles, etc.

Only sealed/closed bottles are to be used in the bottle holders.

6.4.7 Seat Back-Magazine Pocket / Mobile Pocket

The seat back pockets are located on the back of the front seats for holding lightweight papers/books/magazines, etc.

The mobile pocket is available in the magazine pocket.

To avoid injury, do not place large or hard objects in the seat back pockets. Do not put more than 1 kg weight in seat back pockets.

6.4.8 Grab Handle and Coat Hook

Grab Handle: Foldable grab handles are provided above the Co-driver, Second row and Third row outboard seats.

Coat Hook: It is available in the second-row outboard passenger seat Grab handles for hanging your coat, shirts, etc.

Hanging excess/bulky weight/items may cause breakage of the hook and inconvenience to the passengers. Hang light weight articles only.

6.5 Microphone(as applicable)

The microphone is located on the roof above driver side as shown in the image.

The microphone is used when talking on the phone. The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.

To use the hands-free system, you must pair your Bluetooth® phone to the system.

6.6 Sun Visor

Use the sun visor to shield the direct sunlight through the front or side windows. It is available on both driver and co– driver side
	To shield the sunlight through the windshield, pull it downward.
	To shield the sunlight through the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket and swing it to the side.

Ticket Holder:

Ticket holder is a part of Sunvisor for keeping the Tickets, Bills, Cards, etc., for easy access.

•

Adjust and use the sun visor when the vehicle is in stationary for safety purpose.

•

Adjusting the sun visor or using the mirror or ticket holder on the sun visor while driving may cause an accident by taking your attention away or blocking your view

6.6.1 Vanity Mirror and Lamp (if equipped)

Vanity mirror is in the Sun visor.

•

Swing the sun visor down and slide the cover to open and close the vanity mirror.

•

Light above the sun visor will be ON once you slide and open the vanity mirror.

Do not adjust the sun visor while the vehicle is in motion.

6.7 Center Fascia Switch

Center fascia switches are located at the center of the Instrument Panel.

There are three types of center fascia switches available based on the variants.

Sl. No.	Switches	Sl. No.	Switches
A	SOS	E	ESC
B	Front Camera Toggle	F	HDC
C	ESS	G	Drive Mode
D	Hazard ON/OFF	* - if equipped

6.8 Driver Side Switch Bank

Driver side switch bank is located on the instrument panel below the right-side AC air vents.

Type 1	Type 2

The following switches are available in the driver door switch bank:

A	UP Selection*	D	DOWN Selection*
B	Cluster Menu/Mode*	E	ESS *
C	SET*	F	FPAS Audible Warning ON/OFF*
		*-if equipped

6.9 Power Outlet

Front USB Outlet : The USB outlets are provided on the center switch bezel below the Center fascia switch.

A: LH - USB Port

B: RH - Charging USB Port (if equipped)

USB (A) as per the image provided can be used as an input to the music system. You can connect iPods, USB memory sticks, etc. as an input and listen to the music through the vehicle speakers.

Infotainment system supports maximum USB memory capacity up to 64/128 GB and format system must be FAT16/FAT32/NTFS based on vehicle variant.

USB (B) can be used only for charging.

It is recommended to connect an input device only when the vehicle is stationary. Trying to connect an input device while driving may distract your attention and lead to an ACCIDENT.

Second Row “C” Type Charger Outlet

“C” type charger outlet is provided on the rear side of the floor console below the 2nd row AC vents.

It can be used only for charging and it is intended to be used by second row passengers.

Third Row 12V Power Outlet (If equipped)

The 12V Power outlet socket is provided on the LH side quarter Panel Lower trim. Electrical equipment/appliances like mobile charger, cigarette lighter etc., can be used in the outlet.

The power sockets function only when the ignition is in ACC or ON positions. It is recommended to use the power sockets when the engine is ON to avoid battery drain.

To avoid serious injury:

•

Close the power outlet cap when not in use

•

Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet

•

When using electrical appliances, strictly follow the manufacturer's instruction manual

•

Never use the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping

•

Never insert foreign objects into the power outlet

•

Never use malfunctioning electrical appliances

•

Never insert inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet

Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunction or fire, which could cause serious damage to equipment and/or personal injuries. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for any necessary repairs.

To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electrical appliances before use. Do not use any appliance that may:

•

Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving

•

Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating

•

Emit steam, while the windows of the passenger compartment are closed

•

Use the power outlets only when the engine is running. Remove the plug from the power outlet after using the electric device. Using the power outlets when the engine is OFF or leaving the electric device plugged in for many hours may cause the battery to drain

•

Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12V

•

Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and may interfere with other electronic systems or devices in your vehicle

6.10 Wireless Mobile Charging (If equipped)

A wireless mobile charging unit is located in front of the center console below the front USB ports.

The wireless charging will work in ignition ON, Cranking and Engine ON conditions only. It will not work when the vehicle is in accessory mode or in ignition OFF condition.

To start wireless charging, place the smartphone equipped with wireless charging function on the wireless charging pad and turn the ignition ON

For best wireless charging results, place the smartphone in the center of the charging pad. Phone charging indication will appear on the IVI screen.

Mahindra Wireless mobile phone charger is a Qi compliant charger. Qi-certified phones only can be charged from all models.

Refer to your smart phone’s user manual or the website of the manufacturer to check whether your smartphone supports QI wireless charging.

Qi certified mobile phones upto 7 inches can be used for charging in the space provided.

Note: Mobile Phones size are calculated by measuring diagonally from the upper left-hand corner of the screen to the lower right-hand corner of the screen.

Before charging remove the phone cover/case to improve charging efficiency

If any metallic object such as coins is placed between the wireless charger and the smartphone, the charging will be stopped & a warning “Foreign object detected’ will be displayed on the cluster. Kindly remove the coin or the metallic object. This is done to stop heating of the metallic object which might hurt the driver or the passengers.

Do not misalign your phone from the charging pad. It may not charge or give a warning on the cluster.

Do not place any smart key on the charging pad

Keep the charging pad clean and dry

Do not keep any Debit/Credit card between the phone & the charger. It may damage the card. A warning is displayed on the cluster for the same.

6.11 Lamps

6.11.1 Interior Lamps

Interior lamps comprises of front Spot Lamp/rear roof lamps, ambience lamps and ignition key ring illumination. These lamps can be used for an illuminated entry.

Switches on Roof Console (if equipped)

The front spot lamps are located in the roof console above the interior rearview mirror.

A : Spot Lamp Switch (Passenger’s)

B : Auto Mode Switch

C : Spot Lamp Switch (Driver’s)

D: Spot Lamp(Driver’s)

E: Sunroof Switch

F: Spot Lamp (Passenger’s)

For Auto mode - Auto Mode switch (B) is in pressed condition the roof lamp will be ON when any of the doors are opened.

For Spot Lamp –Spot lamp switches 'A' & 'C' can be independently pressed for LH and RH lamps. Press the switch again for switching OFF.
Also the lamp goes off once the Lock button in RKE/PKE is pressed and the same will be ON again when it is un-lock button in RKE/PKE is pressed

Centre Roof Lamp (if equipped)
	The centre row roof lamp is located on the roof above the second row seats. The lamp can be switched ON/OFF by the switch on the lamp.

The roof lamp switch has three operation modes to choose from:

A. The roof lamp remains permanently ON in this position irrespective of the door open status

B. The roof lamp remains in DOOR/AUTO mode in this position. The lamp remains ON as long as any one of the doors are open and switches OFF when all doors are closed properly.

C. The roof lamp remains permanently OFF in this position

3rd Row Roof Lamp (if equipped)
	The roof Lamps are located on the roof liner near the 3 rd row grab handle.

Do not leave the spot lamps / Roof lamps in ON condition. This will drain your vehicle battery.

6.11.2 Exterior Lamps

Lighting Control Stalk: The lighting control stalk is located on the right-hand side of the steering wheel and is a part of the combination switch.

It controls operations of parking lamps, head lamps, head lamp beam selection, high beam flashing, front lamps and turn signals when the ignition switch is ON.

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to Position “OFF” to switch OFF all lamps.

i) Turn Signals

A: Turn Signal - Left xxxxx B: Turn Signal - Right

Taking a Right Turn:

•

Push the lighting control stalk clockwise to indicate a right turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the right flashes along with the right side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards right

After you have completed your right turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.

Taking a Left Turn :

•

Push the lighting control stalk anti-clockwise to indicate a left turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the left flashes along with the left side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards left

•

After you have completed your left turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.

If the turn signal lamps on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, there may be a possibility that one or more of the turn signal lamp bulbs have blown. Replace the blown bulb immediately.

Changing Lanes:

The system is equipped with One Touch Lane Indicator function which can be used to signal a lane change

To signal a lane change, move the light control stalk clockwise or anti-clockwise to the limit point of free movement of the lever and release. The turn signals will flash three times and stop.

The turn signals will continue flashing as long as the lighting control stalk is held in the limit point of free movement.

ii) Parking Lamp ON

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/downward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk 2nd position from the top position to switch ON the parking lamps.

The tail lamp, license plate lamp, instrument panel illumination lamps and all interior switches are also activated when the parking lamp is switched ON.

The Park lamps will be switched OFF automatically after opening the driver door. If a user still wants a park lamp they must turn OFF & turn ON manually.

Park Lamp Warning Buzzer

A warning buzzer sound will be provided if the park lamp is left ON with ignition OFF, as soon as driver door is opened.

iii) Head Lamp “AUTO” Function

Auto head lamp switches ON the head lamp based on the outside ambient light sensed by the RLS sensor. This is useful when travelling through tunnels or low light areas.

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/upward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to the 3rd position from top to switch ON Auto head lamp function

•

Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax

•

On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending on the weather, season, or circumstances

•

Any aftermarket sunfilm or spray may cause the lighting system to malfunction

•

When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phenomenon recognising the automatic setting

•

There may be a difference between ambient light intensity sensed by the RLS sensor and the human eye. Hence it is possible that during low light conditions, the head lamp is activated early as the RLS sensor senses it as low intensity. This is a normal behaviour.

iv) Head Lamp ON

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on 1st position from the top to switch ON the head lamps.

v) Head Lamp Low/High Beam

Switch ON the head lamp, and push the lighting control stalk down (away) from steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp high beam & lift/pull the lighting control stalk up again towards the steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp low beam. In head lamp high beam, the high beam tell-tale lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates indicating high beam option selected.

Low Beam

High Beam

Your vehicle head lamps are vented and moisture may be collected on the inside of the head lamp lens under certain climatic and geographical conditions. This moisture will evaporate once the head lamps have been switched ON for a few minutes.

vi) Head Lamp Flash

Pull the lighting control stalk towards the steering wheel to instantaneously flash the head lamp high beam and Low beam.

Head Lamp Levelling System

When the vehicle is either fully or partially loaded, it may have an upward inclination disturbing the head lamp aiming. A correct head lamp setting provides good visibility to the driver with minimum inconvenience to other road users.

To properly aim the head lamp beam, use the head lamp levelling switch.
	This switch is located on the right side of the steering column shroud in the instrument panel. This switch has four positions marked as 0, 1, 2 & 3.

Switch Position	Vehicle Loading Condition
0	Driver/Driver with Front Passenger
1	Driver + Front passenger + Second row occupied
2	All seats occupied
3	All seats occupied with luggage OR Driver with luggage at extreme rear side

Select the suitable switch position depending on the pay loading condition as advised in the table.

The headlights can only be adjusted when the low beam is switched ON.

6.11.3 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) / Rear Park Lamp (if equipped)

To enable DRL/Rear Park Lamp:

In daytime whenever the engine is in running condition and park switch is in OFF position, DRL / Rear Park Lamp is enabled.

To disable DRL:

Whenever the engine is in running condition and park lamp is ON, DRL will get switch to park mode

If customer doesn’t want the DRL/Rear Park Lamp to be ON, he can disable through infotainment settings.

6.11.4 Fog Lamps (If equipped)

Fog lamps (if equipped) are to be used along with head lamp low beam, to improve the vision during foggy and misty conditions.

Front Fog Lamps ON

To switch ON the front fog lamps, first switch ON the parking lamps, rotate the inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the front fog lamp icon to the “arrow” on the inner fixed stalk as shown.

The front fog lamp indicator in the instrument cluster indicates the operation status.

Fog lamps will turn ON only if parking lamp is ON due to Park light input or Auto light input.

Fog Lamps OFF

Align the “marking” of inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk to the “OFF” position on the inner fixed stalk as shown to switch OFF the fog lamps.

6.11.5 Fog cum Cornering Lamp (if equipped)

Cornering Lamps are integrated in the Fog lamps and it will activate at >5 kmph and < 40 kmph speed.

Respective side cornering lamp turns ON when a sharp turn is taken.

They help in illuminating the road in the direction of turn.

The following conditions are to be met for the lamps to switch ON:

•

Ignition ON

•

Head lamp is ON

•

Sharp turn taken

•

Fog Lamp input off

When Fog lamp is ON cornering lamp will not work

6.12 Hazard Warning Lamp

The hazard warning lamp switch is in the center bezel switch bank on the instrument panel.

Press this switch to turn ON the Hazard Warning Lamp. All the Turn Signal Lamps will start flashing. The instrument cluster turn indicator lamps also flash indicating the same. To turn OFF, push the switch again.

Use the hazard warning lamp when your vehicle is stationary or to warn other road users to be cautious while passing your vehicle.

The turn lamps will work when the hazard warning lamps are operational.

6.12.1 Auto Hazard Warning Lamp

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically during bonnet open in vehicle stationary condition.

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically for 10 seconds during panic braking condition to indicate following traffic.

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate event of an accident where Airbags are deployed. In such a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 minutes or it can be turned off by operating Hazard switch (Off to On) or Ignition reset (Ignition Off and On)

6.13 Follow-Me Home (FMH) with Rain Light Sensor (RLS)

This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds, assisting the passengers to find their way unless cancelled by the UNLOCK signal from the RKE.

To enable FMH;

•

Ignition transition from ON to OFF

•

Park lamp is OFF

•

Ignition key is out

•

Driver door open within 3 mins from KEY OUT

•

Head lamp would turn ON only if the ambience light is found dark by the light sensor

To extend FMH;

•

The first RKE/PKE LOCK command will be used for locking all doors

•

Successive RKE/PKE LOCK commands will be used for toggling the current status of the head lamp low beam

•

Each time FMH is extended the head lamp low beam will be kept/turned on for the next 20 seconds

To disable FMH

•

Park lamp transition from OFF to ON

•

Ignition off to any other state

•

FMH ON 20 seconds expires

•

FMH Max time is 3 minutes expires

With FMH mode ON, if the UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked and vehicle is disarmed.

6.14 Follow-Me Home Lamp (FMH) Non RLS (if equipped)

This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds assisting the passengers to find their way. It will only work if prior to switching off the engine, the head lamp were ON for a predefined time

To activate FMH:

•

Switch OFF the parking lamps

•

Remove the ignition key

•

FMH can be activated by pressing lock button in key fob twice. First press locks the vehicle & second press enables head lamp low beam for 20 seconds.

•

Pressing unlock button in key fob disables FMH feature & unlocks the vehicle.

To extend the FMH feature further for 20 secs., press RKE LOCK button once. This FMH extension can be availed for maximum 3 minutes from the first activation.

With FMH mode ON; First LOCK signal received from RKE will lock the doors and subsequent LOCK signal is used to toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.

To deactivate FMH:

•

Switch ON the parking lamps

•

Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position

•

Press the RKE unlock/lock button once

•

Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF automatically

With FMH mode ON, if UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked, and vehicle disarmed.

6.15 Lead Me to Vehicle Lamp(LMV) (if equipped)

LMV is the feature that will switch ON the head lamp for 20 secs. helping the passengers to reach the parked vehicle safely and comfortably at night.

LMV is activated:

•

Pressing the unlock button on the RKE two times

LMV is de-activated:

•

Switch ON the parking lamps

•

Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position

•

Press the RKE lock button once

•

Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF automatically

To extend the LMV feature further for 20 secs., press RKE UNLOCK button once. This LMV extension can be availed for maximum 3 minutes from the first activation.

With LMV mode ON; First UNLOCK signal received from RKE will unlock the doors and subsequent UNLOCK signal is used to toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.

6.16 Remote Engine Start (If equipped)

This feature enables the customer can remotely Start/Stop the vehicle engine using mobile application.

This feature is mainly used to switch on the car air conditioner remotely via AdrenoX Connect app. When the engine starts, the vehicle AC automatically turns ON (If DATC equipped). This feature is available in automatic transmission.

The following conditions must be met for a vehicle to be started remotely:

•

All doors including bonnet and tail door must be closed and locked.

•

Vehicle Automatic transmission should be in P (Park).

•

Ignition must be in OFF position.

•

Sufficient Fuel and battery charge for the car to start.

6.17 Windshield Wipers

6.17.1 Wiper Control Stalk

A: Flick- Wipe (MIST)

B: Off

C: Intermittent (INT)/AUTO

D: Low Speed (LO)

E: High Speed (HI)

F: Rotary Switch

Wiper Off: The wipe function is OFF when the wiper control stalk is in neutral position (B).

Flick-Wipe (Mist): Push the wipe control stalk to position (A) for a flick-wipe, hold to operate the wipe continuously (simultaneously lift the wiper stalk towards the steering wheel to operate the wash). The stalk automatically comes back to position (B) when released.

Intermittent (INT) (If equipped):Intermittent (INT) mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position (C). In the INT mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals. The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).

Auto Mode (if equipped): Auto mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position C. In the AUTO mode, the wiper operates based on rain intensity.

The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).

When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will automatically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF” to the “AUTO” position.

Upon water splash (water pool on road side), auto wipe may not work

It might be possible that even when there is no water on windshield, the wipers are activated. This is because of the mist which may be present on the windshield and is normal

The RLS sensor cannot detect difference between water, ice, snow, oil, etc. Under these conditions, the sensor may behave improperly. If required, turn off the “AUTO WIPE” mode manually.

Low Speed Wiping: Push the wipe control stalk down to the position (D) to operate the wiper at a fixed low speed.

High Speed Wiping: Push the wiper control stalk down to position (E) to operate the wiper at a fixed high speed.

6.17.2 Wipe/Wash

Pull/Lift the wiper control stalk towards the steering wheel from any position to activate wipe/wash function. Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield. The wipers wipe the windshield 3 times after the washer spray is stopped. Hold the stalk in position for continuous spray of washer fluid.

When wiper is in OFF or Intermittent mode:

After completion of the wipe/wash cycle, wipers return to their bottom position.

If the wipers are in Intermittent mode and DWELL delay is less than or equal to 5 secs., then the wiper will continue in the Intermittent mode.

If the wipers are in Intermittent mode, and DWELL delay is more than 5 secs., then a further single wipe will be performed 5 secs. after the wash/wipe cycle. After the drip wipe (last wipe), wiper returns to normal Intermittent wipe.

The wipe/wash function can be activated only when the ignition is in “ON” position.

6.17.3 AUTO Wash (if equipped)

When Auto Washer switch is pressed once, Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield for 2 seconds. The wipers wipe the windshield 4 times.
After that, again Washer fluid from front washer motor will turn ON for 1.5 seconds and the wipers wipe the windshield 3 times

AUTO wash function will work only when the wiper switch is in OFF mode.

6.17.4 Rear Wiper-INT Mode

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position to operate the rear wiper in INT mode. In this mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals of 4 seconds.

6.17.5 Rear Wiper-ON Mode

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position to operate the rear wiper continuously .

6.17.6 Rear Wash

Push the wiper control stalk towards back side from any position to activate wipe/wash function. The rear windshield wash & wipe operates 3 to 4 times or as long as the stalk end is Push/Pull to the rear wash position. Wiping will continue for 3 times after releasing the stalk end switch.

If you switch OFF the ignition before switching OFF the wiper, the blades stop at random on the windshield. Switch ON the ignition and move wiper stalk to 'MIST' position to return the wipers to the park position, provided the wiper stalk is in OFF position.

Using a windshield washer in freezing temperatures could be dangerous. The washer fluid could freeze on the windshield, and block your vision resulting in an accident. If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 deg C, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection.

•

Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. It may lead to scratches on the glass

•

It is recommended not to use the wiper when the windshield glass is covered with debris, snow or leaves. Clean the glass before using the wiper to avoid damage to the wiper blades and glass

•

Do not operate the windshield washer for more than 10 secs. or when the reservoir is empty

6.17.7 Windshield Washer Jet - Front & Rear

There are two nozzles with triple adjustable washer jets in the front (on the bonnet). In the rear, one nozzle with triple adjustable washer jets are provided for the rear windshield wash.

Using a pin, the eyeball jets can be adjusted precisely for direction. Always direct the washer jet to hit the middle of the windshield. This will enable the wiper blade to wipe the complete width of the windshield.

Rear windshield washer fluid is supplied from front washer reservoir located in the Engine compartment.

7 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS 2

7.1 Sunroof (if equipped)

A sunroof will make the driving experience more enjoyable by bringing light and sunshine into the vehicle.

It provides a real open air feeling along with pure driving fun, with fresh air, your driving experience automatically becomes significantly more relaxed.

A sunroof allows air to flow evenly from above the driver, which is much quieter and less intrusive than wind blowing through a side window

The sunroof cover opens and closes manually.

•

Even though the sunroof can be operated when the ignition key is in the ON position (the engine is not running), operating the sunroof repeatedly with the engine turned off will run down the battery. Operate the sunroof while the engine is running

•

When a desired sunroof operation is completed, release the switch. If you keep pressing the switch, it could cause a malfunction. Especially in winter, never operate the sunroof if moving areas are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced

•

When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely close the sunroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle theft. Or, the interior of the vehicle will be wet when it rains or snows

•

When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped

•

Clean up the circumference of sunroof regularly. Otherwise, operating the sunroof may cause a noise due to foreign material and dirt

•

Opening the sunroof or driving with the sunroof open after a car wash or rain may lead to water entering

•

Close the sunroof while driving in the dusty environment. The dusts or particles entered can cause operating problems

•

If a roof rack system is installed on the vehicle roof or any cargo is secured to the roof rack, do not operate the sunroof. If you are required to operate the sunroof, carefully check that the roof rack system does not interfere with the sunroof and it is safe to open the sunroof

•

Make sure that no passenger sticks out head, hand or any part of his/her body out of the sunroof opening while driving. There is a risk of personal injury when the vehicle is stopped suddenly

•

Before operating the sunroof, make sure that no head, hand, finger, or any object is capable of being trapped. There is a risk of personal injury or even death

7.1.1 Sunroof Operations

Sunroof Open

Push up the switch briefly

When pushing up the sunroof switch briefly, the sunroof is completely opened.

Push up and hold the switch: manual sliding open

The sunroof is opened as long as pushing up the switch.

Sunroof Smart Open by Key Fob Unlock Button

•

Sunroof can be opened by long press unlock button.

•

Sunroof movement can be stopped by pressing lock/unlock button during movement.

Sunroof Close

Pull down the switch briefly: auto sliding close
When pulling down the sunroof switch briefly, the sunroof is automatically closed completely. To stop the sunroof, pull or push the switch at desired position while moving.
Pull down and hold the switch: manual sliding close
The sunroof is closed as long as pulling down the switch.

Sunroof Smart Close by Key fob Lock button

•

Sunroof can be close by long press lock button.

•

Sunroof movement can be stop by pressing lock/unlock button during movement

If anti-pinch is detected 3 times continuously within 10 seconds, then smart close though Remote key will not work for next 30 sec. User can manually close sunroof through switch from console.

Sunroof Smart Close while Raining

If Rain sensor is equipped: In auto wipe mode or wiper LOW or HIGH mode, when wiper is ON for predefined time, cluster will request user feedback for closing the sunroof. Using Steering “selection button/ center button” user can choose to close the Sunroof.

In RLS variant, Sunroof will close automatically while rain is detected or after the defined time(12 hours) during the vehicle is in Ignition OFF and locked state.

•

In Non Rain Sensor variant Once wiper is turned ON for a predefined time, cluster will request user feedback for closing the sunroof Using Steering switch button User can close the sunroof.

Sunroof Smart Control by Voice Recognition

User can open and close sunroof via Voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON

Sunroof Control by Authorised Mobile Phone Application

User can open and close sunroof via mobile phone with authorized application in Ignition OFF

7.1.2 Sunroof Tilting Operation

Tilt UP : The rear side of the sunroof is tilted up when pulling down the sunroof switch with the sunroof closed.

Tilt DOWN : The rear side of the sunroof is tilted down when pushing up the sunroof switch with the sunroof tilted up.

Anti-Pinch Function

To prevent any body parts from being trapped by the sliding sunroof, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens the sunroof when an object is trapped.

•

This safety function is available for the auto sliding sunroof close

•

Sunroof safety function is supplemental and not always operable depending on circumstances (e.g. any electrical device in the vehicle, etc.), therefore, the driver should check safety at all times before operating the sunroof

When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped.

Do not stick out any part of your body out of the sunroof even in stationary.

Improper use of the power sunroof can result in serious personal injury.

•

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle – particularly if they have access to the vehicle key. Unsupervised use of the remote control vehicle key makes it possible to lock the vehicle, start the engine, turn on the ignition and operate the sunroof.

•

Never stand or sit on sunroof glasses or roof. This can cause severe damage and would be treated as abuse of the sunroof which not covered by warranty.

•

Never keep the Luggages / weights on top of the roof/sunroof.

•

Any wet area found on the headliner shall be reported an Authorised Mahindra Dealer Immediately.

•

Never close the sunshade during the sunroof glass is in open condition. This can cause the sunshade damage and would be treated as abuse of the sunroof which not covered by warranty.

•

Without pinch protection, the power Sunroof will close with enough force to cause serious personal injury.

•

Always be careful when closing the power Sunroof

•

Pinch protection cannot prevent fingers or other parts of the body from being pressed against the edge of the roof; may result in injuries

•

If the power Sunroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. Visit a Mahindra Authorized Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility for assistance.

Sunroof Open Warning Buzzer :When opening the driver’s door after the ignition key is removed with the sunroof open, the buzzer will sound to alert you that the sunroof is opened. The buzzer will automatically turn off when closing the door. After this, the buzzer will not sound even though the door is opened again.

Wind Buffeting: When you drive this vehicle with the window or sunroof open at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your ears or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. This happens because of an influx in air through the window or sunroof and its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by opening the window or sunroof.

Battery Discharge or Power Failure while Operating Sunroof: If the sunroof is stopped midway due to a discharged battery or power failure, you need to do Initialization and Self Learning of sunroof. In addition following cases need the Initialization and Self Learning of sunroof.

•

The sunroof does not completely close or open by operating the switch once

•

The sunroof slides back to close. But the operation does not stop even after a complete close and tilts up the sunroof

•

The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding open or tilt up

•

The sunroof does not work

•

Operation of the sunroof switch does not do anything or work properly.

•

The operating process is not same as before due to discharged or disconnected battery.

Initialization and Self Learning Procedure

Condition for Re-Initialization the sunroof:

After the fitment of Sunroof onto the vehicle body ,it must be Re-initialized.

In some cases, if the vehicle battery has been disconnected during Sunroof movement and reconnected or is dead or replace the fuse, the sunroof must be initialized. Otherwise Express (one touch) function (open/close/tilt) and pinch protection function will be deactivated.

Initializing Procedure

To Re-initialize the sliding sunroof, use the following procedure.

Turn ON the ignition

Sunroof to be in TILT position. Press the ‘sunroof close switch’ and hold it for 9 to 10 seconds. During this process, Sunroof makes clicking sound at Tilt position.

Close Sunroof by again pressing Open switch.

The Re-Initializing command is complete, Check if the Express open/close features are working.

If the initializing procedure is not completely performed, then it has to be run again from step 2.

Self Learning Procedure:

Sliding sunroof shall be in CLOSE position.

Press ‘sunroof close switch’ and keep the switch pressed continuously. Do not release the switch and wait for following actions to perform.

Once Sliding sunroof reaches to TILT position, will start its cycle after 5 sec, delay.

Sunroof start to self - learning, run from Tilt - Close - Partial Open – close.

Overall approx. 16 to 18 seconds @13.5V required to complete self-learning.

The Self learning command is complete.

•

To help prevent damage, remove ice and snow from the sunroof before opening or tilting it in winter season

•

Always close the Sunroof before leaving the vehicle or if it begins to rain. If the Sunroof is open or tilted, rain could enter the vehicle interior and cause extensive damage to the electrical system. This could result in further vehicle damage.

•

Remove leaves and other objects from the Sunroof guiderails regularly either by hand or using a vacuum cleaner.

•

If the power Sunroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. See a Mahindra Authorized Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility

•

During sliding sunroof (one touch/manual) open operation, the sunshade will also open in synchronization with sliding sunroof glass.

•

During sliding sunroof (one touch/manual) close operation, the sunshade will not close in synchronization with sliding sunroof glass.

7.1.3 Sunroof Service Checking Procedure

•

Open the Sunroof

•

Check all 4 Rail channel corners for mud or Dust/Leaf present in it

•

Move the leafs/Dust to centre of rain channel and then remove it by hand

Do not blow air in drain hose channel before cleaning it manually – as the bigger leaves may go inside and block drain hose.

•

After cleaning of all visible particles, blow air into drain hose channel area to clean hose for mud in this area

•

Now pour 1 litre of water in rain channel and check if water is draining or not

If water is not draining kindly contact the Mahindra Authorised Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.

High Pressure washer nozzle jets should not be directed towards Sunroof seals.

Do not use High pressure water on Sunroof area.

It is recommended to wipe the seals with damp micro-fiber cloth during cleaning.

Sunroof rails and drain area should be cleaned using air blower.

7.2 Smart Operations – Power Window and Sunroof (if equipped)

This feature is applicable only for driver door power window (if equipped with anti pinch operation)

7.2.1 Smart operations in Ignition OFF State

a). Using PKE/RKE Key Fob

Sunroof & Power Window Smart Close
	During ignition off with all doors closed, if the key fob lock button is pressed for more than 1 second, then doors will get locked and Sunroof & power window will get closed automatically.

Sunroof & Power Window Smart Open
	During ignition off, if the key fob unlock button is pressed for more than 1 second, then doors will get unlocked and Sunroof & Power window will be opened along with blower ON in fresh air mode (for approximately 40 seconds)

If any of the doors status is not changed for 45 seconds, doors will get locked, Sunroof will get closed but power window will be left open

b). By using Adrenox app: Smart operations can also be done through Adrenox app

Adrenox command will work only under the following conditions met:

•

Ignition is off and

•

Doors in locked state and

•

Key fob is not inside the vehicle

Go to vehicle Controls

Power Window Smart Open

Power Window Smart Close

Sunroof Smart Open

Sunroof Smart Close

User set PIN will be required to execute AdrenoX commands

c). Timer Based Control (Applicable only for RLS variants)

Sunroof Smart Close - During ignition off, if Sunroof is open for more than a predefined time (for approximately 12 hours), sunroof will get closed automatically.

d). Rain detection based control (Applicable only for RLS variants)

Sunroof Smart Close - During ignition off and doors are in locked condition, If rain is detected sunroof will be automatically closed.

7.2.2 Smart operations in Ignition ON State

a). Using Alexa Voice Command

User can open and close Sunroof via voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON.

. .Alexa, Open Sunroof ....... .Alexa, Close Sunroof

User can open and close driver side power window via Voice command through Alexa during ignition ON (will open/close only driver side window)

. .Alexa, Open Windows....... .Alexa, Close Windows

b). While Wiper is ON

Sunroof & Power Window Smart Close- During ignition ON condition, if front wiper is ON for approximately around 10 seconds (varies based on wiper modes), a notification requesting user confirmation for closing the Power Window & Sunroof will be displayed. On confirming the same, both will be closed.

7.3 Heating, Ventilation And Air-Conditioning System (HVAC)

HVAC system provided in the vehicle enables occupants to automatically/manually adjust air flow distribution pattern, air flow rate, air intake mode and air temperature inside passenger compartment.

By appropriately adjusting the control knobs/switches provided on the DATC/ETC control panel, located on center console, occupant’s comfort can be ensured.

HVAC system also helps in defogging / de-misting the windshield and windows. Air flow direction can be further controlled by adjusting louvres of air vents. An air filter is provided at the outlet of HVAC blower and before cooling coil.

Engine coolant is utilized to heat the cabin air. For cooling the cabin air, an air conditioning circuit based on the vapor compression refrigeration cycle is used. The air conditioning system uses a refrigerant along with a suitable lubricating oil.

Although being non-ozone depleting, the refrigerant is a greenhouse gas, hence once allowed to escape in the atmosphere, it adversely affects the environment by contributing to global warming/climate change

Refrigerant used in system is a hazardous liquefied gas and is under high pressure.

The refrigerant is colorless and has ethereal or faint sweetish odor. Exposure of refrigerant to skin or eyes may cause irritation and frostbite.

They can also cause suffocation, dizziness and loss of concentration. When mixed with compressed air or certain other refrigerants, it may form flammable mixture. Never try to service HVAC system yourself which would involve refrigerant handling.

- If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with all the windows closed, You may suffocate to death due to lack of ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater, ventilate frequently.

Multiple vents are provided for distributing the air, being force-circulated by HVAC blower, throughout the passenger compartment.

To ensure sufficient air flow and hence adequate HVAC system performance, air flow path should be kept free of obstructions. Keep system’s air intake, located near plenum appliqué, free of snow, leaves and other debris. Also keep the area in front of air vents free of any obstruction inside the cabin.

7.3.1 Air Vents

Side Vents: The two side vents are located one each at the left and right extreme ends of the instrument panel. Both the side vents provide air flow to the front seat passengers.

Centre Vents: Two center vents are located on both sides of the infotainment screen in the center console. Both the center vents provide air flow to the front seat passengers. Direct air to the desired direction by adjusting the Louvres left/right.

Defogger Vents: There are four defogger vents in your vehicle: two side defogger and two windshield defogger vents.

They are located just below the windshield. The side defogger vents prevent the front windows from defogging.

Second Row AC Unit/AC Vents: The second row AC unit/AC vents are located on the rear side of the center console based on the variants.

7.3.2 Electronic Temperature Control (if equipped)

A	Temperature control Knob
B	Air distribution/Mode switches
C	Front defogger switch
D	Blower speed control knob
E	Rear Defogger switch
F	Recirculation mode switch
G	A/C switch

Temperature Control Knob

By operating the temperature control knob, temperature of air being discharged from various vents can be adjusted to the desired level. Engine coolant is utilized to heat, whereas the air conditioner is used to cool the air inside the AC unit. Based upon selected position of the temperature control knob, the desired discharged air temperature can be obtained.

By rotating the knob anti-clockwise and setting it to the extreme left position, maximum cooling is obtained. When the knob is rotated clockwise, the discharged air progressively starts getting warmer and at the extreme right position, hot air is discharged.

Blower Speed Control Knob

The blower force-circulates the air through the HVAC unit and distributes it throughout the passenger compartment.

Blower is OFF when the blower speed control knob is set to small (Blower Symbol) position (extreme left). To switch-ON the blower, rotate the control knob clockwise which progressively increases the blower speed.

A/C switch

This button turns the air-conditioner ON or OFF.

When the air conditioner is functioning, air gets cooled and de-humidified before being circulated inside the cabin. In hot weather conditions, it will take a slightly longer time to cool the interior as compared to cooler weather. Fuel consumption will be relatively higher if the vehicle is being driven with the air conditioner ON.

AC will function only when both engine and blower are switched ON.

•

In certain operating conditions when the engine gets overheated, the engine management system may switch off the air conditioner intermittently

•

The air conditioner should be operated at least for ten minutes once every fortnight, even during winter months. This allows AC system components to get lubricated periodically and ensures optimum system

•

During extreme cold weather conditions, the air conditioner may not function until temperature of the air near the evaporator rises above a predefined threshold

•

When air conditioner is ON, moisture is extracted from the air. The resulting condensate is drained off from the vehicle. It is therefore normal, if you see a small pool of water under your vehicle

Re-circulation Mode (Re-circulation mode switch ON)

To set the HVAC system to recirculation mode, press the recirculation mode button. The LED on the button illuminates, indicating the recirculation mode is active. In this intake mode, the air from inside the passenger compartment will be sucked by the blower and utilized further to ventilate /cool / heat the cabin.

For quick cabin cooling/heating or while driving through dusty/polluted region, re-circulation mode can be selected for short periods. Driving with this mode active, may lead to better fuel economy and longer HVAC filter life. However, running the air conditioner in re-circulation mode for long will make cabin air too dry and oxygen level drops inside cabin the turning the air stale. On the contrary, keeping air intake control in recirculation mode for long, with air conditioner switched OFF, will make cabin air too humid and windshield and window are more likely to become foggy. Hence, never drive in recirculation mode for long, shift back to fresh air mode intermittently.

Never keep recirculation mode selected continuously for long period. Prolonged use of the HVAC system in recirculation mode may cause windshield/windows to mist/fog-up, impairing visibility which can lead to an accident, endangering you and others.

Fresh Air Mode (Re-Circulation Mode Switch Off)

To set the HVAC system to fresh air mode, press the re-circulation mode button again. The LED on this button switches OFF, indicating that fresh air mode is active. In this intake mode, fresh air from outside the vehicle is sucked by the blower and utilized further to ventilate /cool / heat the cabin.

Air Distribution/Mode switches

The air flowing out of various vents can be controlled by the air distribution/mode switches.

•

Face Mode — When face mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the Center vents and side vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the face of the passengers

•

Face-Foot Mode — When Face-Foot mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the Center vents, Foot vents and side vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards both the face and feet of passengers at the same time

•

Foot Mode — When foot mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the two foot vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of passengers seated on front seats

•

Foot and Front Defogger Mode — When foot and front defogger mode switch is pressed air is discharged from the foot vents, side defogger vents and windshield defogger vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of passengers while de-misting/defogging.

•

Front Defogger Mode — When Front Defogger mode switch is pressed air is discharged from the side defogger vents and windshield defogger vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the front windshield to ensure de-misting / defogging.

Rear Defogger Switch (If equipped)

Rear defogger switch is located on the ETC control panel. Press the switch once to activate the rear defogger. The LED on the switch illuminates upon activation and the rear defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist. Switch OFF the rear defogger by pressing the switch once as soon as the fog / mist is cleared.

If the rear defogger switch is not switched OFF manually, it will turn OFF automatically after a pre-defined time, based on ambient temperature. If you want to switch the rear defogger ON again, press the rear defogger switch again.

On second and subsequent activations of the rear defogger in the same ignition cycle, the rear defogger ON time will be half the duration of the first activation.

7.3.3 Dual Automatic Temperature Control (if equipped)

A	Co–Driver Temp control Knob	G	Driver temp control knob
B	Front defogger switch	H	A/C ON Switch
C	Rear Defogger switch	I	OFF switch
D	Blower speed control Switches	J	MAX A/C Switch
E	Auto Mode Switch	K	Mode Switch
F	Recirculation Mode Switch	L	Dual mode switch

Below mentioned switches/knobs in DATC control panel is pressed/Rotated, respective icons and changes are displayed in the infotainment screen.

Blower speed control switches

You can adjust the airflow by Pressing the Blower speed control switches with ignition ON. If you adjust the airflow using blower speed control switches in AUTO mode, the AUTO indicator on Infotainment screen goes off and the operation mode is changed to the manual mode.

Blower speed can be increased by pressing the blower speed '+' switch and blower speed can be decreased by pressing the blower speed '-' switch.

The air conditioner does not operate by directly pressing the blower speed control switches if the A/C switch is not pressed. However, the air flows due to the fan operation.

AUTO switch

If you press the AUTO switch with AC ON, AUTO indicator appears on Infotainment screen and the set temperature is maintained while the airflow and air distribution are automatically controlled.

The indicator lamp lights up while AUTO switch is operating, and the lamp turns off when press the other switches to turned OFF.

Front Defogger switch

Use this switch for quick defogging with the engine ON.

When you press this switch, its indicator lamp turns ON, and the airflow direction is changed to the windshield and door glasses while outside air comes in with A/C operation.

At this time A/C, front defogger and Fresh air indicators shows up in the Infotainment screen. If you press the switch again, front defogging stops with the indicator lamp turns off and the mode returns to the previous operation. While the front defogger switch is operating, its indicator lamp turns ON and the lamp turns off when the front defogger mode switch is turned ON.

OFF switch

You can turn off the Dual automatic Temperature controller (DATC) by using this switch.

Co–Driver temperature control knob

To adjust the co-driver side temperature as desired, rotate the co-driver temperature control knob while the AC is ON. The temperature decreases, when the co-driver temperature control knob is rotated in anticlockwise direction & Temperature increases, when the co-driver temperature control knob is rotated in clockwise direction.

The co-driver set temperature is visible on the infotainment screen

When co-driver temperature knob is rotated, Dual mode automatically Turns ON.
When the DUAL mode switch is turned off, the passenger temperature returns to the driver side set temperature.

Recirculation mode switch

If you press this switch with AC ON, the indication lamp lights turn up and the air recirculation indicator on Infotainment display is displayed. If you press this switch again, the indication lamp turns off and the air source selection is changed to Fresh air intake mode.

Do not use recirculation mode in the vehicle for extended periods of time with every window closed. Doing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen

If exhaust gas comes in, there is a danger of carbon monoxide poisoning. Set to the fresh air intake mode after passing through a dusty or polluted area with air recirculation mode in operation.

Automatic selection of the fresh or air circulation mode

When the front defogger switch is pressed, outside air automatically comes in. When the switch is pressed again, the previous mode is restored.

DUAL switch

This function allows controlling the Co-Driver side temperature separately with engine ON.

•

If you press the DUAL mode switch, the indicator lamp lights up and DUAL mode indicator on the infotainment displays comes on

•

When the driver temperature control knob is rotated, the driver side temperature on the infotainment display is adjusted as desired and when co-driver temperature control knob is rotated, co-driver side temperature on the infotainment display is adjusted as desired

•

While the DUAL mode switch is operating, its indicator lamp turns ON and the lamp turns off when the DUAL mode switch is turned OFF.

When the DUAL mode switch is turned off, the passenger temperature returns to the driver side set temperature.

Mode switch

Each time you press this switch with IGN ON, the air distribution mode is changed and displayed as shown in the figure below.
When you press this switch in AUTO mode (AUTO indicator ON), the system is changed to the semi-auto mode (AUTO indicator OFF).

	Face-Mode		Foot-Mode
	Face/Foot-Mode		Foot/Defogger-Mode

When choosing foot mode, some air flows out from windshield defogger vents , Side defogger vents and side vents.

Driver temperature control knob

To adjust the temperature as desired, rotate the driver side temperature control knob. The temperature decreases, when the driver temperature control knob is rotated in anti-clockwise direction & temperature increases, when the driver temperature control knob is rotated in clockwise direction

A/C Switch

This button turns the air-conditioner ON or OFF.

MAX A/C switch

MAX AC mode can be used to attain MAX cooling in a short period of time.

When MAX AC switch is pressed

In cabin temperature is set to minimum

Blower fan speed is set to Max

Air intake mode is set to recirculation mode

Air distribution mode is set to Face mode

Rear Defogger Switch

Rear defogger switch is located on the DATC control panel. Press the switch once to activate the rear defogger. The LED on the switch illuminates upon activation and the rear defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist. Switch OFF the rear defogger by pressing the switch once as soon as the fog / mist is cleared.

On second and subsequent activations of the rear defogger in the same ignition cycle, the rear defogger ON time will be half the duration of the first activation.

7.3.4 DATC – Auto Operation Mode

1	Co–driver Temp Control Knob
2	Auto Indicator ON
3	Driver Temp Control Knob

Use only when the engine is running.

Press the AUTO switch.

AUTO indicator is displayed on the Infotainment Screen.

Set the desired cabin temperature with the temperature control knob.

The temperature of the passenger compartment is automatically maintained according to the set temperature.

If the driver and co-driver require different temperatures in their respective zones, the same can be done by pressing the dual mode Switch and subsequently, setting different temperatures using temperature control.

When you use the blower speed control switches, mode switch (air source selection switch) or defogger switch during the auto operation mode, AUTO indicator on the display goes out and the air conditioner system can be controlled manually.

7.3.5 DATC – Manual Operation Mode

1	Co–driver Temp Control Knob	4	Recirculation Mode Switch
2	Mode Switch	5	Driver Temp Control Knob
3	Blower Control Speed Switch

Use only when the engine is running.

Press AC ON switch

Set the desired temperature by rotating the temperature control knob

Adjust the blower speed by pressing the blower speed control switches

Select the air flow by pressing the air distribution/mode switch

Select the air source mode by pressing recirculation mode switch

In manual mode, the AUTO indicator on display does not come on and you can manually adjust the climate conditions by controlling the temperature, blower speed, mode (air distribution), A/C, air source selection, and DUAL temp. selection control switches.

To activate the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.

7.3.6 DATC – Climate Control Through Infotainment Screen

Climate Control Setting also can be done through infotainment screen.

•

Go to setting page in infotainment Screen then select climate control.

•

Under Climate control screen select Climate icon

•

All HVAC setting can be changed by pressing respective symbols or buttons in climate screen

7.3.7 Remote Cooling

Remote cooling feature allows user to control Cabin climate settings from outside the vehicle.

•

During remote cooling operation , Cabin temperature settings will be changed to default 18 deg C in Auto mode for both driver and co-driver to achieve faster cooling.

•

Vehicle cabin will be cooled down before entering vehicle. Thus, making cabin more comfortable for the passengers when they enter the car that was parked in the hot sun

Activate Remote Cooling feature

Remote cooling starts by automatically once we press "start engine" button in the AdrenoX Connect mobile App

In Automatic transmission vehicle

•

All Doors closed

•

Gear is in PARK position

•

Fuel level is greater than 10 liters

•

Vehicle should be in Standstill

When vehicle is started remotely using AdrenoX connect mobile App, By default Cabin climate settings will be changed to 18 deg C in Auto mode.

In remote Engine start condition user will have access to control below Cabin climate setting under Climate settings

Duration time : User can select the time duration for which remote cooling will be active using AdrenoX connect mobile App, Duration can be selected from minimum of 2 mins to maximum of 15 mins.

Cabin Temperature settings: User can change temperature settings during Remote cooling

Front defrost: User can Activate /De-activate front defrost during remote cooling by selecting front defrost option in mobile app

Rear Defrost: User can Activate /De-activate Rear defrost during remote cooling by selecting Rear defrost option in AdrenoX connect mobile App,

Once vehicle is started remotely customer will get feedback in the AdrenoX connect mobile App,

Remote cooling can be De-activated by using Mobile App. if vehicle is already in Remote start condition by Pressing start engine button, Remote cooling will be deactivated.

In Mobile App customer will get notification if Remote cooling is failed.

Remote cooling operation is suggested to be used while vehicle is parked in open sunny area for long duration. It is recommended not to operate Remote cooling when vehicle is parked in a closed environment.

7.3.8 Second Row Blower Speed Control

The rear blower speed control knob is provided below the second-row center console. Individual blower speed is provided to make the comfortable for the second row and third-row passengers.

In the second row, there is no separate AC ON/OFF switch. Only blower speed control knob is available, that regulates the airflow. The front AC button on the DATC/ETC control panel turns on the air conditioning on the second-row.

7.3.9 Rapid Cabin Cooling

Rapid Cabin Cooling In DATC

For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:

•

Make sure that all the windows are fully closed

•

Fully open the vents and adjust Louvres to direct air toward face

•

Turn ON AC

•

Press MAX AC Switch

Rapid Cabin Cooling In ETC

For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:

•

Make sure that all the windows are fully closed

•

Set the blower to maximum speed

•

Fully open the vents and adjust Louvres to direct air toward face

•

Set the air distribution control to face mode

•

Set air intake control to recirculation mode

•

Turn the air conditioner ON

•

Set the temperature control knob to extreme left (coolest) position

For faster cabin cooling, you can select re-circulated air intake mode initially. Once passenger compartment reaches a comfortable temperature, shift to fresh air mode. Also blower speed and temperature control knob can be re-adjusted as desired.

If your vehicle was parked in the hot sun with all the windows closed, drive the vehicle with windows open for the first few minutes. This will help in venting the hot interior air out and allow the air conditioner to cool the cabin quickly. In case you are leaving the vehicle parked in sun frequently then activate the Active Cooling Option.

7.3.10 Rapid Cabin Heating

For rapid heating of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:

Make sure that all the windows are fully closed.

Set the blower to maximum speed.

Set the air distribution control to foot mode.

Set air intake control to recirculation mode.

Set the temperature control knob to extreme right (hot) position.

For de-humidified heating, switch the air conditioner ON. So on rainy conditions if the heater is ON then also keep the AC ON.

For faster cabin heating, you can select re-circulated air intake mode initially. Once passenger compartment reaches a comfortable temperature, blower speed and temperature control knob can be re-adjusted as desired.

In extreme cold weather conditions, the engine coolant takes time to get heated up. Hence, it might take a while for hot air discharge, even when blower is running and temperature control dial is set to hot position.

7.3.11 Points to Remember

•

For quickly defogging/de-misting outside of front windshield, it is advisable to operate the windshield wiper/washer for few times intermittently

•

If snow has deposited on windshield, use ice scraper to remove ice deposited before using wiper

•

In freezing weather, warm the front windshield with the defogger before using the windshield washer. Also use a washer fluid having anti-freezing properties. These will help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on your windshield

•

Dirty/contaminated windshield would make misting / fogging-up worse. Always keep the inside and outside of windshield clean

•

Reduced air flow because of clogged HVAC filter or any other obstructions in air flow path may lead to inadequate defogging/de-misting performance. If air flow seems to have considerably reduced, get the filter cleaned or replaced immediately. Air flow path should be kept free of obstructions

•

Reduced cooling performance from air conditioner may lead to inadequate defogging/de-misting. If cooling effect seems to have dropped considerably, get the air conditioning system checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer

Your vehicle is equipped with a HVAC filter. If the AC performance is considerably low, it is recommended to have the HVAC filter checked at the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Keep in mind that a choked filter will also lead to poor cooling.

Never operate HVAC system with the filter removed. This may result in premature failure of system components.

8 STARTING AND DRIVING 1

8.1 Safety Tips - Before Starting Your Vehicle

Before starting the vehicle, inspect the interior and exterior of the vehicle; for any damages, leaks, loose parts, foreign objects/debris. In case of any abnormality noticed, Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Before starting your journey, check and ensure proper functioning of safety devices/components like brake system, steering system, all lamps & tyres. Also ensure no critical warning lamps are ON in the cluster. In case of any safety device/component not functioning as intended or any critical warning lamps found ON in cluster, contact Authorised Mahindra service center and get it rectified before starting the journey.

Adjust the seat headrest, steering wheel and fasten the seat belt as described in this manual. Never perform any seat / steering adjustments when the vehicle is in motion. Start the vehicle only when seated and belted in the driver's seat

Engine idle speed is controlled by engine management system. When the engine starts, idle RPM runs higher than normal in order to warm the engine. The engine idle speed RPM reduces once the engine warms up.

Never start your vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always keep the garage door open or start the engine in an open area.

Mirror Adjustment: Ensure that the rear view mirror and both the ORVM’s are adjusted for an unobstructed view of the road behind.

Exterior Lamps: With the help of someone observe and confirm normal operation of all exterior lamps while you work on the controls from the driver seat. Also, check functioning of all lamps in the instrument panel.

Door Latches: Check for positive closing, latching, and locking of all doors, both from inside and outside.

Fluid Leaks: Check the area under the vehicle after an overnight parking for fuel, power steering fluid, brake fluid, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. If leaks are observed contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer.

8.2 Starting the Engine

Make sure all vehicle occupants are properly seated in their seats and have buckled their safety belts. For more information on seat, headrest positioning, safety belts and their proper usage, refer “Seat Belts” section.

Before cranking the engine

•

Make sure the gear shift lever is in Neutral/Park mode

•

Ensure that the parking brake is engaged. Turn the key to IGN position but do not turn the key to start

Automatic Transmission-AT

Turn the ignition ON by pressing the start stop button or through ignition key

Shift the gear shift lever to Park or Neutral position, if found in any other position

Apply parking brake, if found not applied

Do not press the accelerator

Depress the brake pedal and press the start stop button or Turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the engine

Once the engine starts, release the Start Stop Button or key.

Manual Transmission-MT

Turn the ignition ON by pressing the start stop button or through ignition key

Shift the gear shift lever to neutral position. if found in any other position

Apply parking brake, if found not applied

Do not press the accelerator.

Depress the clutch pedal and press the start stop button or Turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the engine

Once the engine starts, release the Start Stop Button or key

Do not continue cranking after the engine has started.

If the engine fails to start, attempt to restart after about 10 seconds. If the engine fails to start even after repeated attempts as per the procedure given above, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 seconds before attempting to restart the engine.

If the vehicle battery has discharged, use booster cables, a booster battery or a battery from another vehicle to start. Jump-starting a vehicle can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to the “Jump-starting procedure” section in this manual for correct procedure.

If the engine still fails to start, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance.

Ensure the following when the engine is running:

•

All warning lamps are OFF

•

Low oil pressure lamp is OFF

Engine Idling: The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
After idling for a few seconds, follow the below steps to drive away:

Manual Transmission-MT

Release the parking brake

Depress the clutch

Shift the gear lever to 1st gear

Release the brake pedal

Drive by releasing the clutch and depressing the accelerator pedal simultaneously

Automatic Transmission-AT

Release the parking brake

Depress the Brake pedal

Shift the gear lever to D or R or M

Drive by releasing the brake pedal and depressing the accelerator pedal simultaneously

Engine Idling - In Cold Weather: Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold and prolonged idling at low ambient temperatures. Long periods of idling is harmful to engine. Combustion chamber temperatures can drop to low temperatures, where the fuel injected may not burn completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
For smooth functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold weather conditions, use suitable fuel (Petrol/Diesel) which will be available at filling stations during winter months. Check with your fuel retailer for details.
Coolant in the radiator will survive up to ambient temperature of -15 degree C. If the ambient temperature is expected go below -15 degree C, during operation, the engine will require a different coolant/coolant concentration. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance.

8.3 Stopping the Engine

Your vehicle is powered by a turbo engine. Before turning the engine OFF, always allow the engine to return to normal idle speed and run for few seconds. This assures proper cooling and lubrication of the turbocharger. This is particularly necessary after any hard driving.

To reduce the risk of personal injury, before turning OFF the engine and leaving the vehicle, always follow the below mentioned safety tips.

Manual Transmission-MT

•

Keep your right foot on the brake pedal

•

Turn front wheels towards the road curb

•

Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position and remove the key

•

Press the start stop button once to switch off the vehicle (for PKE only)

•

Engage the parking brake

•

Move the gear shift lever to 1st gear position (reverse gear if parking on an incline).

•

Slowly release the brake pedal

•

Lock your vehicle when leaving

Automatic Transmission

•

Keep your right foot on the service brake pedal

•

Turn front wheels towards the road curb

•

Engage the parking brake

•

Shift the gear lever to Park “P” position

•

Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position and remove the key

•

Press the start stop button once to switch off the vehicle (for PKE only)

•

Slowly release the brake pedal

•

Lock your vehicle when leaving

Alert will be displayed in the infotainment screen if the gear shifter is not in P position. Engine will not switch off unless shifter is in P position.

8.4 Exhaust Gases

Protection against exhaust gas entry into the vehicles interior is considered in the design of the exhaust system.

•

Vehicle exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Oxides, Hydrocarbons and Particulate Matter. These are potential environmental and health hazards

•

Avoid inhaling the exhaust gases. Carbon Monoxide is a colorless and odorless gas and can cause unconsciousness or even death

•

If the exhaust system is damaged for any reason or you notice a change in the exhaust noise, have the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately

•

Do not start the vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed area where ventilation is poor for the exhaust gases

•

Since the engine compartment and exhaust system components are hot and can ignite a fire, do not park or leave the vehicle with the engine idling over dry grass, leaves, paper, rags or any combustible material

Never keep the engine running when the vehicle is parked in an area which is not properly ventilated. This could lead to serious respiratory problems and/or death

8.5 Driving Your Vehicle

8.5.1 Pedals

MT	AT

A: Accelerator Pedal

B: Brake Pedal

C: Clutch Pedal

8.5.2 General Driving Precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of accidents leading to serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

•

Before you drive your vehicle, please read this manual carefully

•

Before you start driving, check proper operation of the brakes and steering system

•

If, while driving, you hear any strange noise or feel unusual vibration, or if you have any concerns whatsoever, or if any warning lamps illuminate or buzzers sound, park/stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Identify the cause and take any necessary remedial action. Contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer if necessary

•

Never overload or improperly load your vehicle

•

Always be attentive while driving and follow safe driving practices

•

Always maintain the recommended inflation pressure in tyres

•

Always drive at a safe speed appropriate for given driving conditions. You must follow the speed limits

•

While backing up, keep a constant lookout for people, particularly children, or other obstructions or hazardous material that might be present behind the vehicle

•

Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicles center of gravity and make your vehicle more unstable

•

Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle

•

Always slowdown in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have much better control

•

When driving in off-road or on rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's suspension and chassis

•

Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially on rough terrains. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion. Make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes

•

If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (e.g. from concrete to gravel/sand/mud/snow) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds, especially the way it responds to steering, braking and accelerating inputs

•

Be extremely careful when driving on pavements made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice

•

If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake or steering application. Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface

•

It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly

•

In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surfaces to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel

8.5.3 Off-Road Driving Precautions

•

When driving in off-road or on rugged terrains, never over speed or make sharp turns. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury

•

Always maintain steering wheel control, Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion

•

Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or map-out your route before driving in the area

•

Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud or water

8.5.4 If your vehicle is submerged

If Your stationary Vehicle is Submerged up to over the bumper

Contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately. Have the vehicle towed to nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer to check any entry of water into the engine

All fluids including engine and transmission fluids required to be changed in case of water ingress and contamination

Never attempt to start the engine, without the advice from Mahindra Authorised Dealer technician.

•

Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre center line

•

The engine could get damaged internally if attempts are made to cross through deep water

•

Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient or friction resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Tab the brake pedal while driving to remove the film of water

8.5.5 Driving Through Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water.

Never drive through still water that is higher than the bottom of the axle hubs. Not following this instruction will allow water to enter vehicle components causing internal damage to the components, affecting drivability, safety, emissions, and reliability.

When driving through water, drive very slowly and at constant speed, less than 8 kmph. Drive with out pressing accelerator pedal and control speed using only the brakes. At higher speed waves can be generated by the front of the vehicle. These water waves may enter air intake, causing severe engine damage or cause a vehicle to get stalled.

You must slow down while driving through shallow water. Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield, impairing your vision. In extreme conditions, you may get a water wedge formation between the road and tyre causing loss of control in the vehicle.

•

The ground under the water might not be firm which could result the water being deeper than expected when driving the vehicle through it

•

Do not stop or shut OFF the engine while immersed in water. It helps in preventing water getting inside the exhaust pipes

•

When backing down a ramp, do not allow the exhaust tail pipe to immerse in water

•

Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure. It may also enter the differentials, transmission, and transfer case, reducing the oil's lubricating qualities. If these are submerged in water, the lubricants should be replaced as required

•

Water entering the transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damaging the transmission

•

Sand, mud/sludge that has accumulated in around brake discs may affect braking efficiency. This may also damage brake system components. Wet brakes cannot stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by driving the vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal

•

When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through water

8.5.6 Flowing Water

If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine the exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to compensate for drifting.

8.5.7 After Driving Off-Road or through Water

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.

•

After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. Completely inspect the underbody of the vehicle for any damages

•

Check for accumulations of plants or bushes. or polyethylene / plastic. These could be a fire hazard at high temperatures.

•

Inspect all the tubes/hoses and check for any fluid leakages

•

Get heat exchangers (radiator and condenser) cleaned

•

We also recommend that the vehicle be checked at the Mahindra Authorised Dealer for any water entry into the transmission / axle or the engine.

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when needed leading to accidents. If you have been operating the vehicle in off-road conditions, get the brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.

•

If any unusual vibration is experienced, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance. Get it inspected/corrected as soon as possible

•

After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission/transfer case/axle oils) to ensure the fluids have not been contaminated

8.6 Tips for Better Fuel Economy

Fuel mileage (efficiency) depends on the average speed of the vehicle, number of times the gears are shifted/Clutch pressed and number of times the brakes are applied. Vehicles operating in city traffic condition /bumper to bumper traffic will exhibit lower fuel mileage as compared to vehicles operating in open highways with higher average speeds.

DOs

•

Ensure that your vehicle is maintained as per recommendation (Refer to Warranty and Service Information Guide)

•

Ensure that the tyre pressures are as per recommendation (Ref to sticker on door pillar or
Page 9-3 )

•

Ensure parking brakes are released fully

•

Use Engine Start-Stop feature to the maximum
(Ref Page no 8-42), if applicable

•

Drive with all the windows closed to reduce aerodynamic drag

•

Accelerate smoothly with a light foot on the accelerator

•

Anticipate stops and slow down in coasting mode before applying brake

•

In manual transmission, shift gears at the right speeds (Ref page 6-14 for gear shift indication prompts)

Don'ts

•

Fitting roof carrier will increase drag and reduce fuel mileage

•

Driving at speeds above 80 Kms/hr reduces fuel mileage

•

Do not rest the left foot on the clutch pedal in manual transmission vehicles as it will reduce the fuel mileage as well as damage clutch/transmission components

•

Do not attempt to use brakes with the left foot in Automatic transmission vehicles

Managing the Air conditioner for optimum fuel efficiency Recommended AC modes for obtaining optimum fuel efficiency.

How to Measure /Read Fuel Mileage Values?

•

The Fuel mileage value is displayed in the cluster as AFE (Average Fuel Economy) in Kms/lit.

•

The AFE can be set to multiple modes.

•

Refer to Page 3-15 for the procedure for resetting AFE modes.

8.7 Ignition Switch (if equipped)

An illuminator ring is provided on the face of the ignition switch to help in locating the ignition switch at night. The ring will illuminate the moment the driver door is opened and will remain glowing till the driver door is closed.

The different positions of the ignition switch are:

LOCK - This is the ignition and steering lock position. The vehicle circuits and engine is completely switched OFF. The steering wheel is also locked, and the key can be removed from the ignition only in this position.

ACC - The steering is unlocked and can be rotated. In this position, all electrical circuits are enabled. Use this mode when you want to listen to music, etc., with the engine temporarily switched OFF.

ON - All electrical circuits are enabled. Some of the warning or information lamps illuminate in this position. While some of the lamps will go out after a few seconds, some will continue to remain ON till the engine is started. When the vehicle is being driven, ignition switch remains in the ON position.

Do not leave the ignition in ON when the engine is OFF. This could lead to battery drain and ignition switch damage.

START - This position is to start the engine by cranking the starter motor. This is a momentary position. When the key is turned to start position, the starter cranks the engine. Once the engine is running, release the key, and the key reverts back to ON position and the starter motor disengages from the engine.

Do not continue cranking after the engine has started.

If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering wheel from side to side and try again.
The key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When the key is removed, the steering column lock is activated, and the steering wheel cannot be turned.

Never return the key to the LOCK position or try to remove the key when the vehicle is in motion. Removing the key allows the steering wheel to lock. You will lose the control of the vehicle and may cause serious accident. Remove the key only when the vehicle is parked.

8.8 Horn

Press the pad on the steering wheel to blow/sound the horn.

The horn functions even when the ignition has been switched OFF.

Horn will get activated when horn switch/pad is pressed

It will get deactivated when horn switch/pad is released or after 10 sec of continuously pressing.

If Horn Switch Input is ON for more than 10 sec, Horn will get deactivate after 10 sec.

8.9 Manual Transmission

The first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop with the initial few hundred kilometers of running.

8.9.1 Gear Lever

Your vehicle is fitted with manual transmission having six forward and one reverse gear. This shift pattern is imprinted on the gear lever knob.

The transmission is fully synchronized in all forward gears, so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished. The clutch pedal should be depressed fully while shifting, and then released slowly.

8.9.2 Gear Recommendation

Gear information shows the actual gear in which user has to drive the vehicle.

Based on the various parameters, it will suggest to change the gear for better fuel economy with up/down recommendation.

Display
High	Low

Operating Condition

The numeral is the suggested gear. The Up or down arrow is to upshift or downshift. When no arrow, it indicates vehicle is in which gear.

8.9.3 Neutral Position

This position stops the transmission of power from the engine to drive axle. With the gear lever in neutral and brakes released, the vehicle can move freely by pushing or towing. The engine can be started in this mode. It is always recommended to keep the brake pedal depressed in this position. It is advisable to shift into neutral when the vehicle is standstill for longer durations with the engine idling.

Coasting the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral and engine ON/OFF is not recommended. In an event of panic braking, you will not have the power of engine braking to slow down the vehicle. This may lead to personal injury or accident.

Do not leave the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral position. Always engage manual parking brake before leaving the vehicle, to prevent any vehicle movement leading to possible injury to a bystander or damage to vehicle.

8.9.4 Gears 1-6

Use the gears 1 to 6 as per vehicle load, road/traffic conditions or as per requirement. The current gear selection is indicated in the cluster.

Always depress the clutch fully before moving the gear lever from the current position to any desired position. Perform up-shifts or down-shifts one gear at a time, do not jump gears.

8.9.5 Recommended Gear Shifting Speeds

Upshifting - Diesel

Shift Range	Vehicle Road Speed (kmph)	Engine RPM Range
1–2	16	1600–2000
2–3	27
3–4	42
4–5	54
5–6	70

Downshifting -Diesel

Shift Range	Vehicle Road Speed (kmph)	Engine RPM Range
2–1	14	1000–1200
3–2	25
4–3	40
5–4	52
6–5	61

Upshifting - Petrol

Shift Range	Vehicle Road Speed (kmph)	Engine RPM Range
1–2	18	1600–2300
2–3	30
3–4	44
4–5	54
5–6	70

Downshifting -Petrol

Shift Range	Vehicle Road Speed (kmph)	Engine RPM Range
2–1	14	1000–1200
3–2	25
4–3	40
5–4	52
6–5	61

Shift gears at suitable engine or road speeds to safeguard the transmission components. Avoid driving in high RPM’s frequently.

When parking on an incline, gear alone may not be sufficient to prevent the vehicle from moving. Always set the manual parking brake in addition to shifting the gear lever into gear. It is also recommended to turn the front wheels towards the road curb.

8.9.6 Reverse

This gear is to enable the vehicle to move in the reverse direction. Move the gear lever into this position only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the gear lever is in neutral position.

The reverse lock ring located immediately below the gear shift knob must be pulled upward while moving the shift lever to the reverse (R) position.

To avoid transmission damage, shift into or out of reverse gear only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. It is recommended you to wait approximately for three seconds in neutral gear to shifting into or out of reverse gear.

For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, keep the gear shift in neutral and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal. For prolonged stops, it is recommended to switch OFF the engine and apply the Parking brake. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not hold it with the clutch/accelerator; use the brake to avoid unnecessary clutch wear/heat build up.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear lever, which could result in an accident or serious injury.

On slippery/wet road surfaces, never downshift to obtain braking action. This could result in a wheel slip and reduced vehicle control.

8.9.7 Uphill and Downhill Driving

To prevent the engine from high stress at a low RPM when driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily loaded, downshift when necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best torque range. Similarly, while driving downhill, downshift to utilize the engine braking in an optimum manner.

8.10 Automatic Transmission (AT)

8.10.1 Gear Selector Lever

Your vehicle is equipped with 6 Speed automatic transmission having Electric controls with an Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy.

This adaptive Transmission strategy offers optimal transmission operation and shift quality in different driving conditions.

The transmission electric are self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop within the initial few hundred kms of running.

P : Park position	M : Manual Shift
R : Reverse position	M+ : Manual up-shift
N : Neutral position	M- : Manual down shift
D : Drive position

Shift Logic Table

Movement	Possibility
P-R	Yes-Brake pedal + knob button
R-N	No
N-D	No
D-M	No
M-D	No
D-N	No
N-R	Yes-Only knob button
R-P	Yes-Only knob button

The current gear lever position is indicated in the centre of the cluster display.

8.10.2 P : Park Position

Use this position to park your vehicle, warm up the engine, or stay in a location for an extended length of time.

To shift in to any other position, first depress the brake pedal, then press knob button and move the TGS to R or N or D as desired.

•

Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into “P”

•

Never shift to “P” when the vehicle is moving, To avoid damage to transmission

•

If the lever is shifted to P when the vehicle has not come to stop and in forward motion, then a ratchet noise will be heard. This is not abnormal. However we do not recommend moving to P till the vehicle has come to standstill . As repeated such instances can damage the internal parts

•

To shift from the “P” position to another position, the ignition switch must be turned to “ON” and the brake pedal should be depressed. Any forcible attempts to move the selector lever from “P” without the two procedures may damage the selector lever

8.10.3 R : Reverse position

Use this position to drive the vehicle in reverse

To shift into “R” from “P” or “N” (with the knob button press), completely stop the vehicle and depress the brake pedal. When the shift lever is in “R”, parking aid system will be automatically activated.

•

Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving

•

Please note that the vehicle may slowly move backward when the selector lever is at “R”

8.10.4 N : Neutral position

At this position, the engine does not transfer power to the wheels and the vehicle will not move on a flat road. However, for safety, apply the brake when the gear is in this position.

•

Warm up the engine for approximately 3 minutes when the ambient temperature is below -15°C. Otherwise, shifting of gears in Forward or Reverse direction may not be smooth

•

If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this neutral position, depress the brake pedal firmly

•

Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N” when the vehicle is in motion

Depress the brake pedal while shifting the gear lever from “N” to “D” or “R” for your safety.

For shifting R to P, press the knob button and for shifting to N or D, only shift lever to moved. Refer the shift logic table for more clarity.

8.10.5 D : Drive position

Use this position for normal driving conditions. The transmission is automatically shifted from 1st gear up to 6th gear according to the level of depression on the accelerator pedal

•

Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle immediately after shifting into “D” or the transmission will be damaged. Wait for D symbol to come in the cluster before pressing the accelerator pedal

•

Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an uphill according to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake

•

Please note that the vehicle may creep forward on level ground when the selector lever is in “D” even without pressing the accelerator pedal and this behavior is known as forward creep

8.10.6 M : Manual Shift

To shift to manual mode move the lever in left side from “D” position. Driving gear can be adjusted by operating the shift lever in front or back direction.

In manual shift mode, the user can upshift or downshift from 1 to 6 forward gears by moving the shift lever in front or back direction.

Shift up: Move the shift lever forward towards + direction and release once to shift up one gear.

Shift Down: Move the shift lever backwards towards - direction and release once to shift up one gear.

The gears can be shifted without requiring to release the Accelerator pedal.

In manual mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. Similarly, upshifts are automatically made when the engine rpm exceeds the threshold.

When starting to drive on a snow or icy road, upshift of the gear to 2nd or 3rd is possible to avoid loss of traction.

For safety reason maximum three shifts “+” / ”-” can be allowed at given point of time.

•

Before leaving the Driver’s seat always make sure that the shift lever is in the P (park) position

•

Shifting into P position while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle

•

Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while shifting out of the Drive (D) position into another position (other than M Mode) to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle

•

The shift from D to M (Manual Mode) and M to D can be performed while the vehicle is moving

•

Never press accelerator pedal when moving the gear shifter lever

•

To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever/ tip switch is operated

Use of Engine Brake: To use the engine as a brake, change into the manual gear shift mode first, then operate the shift lever to switch to next lower gear.

•

Abruptly downshifting and using the engine brake may make the vehicle unstable, especially when driving on roads covered with snow or ice

8.10.7 Gear Shift Interlock system

The Automatic Transmission has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transmission from P into R unless the Brake Pedal is depressed

In case of malfunction of the shift lock system or vehicle battery got drained, Open up the shift lock cap which is present in front of the shift lever on the shift bezel. Then with the help of Screw driver available in toolkit, Press the button and move the shift lever out of P mode.

8.10.8 Starting and Driving Off

•

Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P”. For your safety, avoid starting the engine from “N” even though you can do so.

•

Check whether or not the engine idling speed is normal. Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into “D” or “R”.

•

To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal gradually.

•

Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the engine after shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged. Especially, when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on with the brake pedal depressed

•

When driving on a down hill, never shift the selector lever to “N” If you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engagement can damage the drive train

•

HDC (Hill Descent Control) is designed for driving down a steep hill. When HDC is applied, do not shift to “N”. Otherwise, HDC will be deactivated

•

For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped

•

Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear selector

•

If you have to stop on a hill, depress the brake pedal fully

•

To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into “P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion

•

A high engine speed can cause your vehicle to move abruptly from the parked position. To avoid this, wait until the engine rpm becomes stable

•

When you start off on a hill after stopping and parking the vehicle, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on, with the brake pedal depressed

•

Do not press the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal at the same time

•

We suggest that right leg only should be used for brake pedal operation

8.10.9 Creep Function

Without any actuation of the accelerator pedal, your vehicle will move slowly if the selector lever is in any position other than “P” or “N”. This is called the creep effect. You can control your vehicle’s movement by only applying the brake in heavy traffic or narrow areas.

On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the opposite direction of the intended direction despite the creep effect. When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal

8.10.10 Kick-down Function

If you need to accelerate rapidly, depress the accelerator pedal to its travel end. Then, a lower gear will be automatically engaged. This is called the kickdown function.

•

Do not use the kick-down function while driving on slippery or sharply curved roads

•

If you use the kick-down function too frequently, the fuel economy of the vehicle will get worse

8.10.11 Engine Braking

When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle is in motion, the engine speed decreases.

On a down hill, engaging a lower gear can generate a higher engine braking and eventually slow down the vehicle speed.

By using engine behavior as a brake, you can decrease your vehicle speed without excessively using the brake system.

The lower gear, the higher braking force.

Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a long slope. The brake system will overheat, experience vapor lock or the fade phenomenon, and lose the braking force

Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the gear selector lever is in the “N” position

Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tyres may slip

8.10.12 Limp Home Mode (LHM)

When there is a malfunction in the transmission, it goes into Limp Home Mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and also to prevent critical transmission damage.

This status is indicated by the transmission check lamp illumination in the instrument cluster.

Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.

The transmission is held either in 3rd/ 5th gear when LHM is activated.

8.11 4XPLOR Mode (If equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a 4XPLOR Drive Mode System that allows the driver to enhance the off-road performance of the vehicle, by selecting the mode best suited to the terrain and driving conditions. Each mode changes a number of the vehicle parameters within the engine, transmission, traction control and Four-Wheel Drive systems

4XPLOR Drive Mode System is designed to adjust the vehicle’s driving characteristics based on the terrain.

Drive Modes

Mahindra’s 4XPLOR Drive Mode System has four driver-selectable modes that can be operated along with the shift-on-the-fly 4WD system. Just by selecting the desired mode, the system automatically controls 4WH, Engine response, Transmission shift pattern, Traction Control & Stability.

•

Normal Mode – General everyday driving normal roads.

•

Grass/Gravel/Snow Mode —Improved vehicle stability for low-traction conditions

•

Mud/Ruts Mode — Maximum torque availability at all four wheels

•

Sand Mode — Momentum of the vehicle is maintained to keep moving on soft ground

Do not drive in 4H when in tarmac or firm road, this is essential to avoid damage to drive line components.

All modes can be used in either 4HI or 4LO mode.

To enable 4XPLOR Drive Management System

1. Locate the Intelli Command Center (ICC) knob on the center console.

2. Rotate the ICC knob in clockwise or anti-clockwise direction to select the desired drive mode from existing mode

Single step rotation results in shifting to next mode based on rotational direction. If more than 1 step is rotated, based on the number of steps and direction of rotation, the modes corresponding to steps moves will get selected

3. Once the ICC knob is rotated to desired drive mode, the LED on ICC switch corresponding to the mode selected will start blinking and once the mode gets activated, the LED remains continuously ON.

•

If the vehicle is in 2WD and user had selected any drive mode other than normal, 4WH will get engaged automatically

•

4WH warning lamp turns ON in cluster

•

Selected mode indication turns ON in cluster

•

Mode activation message displays in cluster

Mode	Normal	Grass/Gravel/Snow	Mud/Rut	Sand
2H	Yes	No	No	No
4H	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
4L	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes

8.11.1 Normal Mode:

This is a default mode which gets activated after every ignition cycle. This is the ideal mode for normal road conditions.

4WH/4WL also can be engaged in this mode. For more information refer 4WD session

Normal mode LED in ICC glows which indicates vehicle is in normal mode.

Normal mode icon will be displayed in cluster

Also “Normal Mode activated” alerts will be displayed in cluster and goes OFF

8.11.2 Grass/Gravel/Snow

To select this mode rotate the ICC switch:

•

One step in clockwise direction from Normal mode

•

One step in anti-clockwise from Mud/Ruts Mode

•

Two steps in anti-clockwise from Sand Mode

•

Two steps in clockwise from Sand Mode

Once this mode is selected 4WH will be automatically engaged (If not engaged previously). LED lamp on ICC corresponding to this mode starts blinking and on activation of the mode, the LED remains ON continuously.

Grass/Gravel/Snow mode icon will be displayed in cluster

Also “Grass/Gravel/Snow Mode activated” alerts will be displayed in cluster and goes OFF

•

This mode improves overall traction of the vehicle. Use this mode to drive in surfaces covered with snow, ice, water, grass or gravel

•

MAX speed possible in 4WH is 120kmph & 4WL is 60kmph

•

ESC OFF lamp will be ON in 4WL engaged condition

For automatic transmission vehicles:

•

Vehicle will be launched automatically in 2nd gear if TGS lever is in Auto mode

•

Driver can select 2nd gear to launch the vehicle manually using TGS lever in Manual mode

•

Gear early upshift & late downshift is normal in this mode

Tips:

•

In snow conditions. Avoid giving strong inputs. Also avoid sharp braking. The ABS and ESC can help but they can not overcome the physical laws of friction.

8.11.3 Mud/ Rut Mode

To select this mode rotate the ICC switch:

•

Two steps in clockwise/anti—clockwise direction from Normal mode

•

One step in clockwise or 3 steps in anti-clockwise direction from Grass/Gravel/Snow Mode

•

One step in anti-clockwise or 3 steps in clockwise direction from Sand Mode

Mud/ Rut mode icon will be displayed in cluster

Also “Mud/ Rut Mode activated” alerts will be displayed in cluster and goes OFF

•

This mode provides best traction for slippery road conditions. Use this mode to drive in surfaces covered with mud or if vehicle is stuck in rut.

•

4WL also can be selected manually based on requirements

•

MAX speed possible in 4WH is 70 kmph & 4WL is 60 kmph

•

When vehicle goes beyond 70 kmph in 4WH, 4Xplor mode will change to Normal Mode

•

Once it goes out from mud & rut mode , User can manually reengage the mud mode once again in the same driving cycle - only after the vehicle speed comes below 60 Kmph

•

ESC OFF lamp will be ON in 4WL engaged condition

For automatic transmission vehicles:

•

Gear late upshift & early downshift is normal in this mode

8.11.4 Sand Mode

To select this mode rotate the ICC switch:

•

Three steps in clockwise direction or one step in anti-clockwise direction from Normal mode

•

Two steps in clockwise or anti-clockwise direction from Grass/Gravel/Snow Mode

•

One step in clockwise or 3 steps in anti-clockwise direction from Mud/ Rut Mode

Sand mode icon will be displayed in cluster

Also “Sand Mode activated” alerts will be displayed in cluster and goes OFF

•

This mode ensures maintains the momentum of the vehicle to keep the vehicle moving on soft ground. Use this mode to drive in surfaces covered with sand.

•

4WL also can be selected manually based on requirements

•

MAX speed possible in 4WH is 120kmph & 4WL is 60kmph

•

ESC OFF lamp will be ON by default in this mode

For automatic transmission vehicles:

•

Gear late upshift & early downshift is normal in this mode

Tips:

•

In sandy terrain, it is essential that the vehicle momentum is maintained ESC. going up the dune. At the same time do not give too sharp steering input, the wheel can dig into sand.

As soon as non-sandy area is reached. Please reinflate to recommended pressure. Do not drive in non-sandy area with speed in order to ensure vehicle safety. If air pump not available, do it low speed and caution.

8.12 Four Wheel Drive (4WD) System (if equipped)

The 4WD system can be used for off-terrain driving or steep inclines like ghat sections and hill terrain regions.

High	Low

The 4WD selector switch is located on the floor console next to the gear lever. It allows the operator to choose between three different modes depending on the torque requirement.

4WD Shifting Conditions
Mode Shift	Conditions
Shifting in to 4H	Vehicle Speed < 80 kmph
Shifting out of 4H	No speed limit
Shifting to 4L	Vehicle speed< 0 kmph
Shifting to 4L	P/N mode (for AT), Clutch pressed/Gear in N (For MT)
Shifting out of 4L	Vehicle speed<2 kmph
Shifting out of 4L	P/N mode (for AT), Clutch pressed/Gear in N (For MT)

The operator can switch to 4H mode from 2H at <80kmph. To engage or disengage 4L from any mode, the vehicle speed must be zero, and the transmission in neutral.

8.12.1 Operating Instructions/Precautions

High	Low

Use the 4WD selector switch on the floor console to select the following transfer modes.

4H: All four wheels are driven at 1:1 speed ratio. The four wheel drive telltale lamp illuminates when 4H mode is selected. This mode provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel, sand and dry pavement. Front and rear drive shafts are locked together in this mode which forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.

4L: All four wheels are driven at 2.48:1 speed ratio. Use this mode for maximum pulling power and traction. Use 4L position for climbing or descending steep hills, off-road driving, hard pulling in sand, mud or deep snow. Front and rear drive shafts are locked together in this mode which forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Pro-longed driving in the 4L position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components. Take care not to over rev the engine when driving in this mode. When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed (RPM) is considerably higher than that of the 4H position at a given road speed.

4H or 4L mode shall not be used on rough tarmac road surface, especially during sharp turns to avoid gear box winding and damage the gear box.

To Shift from 4H to 4L

High	Low

Bring the vehicle to a complete stop

Brake pedal depressed

Shift the gear lever into P/N mode (for AT) & Clutch pressed/Gear in N (For MT)

Press/Rotate the four wheel drive selector switch to the 4L position. The 4WD LOW lamp in the cluster should illuminate and the 4WD HIGH lamp goes OFF. If the 4WD LOW lamp does not illuminate within 10 sec repeat the above steps again

To Shift from 4L to 4H

High	Low

Bring the vehicle to a complete stop

Brake pedal depressed

Shift the gear lever into P/N mode (for AT) & Clutch pressed/Gear in N (For MT)

Press/Rotate the four wheel drive selector switch to the 4H position. The 4WD LOW lamp in the cluster goes OFF and the 4WD HIGH lamp should illuminate. If the 4WD LOW lamp doesn't go out within 10 sec, drive forward or reverse for a short distance, stop the vehicle completely, shift the gear lever into neutral and operate the selector switch again.
If the problem persists contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible. There may be a malfunction in the four wheel drive system

To Shift from 2H to 4H

Vehicle speed should be less than 80 kmph.

Press/Rotate the four wheel drive selector switch to the 4WH position.

Exceeding 25 mph (40 km/h) while the transfer case is engaged in 4L may result in an engine overspeed condition and engine damage

Because the four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.

•

Do not believe than you can go faster than road conditions permit

•

Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion

•

Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. You will not be able to stop or control your vehicle

•

Braking performance is dramatically reduced in wet/icy/slippery conditions. Avoid abrupt downshifts on slippery roads, engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control resulting in an accident

•

Do not press the clutch while descending steep hills as you may lose control of the vehicle. Always descend in-gear

•

In heavy snow or when pulling a load, or for additional control at slower speeds, select a low gear and/or shift the transfer case to the 4L range.

8.12.2 Mechanical Lock Differential (MLD)

On the vehicle fitted with MLD, if one rear wheel begins to spin/slip, the mechanical lock differential is designed to help/improve traction by automatically getting locked and transmitting driving force to the other rear wheel fully. Hence spinning of the wheel is avoided and torque is transmitted to the wheel which is not slipping, which helps the vehicle to move on loose terrain.

After locking the MLD lock opens up automatically on the followings:-

Torque reversal/coasting

Slight turning on the same side on which side the wheel was slipping

Slight steering input

Braking

The system gets de-activated over a speed of 30km/h

In normal driving condition the differential behaves as an open differential.

8.12.3 4WD Lamps - Instrument Cluster

4WD LOW Lamp

This lamp alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the 4L (four wheel drive low mode). The 4WD LOW lamp illuminates in the cluster when the transfer case has shifted to the 4L mode. If the lamp fails to illuminate when the ignition is switched ON, or the lamp continuously remains ON even if the switch is not in the 4L position, then have the system checked by an Authorized Mahindra Dealer.

4WD HIGH Mode Lamp

This lamp alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the 4H (four wheel drive high mode). The 4WD HIGH lamp illuminates in the cluster when the transfer case has shifted to the 4WD HIGH mode. If the lamp fails to illuminate when the ignition is switched ON or the lamp continuously remains ON even if the switch is not in the 4H position, then have the system checked by an Authorized Mahindra Dealer.

If 4WD Malfunction showing on cluster, The vehicle should be taken to an Authorized Mahindra Dealer immediately.

8.12.4 4Xplor Mode Alerts

During 4XPLOR Mode except Normal mode , if user chooses 2WD then the system will request user to switch to 4WH and alert pops up in the Cluster.

In case if user does not switch to 4WH mode then system will wait for few secs and then it will come out of 4XPLOR Mode to Normal mode.

During 4XPLOR Mode selection or when vehicle is in any of the 4XPLOR modes, in case of any internal failure in the system then it will exit from 4XPLOR mode.

Display	Operating Conditions
	The warning will be displayed if user request 4WH above 80 kmph vehicle speed
	The warning will be displayed if user enter or exit 4WL mode during driving. (MT Variant)
	The warning will be displayed if user enter or exit 4WL mode during driving. (AT Variant)
	The warning will be displayed if user enter or exit 4WL/4WH mode during driving.

Keep the mode in snow or Sand as appropriate.
It is suggested that in normal operating conditions use 4H and relevant 4XPLOR mode.
If the vehicle is badly stuck and not getting out even after repeated attempts of going forward and reverse or due to extreme load coming. Drive in 4L. However as soon as the extreme patch is over, we suggest to move out to 4H.

Tyre pressure : In sand it is essential that the tyre pressure be reduced.

8.12.5 Do’s and Dont’s for Front Axle Having Disconnect System

Drive Mode	Operation of Drive Mode	Do’s	Dont’s
2WD	Normal Operation of vehicle.	Normal operation of vehicle
2WD	Rear Wheels are powered only. The disconnect and the transfer case are disengaged.	Normal operation of vehicle
4WH	Front and rear wheels are powered. The disconnect is engaged and the transfer case is locked The front axle will transfer power to the ground at all times. To shift from 2WD to 4WH rotate the selector switch to the 4WH position or Press the 4WH selector switch. This can be done at vehicle speed < 80 kmph. To shift from 4WH to 2WD rotate the selector switch to 2WD or Press the 4WH selector switch. This can be done at no speed limit.	Engage 4WH only when the vehicle has been traveling straight for greater than 15 seconds.	Do not operate the vehicle in 4WH mode on dry, hard-surfaced roads
			Do not shift into of 4WH while the rear wheels are slipping.
			It is not recommended to operate the vehicle in 4WH mode with a Temporary spare tyre. If 4WH drive operation is necessary, do not operate at speeds above 16 kmph and/or for distance greater than 80 km. Extended operation in 4WH with Temporary spare tyre may result in damage to drivetrain components.
4WL	Front and rear wheels are powered. The disconnect is engaged and the transfer case is locked in low gear. The front axle will transfer power to the ground at all times. To shift from 2WD or 4WH into 4WL. Stop the vehicle, depress the brake and place the automatic transmission in N (Neutral) or depress the clutch on vehicles with a manual transmission. Rotate the selector switch to the 4WL position. To shift from 4WL to 2WD or 4WH. Stop the vehicle, depress the brake and place the automatic transmission in N (Neutral) or depress the clutch on vehicles with a manual transmission. Rotate the selector switch to 2WD/4WH or Press 4WH/4WL for 2WD.	Engage 4WL only when the vehicle's transmission is in neutral or the clutch is depressed and the vehicle is stopped.	Do not operate the vehicle in 4WL mode on dry, hard-surfaced roads.
			Do not shift into or out of 4WL while vehicle is moving or the rear wheels are spinning.
			Do not be concern about some momentary clunks and ratcheting sounds when initially shifting into 4WL mode. The noise is caused by the front drivetrain engagement
			It is not recommended to operate the vehicle in 4WL mode with a Temporary spare tyre. If 4WL drive operation is necessary, do not operate at speeds above 16 kmph or for distance greater than 80 km. Extended operation in 4WL with temporary spare tyre may result in damage to drivetrain components.

8.13 Drive Modes (if equipped)

Drive Mode is a quick and easy way to change driving style of your vehicle. With Drive mode settings, you can instantly adjust driving dynamics and feel of your vehicle, all on the go. The system is incredibly easy to use, simply chose you choice of "Drive Mode" and experience 3 different vehicles in one.

To activate the Drive modes, Press Drive mode hard switch on center fascia switch bank and select required drive mode from cluster Screen

Press drive mode switch to enable drive mode selection menu in cluster display and further consecutive switch press leads to navigate the drive mode options. The highlighted one is selected after no switch press for at least 2 seconds.

Note:

1. If any alerts triggered in cluster, First press of drive mode switch the particular alert message will suppress (if applicable). Then in immediate next press selection menu will be triggered.

2. In Case alert is not suppressed user has to wait untill alert timeout to select drive mode menu..

You can select from multiple drive modes options any time during your Drive, meaning you can switch to the perfect mode when the situation calls for it. Whether you're looking for an relaxed commute or a sporty back roads adventure, Drive Mode allows you to perfectly tailor your vehicle for your unique driving style.

Drive Modes essentially offers you the Driver a Drive Experience of 3 different cars in one car.

•

You can choose ZAP mode to experience a TRUE SUV drive, a drive that is true to the Mahindra SUV experience. This is the default mode.

•

You can choose ZIP mode for a normal comfortable city drive. The Engine Power and shift points (in AT) will be suitable for traffic conditions.

•

You can choose ZOOM Mode for the Adrenaline Rush. Engine Power, Gear shifts , Braking will all work together to give you an absolute THRILL to your driving experience.

Driving Modes changes vehicle handling, dynamics and entire Drive Feel at a touch of an icon. This essentially enables Driver to experience multiple calibrations seamlessly.

Driving modes alters

Sensitivity of Accelerator pedal along with engine power delivery

Gear shift patterns

Steering effort

TCS Control

Based on the mode selected driving

ZAP Mode: ZAP Mode offers regular everyday performance. The car runs like a true Mahindra should. It offers a good balance between ZIP and ZOOM settings and is ideal for day-to-day use. The vehicle will be default in ZAP mode every time the vehicle Ignition is turned ON. This is the default mode.

ZIP Mode: ZIP mode is the accelerator pedal response and shift points (in AT) have been modified so as to have comfortable and easy control for traffic condition.

ZOOM Mode: This mode is for a more spirited driving. ZOOM mode is offered to make the car more fun, as it produces more engaging and potent ride-quality. In this mode, accelerator will become more responsive, i.e. the car accelerates more readily. The steering gets heavier, Gear shift and is delayed.

Once any of the modes is selected, we would have an ALERT message in cluster.

Based on the mode selected the Alert message would vary for

ZAP: ZAP MODE ACTIVATED

ZIP: ZIP MODE ACTIVATED

ZOOM: ZOOM MODE ACTIVATED

Once selected we would have a permanent indication in the CLUSTER. Also, the skin of the cluster also changes as per the mode.

1. When in Cruise control Vehicle will always be defaulted to ZAP MODE

2. ON every IGNITION Cycle, vehicle will always start in ZAP MODE

	This alert is displayed when Zip drive mode is activated.
	This alert is displayed when Zap drive mode is activated.
	This alert is displayed when Zoom drive mode is activated.
	3. IN case of any faults at vehicle level , that doesn't allow the vehicle to be in the mode of choice Customer is alerted by an alert message – “Drive Mode Not Possible” in cluster screen and the Mode choice in the Cluster would be Blank.

8.14 Micro Hybrid Technology (Engine Stop/Start System) – MT/AT (If equipped)

Engine Stop/Start system automatically “stops” and “starts” the engine when idle at signals or long traffic jams. This in turn gives a better fuel efficiency.

8.14.1 Engine Stop/Start System Overview– MT

Engine Stop/Start system is activated by the Engine Stop/Start button in the driver side switch bank. The LED on the button indicates the status of the button.

How does the Engine Stop/Start System Work?

Let’s take a simple example of driving in traffic conditions within your city. Assume that your vehicle has stopped at a traffic junction due to a red signal. The following steps illustrate how the system functions:

•

The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the neutral gear and the clutch pedal is released

•

The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the cluster will blink indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically after a specific time period

•

The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster indicating the engine was stopped by the “Engine Stop/Start” System

•

Once the signal turns green, press the clutch pedal and the engine starts immediately

•

The indicator in the cluster goes OFF indicating that the engine has started again and you are ready to drive on

For auto stop to happen, the following conditions are to be met:

•

Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default and should not be turned off using the selection switch

•

Bonnet is fully closed

•

In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 7 kmph at least once

•

Current status of the engine is idling

•

Vehicle speed is zero

•

Accelerator pedal and clutch pedal are fully released

•

Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition

•

Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between 25 degree C and 100 degree C). This is an extra precaution to ensure safe working of the engine

•

Fuel temperature is less than 60 degree C

•

Gear in neutral

•

DPF REGEN should not be in active state

•

Vehicle should not have DEF error codes E14, E24 & E34

•

OBD and CHECK ENGINE telltale in OFF condition

For auto start to happen, the following conditions are to be met:

•

Vehicle should have been stopped by the Engine Stop/Start System

•

Gear lever is in the neutral position, Clutch pedal is fully de-pressed

•

Vehicle speed is zero

•

Engine Stop/Start System is in active state

•

Bonnet should be closed

8.14.2 Engine Stop/Start System Overview – AT

Engine Stop/Start system is activated by the Engine Stop/Start button in the driver side switch bank. The LED on the button indicates the status of the button.

How does the Engine Stop/Start System Work?

•

The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the “D” Mode and the brake pedal is pressed

•

The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the cluster will blink indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically after a specific time period

•

The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster indicating the engine was stopped by the “Engine Stop/Start” System

•

Once the signal turns green, release the brake pedal and the engine starts immediately

•

The indicator in the cluster goes OFF indicating that the engine has started again and you are ready to drive on

For auto stop to happen, the following conditions are to be met:

•

Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default and should not be turned off using the selection switch

•

Bonnet is fully closed

•

In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 7 kmph at least once

•

Current status of the engine is idling

•

Vehicle speed is zero

•

Brake pedal is fully pressed

•

Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition

•

Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between 25 degree C and 100 degree C). This is an extra precaution to ensure safe working of the engine

•

Fuel temperature is less than 60 degree C

•

Gear shift Lever in ‘D’ mode

•

Vehicle should not be in slope

•

DPF REGEN should not be in active state

•

Vehicle should not have DEF error codes E14, E24 & E34l

•

AT Warning telltale in OFF condition

•

OBD and CHECK ENGINE telltale in OFF condition

For auto start to happen, the following conditions are to be met:

•

Vehicle should have been stopped by the Engine Stop/Start System

•

Gear lever is in ‘D’ mode and brake pedal is fully released

•

Vehicle speed is zero

•

Engine Stop/Start System is in active state

•

Bonnet should be closed

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

What is the advantage of the system?

The Engine Stop/Start System aids in attaining better fuel efficiency on your vehicle and thus reducing your running costs. However, the mileage improvement will depend upon various parameters such as prevailing traffic, driving patterns, etc.

What are the other advantages of the system?

•

Since the engine is switched off during traffic signals / jams, considerable amount of CO2 release in the atmosphere is avoided. This reduces global warming and thus provides us with a cleaner atmosphere to live

•

Ability to start the engine by pressing the clutch pedal

•

Reduces noise pollution at traffic signals

Is it possible to start the engine through the clutch pedal for the first time?

No, the engine can be cranked only with the ignition key for the first time. If the engine is stopped automatically by the system, only then it is possible to start the engine through clutch pedal in MT.

How to activate/deactivate the system?

The system is activated by default during every ignition cycle. The LED indication on the Engine Stop/Start switch indicates the status of the system. The system can be turned OFF or back ON using the Engine Stop/Start switch.

Whether the system will get activated as soon as the engine is started the first time with the ignition key?

No, the Engine Stop/Start system can be activated only by the Engine Stop/Start switch, provided all listed conditions (in the previous section) are met. This is to ensure better performance of the engine in terms of fuel economy and durability.

What is to be done, if I don’t want the system to stop my engine at traffic signals/jams?

The system can be turned OFF by the Engine Stop/Start button in the central bezel switch bank.

Whether the A/C will function, if the engine is switched off?

No, the A/C will not work. However, the blower will be in operation when the ignition is ON.

What will happen if I keep the clutch continuously pressed at traffic signals/jams?

The system will not stop the engine if the clutch is continuously pressed since it indicates the driver’s intention of moving the vehicle immediately.

When the battery charge is low, whether the engine will be switched off?

If the battery charge drops below a certain threshold level, the system will not stop the engine so as to preserve the battery from further draining.

10.

Whether I will be able to operate the engine with the normal ignition key?

Yes, normal operation with the ignition key is always possible.

11.

Whether the vehicle will start (or) stop in gear for MT?

The vehicle will not start or stop automatically in gear to ensure safety. It will do so only in the neutral position of the gear lever.

12.

Whether the system will stop my engine in moving traffic?

No, the engine will be stopped only when the vehicle speed is zero.

13.

Whether the audio system will be switched OFF, when the engine shuts down?

No, the audio system will not be switched OFF and you can continue to enjoy the music.

14.

Whether the engine will re-crank whenever the clutch pedal is pressed in MT?

No, when the engine is running, the starter motor will not attempt to re-crank.

15.

If any component involved in the system fails, what will happen?

The system has a built-in diagnostic module which understands the failure and immediately goes to bypass mode. In the bypass mode, the engine can be turned ON and OFF by ignition key as usual.

8.15 Fuel-BS VI

For Diesel: Use commercially available vehicular Ultra-low Sulfur Highway Diesel that meets the BIS standard (IS 1460; 2017 BS VI specification or equivalent). Information on diesel quality can normally be found in the fuel pump.

Please contact filling station personnel in case labels in the pump cannot be found. If the diesel fuel with high sulfur content (more than 10 PPM) and unspecified additives are used, it can cause the DPF system damage and emission warranty issues.

For Petrol: Use only commercially available Petrol fuel conforming to IS 2796: 2017 BS-VI specification or equivalent (With Maximum 10% Ethanol content - E10 fuel). Information on Petrol quality can normally be found in the fuel pump. Please contact filling station personnel in case labels in the pump cannot be found.

Do not “top up” after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refueling.

Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident

Do not fill the fuel tank or mix the fuel with alcohol based fuels, kerosene, etc. This will damage the engine, fuel and exhaust system components.

If you have accidentally filled the fuel tank with incorrect or non- approved fuel, do not start the vehicle. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer to have the fuel system drained completely.

8.15.1 Fuelling during Winter

During freezing weather, if fuel is not winterised or is insufficiently winterised, waxing/gelling may start in fuel, leading to interruption in fuel supply to engine. For smooth functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold weather conditions, use winterised ULSD which are available at the filling stations during winter months. Check with your fuel retailer for further details.

Avoid inhaling fuel vapours and any skin or clothing contact. Direct skin contact with diesel /Petrol or the inhalation of fuel vapour may affect your health.

Diesel/Petrol is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Never allow sparks, flames or smoking materials near diesel/Petrol. Turn OFF the engine before refuelling. Whenever you are around diesel/Petrol, extinguish all smoking materials.

8.15.2 Minimum Fuel Requirement

It is recommended maintaining a minimum of 10 litres of fuel in the fuel tank. Driving the vehicle till the fuel tank is empty is not recommended. Always have sufficient fuel in the tank. Check the fuel level prior to starting your journey.

Never carry fuel in separate containers in the vehicle, it is dangerous and may lead to inadvertent fuel leak or spillage.

8.16 Brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes in the front and rear wheels.

Disc brakes offer good braking capability and reduced stopping distance. Wet brake discs result in reduced braking efficiency. After a car wash or driving the vehicle through water, apply and release brake pedal mildly while driving to remove the film of water from the brake disc.

Front & Rear brake pad : The Front & Rear brake pads are equipped with Mechanical Pad Wear Sensors, thus when the brake pads are worn out, there will be a metallic rubbing noise from the brake pads. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible

Even if the power assist (vacuum assistance) is completely lost, the brakes will still work. The brake pedal would be much harder than normal and the vehicle stopping / braking distance will be longer than usual

In some driving and climatic conditions may cause a brake squeal when applying first time or lightly applying the brake. Squeal noise may be produced when the vehicle is out of operation for a long time or friction faces get rusted after raining. As long as squeals are produced at a lower frequently there is no need for any special attention.

Attention: If brake squeal is excessive and occurs on every brake application, then brakes needs to be checked at your dealership.

Driving with wet brakes is dangerous. Stopping distance increases considerably while braking

Brake squeal occurs as a high frequency whistling noise usually at the end of the stop while pressing the brake pedal, squeal can occur from front or rear or from both ends. This is a normal condition caused by environmental factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc and vehicle usage pattern

Brake Creep-Groan occurs as a low-frequency (Kar-Kar) noise which occurs in AT vehicles when the vehicle is ON and D/R mode is selected and the brake pedal is released slowly to move the vehicle

8.16.1 Parking on a Hill/Incline

If you have to park the vehicle with front side facing the uphill, select first gear for MT vehicle & park position for AT vehicles and also turn the front wheels away from the kerb.

If you have to park the vehicle with front side facing downhill, select reverse gear and turn the front wheels towards the kerb.

Always ensure that the vehicle is in gear and parking brakes is engaged before leaving the vehicle.

	When parking on an uphill, turn the front wheels away from the Kerb/Pavement
	When parking on a downhill, turn the front wheels towards the Kerb/Pavement.

8.16.2 Parking Brake

To apply the parking brake, pull the park brake lever up as firmly as possible. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON, the parking brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.

To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the release button on the lever tip and lower the parking brake lever completely.

The parking brake warning lamp indicates only the parking brake status. It does not indicate the degree of brake application. Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in gear. When parking on a hill; first apply the parking brake; after that shift the TGS lever to the P position (for AT) and gear for MT. This will avoid the load on the transmission, locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of gear.

Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving off. Failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes. It will also result in reduced fuel efficiency lowered brake pad life and rear brake squeal

•

Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident

•

Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle, and be certain to leave the transmission in gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage, hit a bystander resulting in personal injury

•

Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the gear shift lever. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could move the vehicle leading to accidents

•

The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle

8.17 Hazard on Panic Braking

Hazard lamps are turned ON during panic braking for 5 seconds when the following conditions are met:

•

Ignition is ON

•

Vehicle speed is greater than 50 kmph

•

Panic/sudden brake is applied and high deceleration rate is sensed

8.18 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-lock Brake System (also called as ABS) is designed to help prevent lock-up of the wheels and stable stopping of vehicle during a sudden, panic emergency braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. The ABS system takes input from wheel speed sensors and brake pedal switch to control the brake fluid pressures at the wheels to avoid wheel lock-up. It allows vehicle to be steered during braking.

The minimum speed for ABS to function is 12 kmph. ABS is activated only during wheel lock conditions where ABS takes over and prevents wheel lock.

During the ABS operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal to indicate ABS is active. You may also hear motor noise from the engine compartment. It is recommended to hold the brake pedal firmly while the ABS is active rather than pumping the brake pedal.

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, a joint in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day, tends to activate the anti-lock brake system.

The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch ON the ignition and should go out after a few seconds. If the ABS warning lamp does not go out or if it comes ON while driving, it means there is a fault in the ABS system. In both cases, the normal braking system remains efficient, exactly as on a vehicle without ABS. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

The ABS is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. The stopping distance may be longer in the following cases:

•

Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads

•

Driving with tyre chains installed

•

Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road

•

Driving on roads where the road surface is potholes or large differences in surface height

Do not overestimate the Anti-lock Brake System: Although the Anti-lock Brake System assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. There are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with ABS active.

If tyre grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the Anti-lock Brake System will not be able to completely avoid wheel lock-up

8.19 Electric Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

EBD is a subsystem of the ABS system, It prevents least loaded wheel from locking on application of brakes, thus allows the wheel to maintain tractive contact with the road surface. The system monitors the wheel speed and when it identifies any slip, the pressure in the wheel cylinders is dumped thus preventing the wheels from locking.

A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the parking brake as well as ABS warning lamps. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

8.20 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (if equipped)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects for over-steering and under-steering behavior of the vehicle by applying the brake on the appropriate wheel automatically.

ESC uses inbuilt sensors to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle , compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over-steer or under-steer.

Over-steer - When the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

Under-steer - When the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The ESC cannot overrule the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction due to the prevailing road conditions. The ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skilful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle can not compensate for reckless or dangerous driving that could endanger the user’s safety or the safety of others on road or passerby.

8.20.1 ESC ON

Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in active mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions.

When the ESC is in operation, ESC indicator lamp will blink in the instrument cluster.

When the ESC is operating, you can feel a slight pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and indicates that braking had gone to ABS zone. Suggest that the driver should slow down the speed are not matching the road surface.

When moving out of the mud or slippery road, accelerator response may be different because ESC system controls the engine RPM to come out of this slippery road condition. This is normal.

8.20.2 ESC OFF

In some driving conditions, to maximize traction, it may be beneficial to de-activate ESC.

Such conditions are:

•

To start in deep snow or on a loose surface

•

Driving in deep sand

•

Driving through deep mud etc.

To de-activate ESC, press ESC OFF button on the driver control switch bank. Once ESC OFF mode is selected, a warning indicator illuminates in the instrument cluster.

Press ESC OFF button again to activate ESC function.

For safety reasons, ESC will be automatically re-activated once the vehicle speed crosses 64 kmph

Mahindra recommends that ESC be operational in all normal driving conditions.

When ESC is in OFF mode, other functions like HHC (Hill Hold Control), HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist), HDC (Hill Descent Control), DTC (Drag Torque Control), ROM (Roll Over Mitigation) will be available

ESC, by default, will be in ON condition for every ignition cycle.

If the ESC indicator blinks while driving, it indicates that ESC is working. However If this lamp is blinking continuously or remains ON, it indicates a malfunction in the ESC system. Drive carefully to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer and get the ESC system checked.

8.21 Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)

The HBA function is designed to optimize the vehicles braking ability during emergency braking situations, the system detects a panic braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and generates an additional brake-force boost to the driver if required.

During a panic braking situation, the brake pressure is raised to the locking pressure. For the HBA to become active, the brake Pedal must be pressed throughout the braking maneuver, that is the brakes must not be pumped and released.

The HBA function gets deactivated, when the brake pedal is released thus do not release brake pressure unless braking is no longer needed

•

The HBA system cannot prevent collisions, the capabilities of an HBA equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could risk the user’s safety.

•

The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HBA feature to prevent accidents.

8.22 Hill Descent Control (HDC) (if equipped)

This System assists the driver to descend a steep slope by means of brake intervention limiting the vehicle speed without driver's input on brakes. This does not replace cruise control

During HDC, if the wheel slip becomes excessive, ABS will be activated automatically.

HDC is a user-intended function. To activate, press HDC button on the driver control switch bank. The LED on the button illuminates indicating the status. Press the button again to deactivate HDC.

The HDC feature can control the vehicle speed from 9 kmph to 35 kmph, Above 35 kmph the HDC feature will go to ready mode. The HDC feature will be deactivated automatically if vehicle speed is more than 60 kmph. (For Activating the HDC feature again, the driver needs to press the HDC button once again within the specified speed limits)

The HDC should be enabled only on steep gradient. It is not recommended to be ON in plain road- to avoid accidental intervention

While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, descent speeds can be varied by cruise buttons, accelerator pedal & brake pedal.

To Set the desired descending speed, follow the steps listed below:

•

SET Speed — This is the driver desired speed at which vehicle should descent. This can be set using HDC switch or brake/accelerator pedals.(example: when the driver activates HDC at a speed of 30 kmph, then set speed will be 30 kmph). HDC will limit vehicle descent speed to set value).

•

If driver presses the accelerator pedal and increases the speed from 30 kmph to 34 kmph and then releases the accelerator pedal. Now the new SET speed will be 34 kmph

•

Similarly, if the driver applies brake and reduces the speed from 30 kmph to 10 kmph and then releases the brake pedal, now the new SET speed will be 10 kmph

•

If the vehicle cruise speed is with in the HDC active region, similarly the set speed can be modified using cruise +/- buttons (by tapping the “SET —” or “SET +” buttons. Each press of the button will adjust the speed by approximately 0.5 kmph)

The descent speed increases only if the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the “SET +” button may result in no speed increase.

8.23 Hill Hold Control (HHC) (if equipped)

Imagine a situation where your vehicle is stopped on an uphill incline. If you release the brake while moving off, there are chances that your vehicle may roll back. HHC helps in such situations by holding the vehicle from rolling back.

Hill Hold Control function uses the inbuilt acceleration sensor to identify the gradient and holds the vehicle for 2 seconds in MT and 1 seconds in AT vehicles after the brake pedals are released. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal

The Following conditions must be met in order for the HHC to activate:

The Vehicle must be equipped with HHC

The vehicle must be on sufficient gradient

The Parking brake must not be applied

Engine must be running

The HHC will function on both vehicle facing Up hill and vehicle facing downhill, provided the correct gears are selected.

•

Vehicle Facing Uphill – Gear should be in Forward

•

Vehicle Facing Downhill – Gear should be in Reverse

For Manual Transmission only, Neutral will be considered as Forward Gear.

•

In some situations, when the conditions are not met, the HHC may not get activated. In such cases slight rolling may occur.

•

The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HHC system to prevent rolling.

8.24 Roll Over Mitigation (ROM)

Roll Over Mitigation system is a safety function which anticipates the wheel lift due to lateral forces. The ROM function analyses the rate of change of steering wheel angle and the wheel speed to determine any possible wheel lift, the system then applies appropriate brake and may also reduce the engine power to reduce the chances of wheel lift.

In any instance where physical limits of Long. and lateral tyre road grip are not exceeded, RMF reduces the lateral forces that will lead to a critical roll moment about the center of gravity.

Minimum Vehicle speed for ROM = 25 kmph

Maximum Vehicle speed for ROM = 120 kmph

•

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.

•

The ROM system cannot prevent all roll overs; thus ROM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

8.25 Brake Disc Wiping

When a vehicle is driven in a wet condition; the accumulated wetness on the brake disks leads to an elongated brake response time.

The BDW function actuates the brakes with a low pressure, such that; the brake pads comes in contact with the rotating brake disks, creating a wiping action; thereby removing the moisture from the brake disks.

For the Brake Disc Wiping function to get activated, the following conditions must be met.

Vehicle speed above 70kmph.

Accelerator Pedal must be pressed.

The Wipers must be in ON condition (Low/High Speed)

The Pressure generated in the BDW function is very small and this is not felt by the driver during normal driving conditions.

•

The system will not be able to sense water splashed on disc from situations such as water wash or water puddles.

•

It is suggested that the driver dry the brakes in the above said conditions by driving at very slow speed and applying the brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes normal.

8.26 Electric Brake Prefill - EBP

EBP is a value-added feature in ESC, the target of the function is to reduce the air gap of the wheel brake by putting low brake pressure to the brake pads such that the brake pads come in close proximity to the brake disc.
The system detects an emergency braking by monitoring the rate of release of the acceleration pedal. A sudden release of accelerator pedal signifies an upcoming sudden braking.
By actively pre-filling the brake-system, the brake response time is reduced for an upcoming braking and full vehicle deceleration is achieved earlier. This results in a shorter stopping distance.

8.27 Driver Drowsiness Detection System (DDD)

The Driver Drowsiness Detection system advises the driver to take a break from continuous long duration driving when driver fatigue can be detected based on the driver's steering behavior. The system evaluates the steering behavior at speeds of 60-200 km/h.
Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system are as follows.

•

The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.

•

The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed, and the driver's door opened.

•

The vehicle is stopped for more than 30 minutes.

If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes.

The Drowsiness alert should be enabled in the driver assistance screen.

Pause Recommendation
	This alert comes in the display of instrument cluster when the system detects the driver is quiet sleepy or very sleepy, along with audible signal.

•

When the vehicle is driven continuously for more than 2 hours and if the system detects driver as “Quite Sleepy”, an alert message along with audio signal appears in the instrument cluster. Cluster will display the alert message till the user presses the “OK” button from steering wheel switch.

•

After pressing the OK button, if break is not detected by the system for next 15 minutes, alert message will repeat again. If the drowsiness is continuously sensed and if the system detects driver as “Very Sleepy”, next level alert message & audio signal will be triggered along with steering wheel haptic feedback.

Driver Attention Level: The Driver attention level is calculated based on driving behavior and many external parameters and the attention level is displayed to the driver in the Drive Info Tab

Driver Attention Level	Description
	Very Awake
	Quite Awake
	Neither Awake nor Sleepy
	Quite Sleepy
	Very Sleepy

•

The driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if you feel tired.

•

The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed.

•

Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.

•

There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.

•

In some situations, the system can evaluate the steering behavior incorrectly and therefore falsely display a break recommendation.

•

The system is designed primarily for use on highways.

9 STARTING AND DRIVING 2

9.1 Wheels and Tyres

9.1.1 Tyre Information

A	RADIAL TYRES OR BIAS-PLY TYRE
B	“TUBELESS” OR “TUBE TYPE”
C	TYRE SIZE
D	MAX. LOAD LIMIT
E	TREAD WEAR

9.1.2 Tyre Rating

Your vehicle is originally equipped with tyres supplied by a reputable manufacturer. If you ever have any questions regarding your tyres, please refer to literature supplied by the tyre manufacturer, or to the separate tyre warranty provided by the tyre manufacturer. You may also contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer directly, or the tyre manufacturer.

The tyre rating of your vehicle is:

•

245/65 R17 107 H

•

255/60 R18 108H

Tyre rating is explained as below:

Tyre size (Example: 245/65 R17 107H)

Callout (A) : 245 (Three-digit number) : This number gives the width in millimetres of the tyre from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. This is called as “Section Width”.

Callout (B) : 65 (Two-digit number) : This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tyres ratio of height to section width.

Callout (C) : R : This is the Tyre Construction Code. The “R” stands for Radial.

Callout (D) :17 (Two-digit number) : This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

Callout (E) :107 (Two or three-digit number) : This number is the tyres load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tyre can support.

Callout (F) : H :Tyre speed rating or speed symbol. Never drive the vehicle faster than the tyre speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tyre is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.

9.1.3 Speed Rating

SPEED SYMBOL	MAX. SPEED CAPABILITY
SPEED SYMBOL	KM/HR
L	120
M	130
N	140
P	150
Q	160
R	170
S	180
T	190
U	200
H	210
V	240
W	270
Y	300
Z	240+

9.1.4 Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)

Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard) is located on the driver side inner B-pillar.

this placard tells you important information about tyre size designed for your vehicle, and the tyre inflation pressures for the front & rear tyres.

Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can cause tyre failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Improper inflated tyres can adversely affect vehicle handling or can fail unexpectedly, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

	Regular Tyre	SpareTyre
Dynamic Rolling radius (mm)	364 +/- 7

9.1.5 Tyre Pressure

Proper Tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper Tyre pressure:

•

Safety

•

Economy

•

Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Proper Tyre inflation contributes to a comfortable and safe ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal Tyre pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response or may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the Tyre tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier Tyre replacement. Under inflation also increases Tyre rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

The proper cold Tyre inflation pressure is listed in the Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard), located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar.

9.1.6 4XPLOR mode

4XPLOR Mode	Traction /Drive	Mode	Recommended tyre pressure
4XPLOR Mode	Traction /Drive	Mode	17 Tyre	18 Tyre	Caution
NORMAL (Tarmac & Cement surface)	2WD	Normal	34 PSI	34 PSI	-
NORMAL (Tarmac & Cement surface)	4WD	Normal- 4H	34 PSI	34 PSI	-
GRASS / SNOW	4WD	Snow- 4 H	34 PSI	34 PSI	Reduce speed to keep the vehicle under control and avoid giving aggressive steering input. If Manual transmission try to start in 2nd gear unless in steep gradient.
MUD & RUTS	4WD	Mud- 4H	34 PSI	34 PSI	Reduce speed to keep the vehicle under control and avoid giving aggressive steering input.
SAND	4WD	Sand 4 H	Lower pressure as appropriate	Lower pressure as appropriate	Needs to maintain the vehicle momentum on soft surfaces to move ahead & Engine RPM maintained to be higher Avoid braking and giving sharp steering input.
In the snow or mud or sand. The default 4H will be ON. However if the vehicle gets badly stuck and not able to come out then 4L can be used to come out of the tricky situation and shift to 4H as soon as possible. Similarly when the tyre pressure is reduced to drive in Sand. As soon as the sand is over fill tyre pressure. If pump not available , drive with reduced speeds to the nearest tyre shop/ fuel bunk.

9.1.7 Inspection and Adjustment Procedure

The Tyre pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as inspected for signs of Tyre wear or visible damage, at least once a month. Use a good quality pressure gauge to check Tyre pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial Tyres may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated. At the same time, each Tyre should be inspected for signs of Tyre wear or visible damage.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold Tyre inflation pressures. Cold Tyre inflation pressure is defined as the Tyre pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 km after a three-hour period. Check Tyre pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as Tyre pressures vary with temperature changes. Tyre pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 7°C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking Tyre pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.

When it was new, the spare Tyre in your vehicle was fully inflated. However, a spare Tyre can lose pressure over time. In order to avoid being stranded, check the spare Tyre air pressure frequently.

9.1.8 Inflating Your Tyres

Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your Tyres are properly inflated. Remember that a Tyre can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat.

At least once a month or before long trips, inspect each Tyre and check the Tyre pressure with a Tyre gauge (including spare Tyre). Inflate all Tyres to the recommended inflation pressure.

Under-inflation is the most common cause of Tyre failures and may result in severe Tyre cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the Tyre. It also may result in unnecessary Tyre stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.

•

Over or under inflation may reduce the tyre life

•

Do not correct the tyre pressure immediately after the vehicle is stopped after operation, server handling or long distance drive. Check the inflation pressure when the vehicle is idle for 3 hours or 10 minutes of driving after 3 hours in idle condition

•

Do not drive the vehicle with lower pressure than recommended, which may lead to over heating of sidewall resulting in tyre damage

•

Check the tyre pressures once in a month or before long distance travels

•

Check your tyres regularly for any damages or cut on the sidewall. Please replace the tyres immediately.

Always inflate your Tyres to the recommended pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the Tyre. The recommended Tyre inflation pressure is found on the Tyre Label which is located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar. Failure to follow the Tyre pressure recommendations can cause uneven tread wear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.

If you overfill the Tyre, release air by pushing the metal stem in the centre of the valve. Then recheck the pressure.

After inspecting or adjusting the Tyre pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the stem, resulting in an unexpected loss of Tyre pressure, an accident and/or personal injury.

9.1.9 Radial Ply Tyres

Combining radial ply Tyres with other types of Tyres on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury. Always use radial Tyres in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of Tyres.

Cuts and punctures in radial Tyres are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for radial Tyre repairs.

9.1.10 Tread Wear Assessment

Tyre wear can be assessed by looking the tyre wear indicator (TWI). The TWI will appear as a band across the tyre tread when the tyre wears out to the minimum allowed tread depth of 1.6 mm

Tyre Wear Indicator (TWI)

A mark of triangle in the Tyre side wall indicates the position of the Tyre wear indicators at 6 to 8 locations around the circumference of the tyre.

The TWI appear as raised portions inside the tread in a new or partially worn tyre (A).

As the tyre wears out to its minimum allowable tread depth, the TWI will appear as a band across the tyre tread (B).

The tyre should be replaced at this stage or before this stage.

New Tread (A)	Worn Tread (B)

It is extremely dangerous to drive with worn out tyres on wet roads/rainy seasons. The vehicle can skid and aquaplane on wet surfaces, if the tyre tread depth is insufficient.

Replace the tyre before the tyre tread depth reached the minimum acceptable limit.

9.1.11 Life of Tyre

The service life of a Tyre is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to:

. Driving style 00 . Tyre pressure 00. Distance driven

Tyres and the spare Tyre should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden and unexpected Tyre failure, leading to an accident and/or personal injury.

Do not use a Tyre, wheel size or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle on the Tyre placard. Combinations of unapproved Tyres and wheels may change suspension geometric and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling, stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control of the vehicle or the Tyre can unexpectedly fail, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.

Keep dismounted Tyres in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect Tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Replacing original Tyres with Tyres of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

9.1.12 Snow Chains

Snow chains cannot be used on these Tyres.

In case of harsh winter driving conditions, it is recommended using winter Tyres with the same specifications for better stability, safety and performance.

9.1.13 Tyre Rotation Recommendations

Type 1 - Applicable for RWD & 4WD Vehicles - 5 Steel Wheels
	Tyres on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns.

Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.

Type 2 – Applicable for RWD & 4WD Vehicles - 4 Alloy Wheels

It is recommended rotating the tyres as per the “Maintenance Schedule”.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the diagram. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-road type tyres.

More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

9.1.14 Non-Standard Spare Wheel

The Non - standard spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.

When Using the Non-Standard Spare Wheel

•

Non - Standard Spare wheel provided specifically designed for your vehicle. Do not use your non standard spare tyre on another vehicle.

•

Do not use more than one non-standard Spare Wheel simultaneously.

•

Drive the shortest possible distance with Non-standard Spare Wheel.

•

While using Non standard spare wheel reduce speed, Avoid sharp cornering, Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

When Non-Standard Spare Wheel is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

ABS, Cruise control (If equipped), EPS, Rear View monitor system (If equipped), Navigation system (If equipped)

Speed Limit when using Non-Standard Spare tyre

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a Non-standard Spare Wheel is installed on the vehicle.

The Non-Standard Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

•

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the Non Standard Spare tyre compared to when driving with standard tyres. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

•

Inflate the tyres as per manufacturers recommendation, refer Tyre pressure label on the door panel

•

TPMS is not provided in spare wheel

•

Do not fit tyre chains to the spare tyre.
Tyre chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

•

Tyre to be loaded within the max allowable load limit specified by the load rating index marked on the tyre.

•

Tyre to be operated with in the speed limit specified by the speed rating index marked on the tyre

•

Do not use the tyre for longer distance than recommended. Repair & refit the regular tyre as soon as possible.

•

Recommended to drive Max 50 km in a stretch or reach nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer

•

Refer the Feature Matrix for the spare wheel size

9.1.15 Changing a Flat Tyre

Refer to “Changing a Flat Tyre” section in the Emergencies chapter for details.

9.1.16 Wheel Tightness

When you change a wheel, remove all rust and dirt at all locations where the wheel contacts the wheel hub. Use a scraper or wire brush to be sure that you remove all rust and dirt. A loose wheel could have damaged or elongated the holes in the rim, or damaged the rim/hub assembly. If any of the wheel nuts are damaged, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Always tighten the nuts in a criss-cross sequence. Never use oil or grease on your wheel nuts.

Never overtighten the nuts on the wheel stud. You could damage the wheel stud or the nut.

Torque tighten the wheel nuts to the specified value at the nearest Authorised Mahindra Workshop.

The tyres fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and they comply with the requirements under the Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR) 1989.

9.2 Tiretronics (if equipped)

The tiretronics system checks the pressure and temperature of the air inside the pneumatic tyres of the vehicle. System alerts the driver during driving if any of the tyre parameters are not in acceptable limits due to any reason.

The system will continue to alert until the warning condition is resolved to the actual placard values.

Appropriate tyre pressure and tyre temperature is required for;

•

Adequate braking

•

Road grip

•

Vehicle handling

•

Vehicle maneuvering

•

Reduced tyre wear and tear

•

Reduced tyre strain and safety

•

Good fuel efficiency

The instrument cluster displays all alerts & visual warnings related to Tiretronics system.

9.2.1 Operation of Tiretronics

Tiretronics uses wireless sensor technology that is mounted on the wheel rim to checks the tyre pressure levels. They transmit the data to the receiver inside the vehicle which is in turn is communicated and displayed on the instrument cluster.

In the instrument cluster screen all the tyre locations will display the status as pressure and temperature. Spare tyre (if TPMS sensor equipped) information on tiretronics screen shall be available only during any alerts and warning in the spare tyre. (User Shall verify spare tyre pressure manually, In certain conditions system may not update pressure for Spare tyre correctly)

The Tiretronics has been customized only for the manufacturer’s genuine tyres and wheels. Tiretronics pressure limits and warning messages have been established and calibrated for the tyre size equipped on your vehicle. Replacement of manufacturer’s parts with a different size, type or style of components may damage the sensor and lead to incorrect readings.

Do not use aftermarket tyre sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with Tiretronics. Failure to comply may lead to sensor damage.

The Tiretronics is not intended to replace normal tyre care and maintenance or to warn of any tyre failure condition. The system should not be used as a replacement for a pressure measuring gauge to adjust the vehicle tyre pressure.

Driving with under-inflated tyres cause the tyres to overheat and may lead to tyre failure. Under-inflated tyres reduce fuel efficiency, tyre tread life and may affect the vehicle's maneuverability and braking ability.

It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure using an accurate pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tiretronics warning indicator.

9.2.2 Tiretronics Warning Lamp

The Tiretronics warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates for any alert condition and also for low/high tyre pressure/High temperature alerts and malfunction.

9.2.3 Tiretronics Sensor Installation

First apply lubricant (paste) or soapy water to rim hole or valve nozzle bar, as shown in the following figure (the diagram is for reference only, and it is operated according to the degree of automation of the customer's production line)

Line the sensor up with the rim hole and attach the TTV insertion tool to the end of the valve ready for pull in

Ensure the TTV insertion tool is positioned to the correct notch and that the sensor is pulled through in a direction parallel to the valve whole axis and NOT at an angle to it

The picture below shows a correctly fitted sensor. Note the rubber bulb of the valve resting against the rim and the front face of the enclosure is NOT touching the rim. Apply tyre soap solution to the rubber portion of the valve stem and the top of the enclosure

Place the inner tyre bead over the rim

Place the outer tyre bead over the rim

Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure, check the valve area for leakage and re-balance the wheels prior to installing back on the vehicle

Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. The fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.

9.2.4 Tiretronics Sensor Removal

•

Remove the tyre from the rim

•

Remove the valve core to deflate the tyre.

•

Remove the tread and ensure that the extractor forceps is inserted into the tyre at the yellow position shown below and turn the rim clockwise.

•

To remove the sensor, firstly remove the screw using a T6 TORX screwdriver.

•

Carefully and firmly pull the enclosure straight back off the valve

•

Cut the rubber bulb and attach the TTV tool to the valve. Remove the valve from the rim by pulling through the rim, or simply pull through without cutting the bulb

•

Lift the outer tyre bead over the rim using a tyre tool

The valve must be positioned just left of the start position to avoid sensor damage. Do not touch the sensor with the tyre tool.

•

Lift the inner tyre bead over the rim using the tyre tool

•

Remove existing valve stem

Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. Fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.

9.2.5 Functionalities of Tiretronics System

•

Low Pressure Alert

•

High Pressure Alert

•

Pressure Leakage Alert

•

Sensor Signal Missing (Communication error)

•

Tiretronics Sensor Faulty.

•

Tyre Auto Learn

•

Tyre Fill Assist (TFA)

•

Tyre Pressure Imbalance

Low Pressure Alert

Low pressure monitoring is to indicate low tyre pressure. Please note the following points.

•

Low pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes below threshold. Low pressure will be set based on the temperature value.

•

Low pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the information screen and alert register screen

•

If low pressure is observed, respective tyre should be rectified with cause of low pressure and then fill air

•

Once low pressure alert is set with tyre pressure below threshold the alert shall not be cleared until the pressure is filled to the placard value

High Pressure Alert

High pressure monitoring is to indicate high pressure alert. Please note the following points.

•

High pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes above threshold

•

High pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the tiretronics screen

•

If high pressure value is observed, air has to be released from the respective tyre until the pressure reduces to the placard value

•

The vehicle should be driven above 40 kmph for the new pressure value to be updated and the alert to be cleared

•

Once the high pressure alert is triggered the alert shall not get cleared until the respective tyre pressure is reaches to the placard value

Pressure Leakage Alert

Pressure leakage monitoring is to indicate pressure leakage in any of the vehicle tyres. Please note the following points.

•

Pressure Leakage alert will be set only when the tyre pressure is leaking at a rate greater than defined threshold

•

In the pressure leakage condition if the tyre pressure goes too below threshold then the low pressure alert will also be set

•

The pressure leakage alert in the main alert screen will pop up once when the alert is set for driver notification and will be shown in tiretronics screen when the vehicle is in running /ignition ON condition

•

Once pressure leakage is observed the respective tyre should be observed for air leakages and the puncture condition has to be rectified. Proper placard value should be filled after puncture rectification

•

If the vehicle is running in an extremely rocky and acute bumpy condition then fluctuating pressure leakage alert may get set which will get rectified when the vehicle runs back on a normal road. This happens due to sudden change in pressure levels due to rocky conditions

Sensor Signal Missing Alert

When the vehicle runs in speed above 40kmph, Tiretronics system receives signal from all the Tiretronics sensor installed in all running tyres.

•

On account of any issue in signal reception or Tiretronics sensor damage or tyres changed with out performing manual learning then the signal will not be received

•

If the Signals from the tiretronics sensor are not received atleast once, when the vehicle is driven at a speed greater than 40kmph for more than 10 minutes, "Signal Missing" alert will be set for the respective tyre and Tiretronics Telltale will be ON.

•

When the Tiretronics signal missing is set then perform manual learning once. If manual learning is not done successfully then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be checked by carefully opening the tyre

•

If the sensor is found to be damaged then it should be replaced with a new one and manual/auto learning should be done

Sensor Faulty / Low Battery Alert

Each tiretronics sensor in the vehicle tyres has an internal individual battery . If the battery level is too low or the sensor by itself is malfunctioning then the Tiretronics system shall give this alert.

•

If the Tiretronics sensor low battery/faulty is set then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be removed by carefully opening the tyre and replacing it with a new sensor

•

Post replacing the new sensor, manual/auto learning should be done

Tyre Auto Learn Process (If Enabled in cluster)

In case of tyres location changed from its original location, Automatically tyre swap location shall be identified and pressure and temperature value for respective tyre shall be updated within 10 min of vehicle driving based on environmental condition & vehicle drive condition auto location shall take one or more drive cycle to auto learn.
In case of a new TPMS replaced in the tyre, automatically system shall identify the tyre swapped location and update the warnings and alert for new location.

If spare wheel tyre get swapped with any of the running tyres then display shall show Signal missing in the cluster for respective tyre location and TPMS indication lamp will blink for 90 sec and remain ON. TPMS indication lamp will continue until the error condition is rectified.

Refer cluster settings for the “TPMS Auto Learn ” in the” Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details

Tyre Fill Assist (TFA) (If Enabled in cluster)

During Air Filling in tyre, Hazard lamps shall blink until placard value reaches.

During air filling If tyre Pressure has reached the Placard Value, then Horn shall activate one time

During Air filling If tyre Pressure exceeds Placard Value, then Hazard lamps shall blink at faster rate.

Refer cluster settings for the “Tyre Fill Assist ” in the” Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details

Tyre Pressure Imbalance

	During driving if the system identifies tyre Pressure imbalance on front two tyres / Rear two tyres then Instrument Cluster shall popup Tyre Pressure imbalance warning.

9.2.6 Tiretronics Manual Learning

After tyre rotation or Tiretronics sensor replacement, the receiver must be learnt, else the Tiretronics warning lamp will be ON, indicating malfunction.

Mandate Points: Manual learning is the process by which the identities of 4 sensors installed inside the tyres are learnt and programmed in to the memory of the receiver module.

Manual learning should be compulsorily performed on any of the following conditions or operations done

•

Any sensors replaced.

•

Any of the tyres are replaced

•

If any of the tyres or set of tyres are shuffled or swapped in position

•

If tyre rotation operation is performed

•

If it is observed that the alert indications in the tiretronics screen are not co-relating with respect to their actual position in the vehicle

Once manual learning is initiated, the sensors inside the tyres need to be triggered by leaking the air from each tyre one at a time and should be completed within certain value post to each event for learning all 4 tyres

Do not perform Manual learning process at the same time on two vehicles with in the radius of 20 meters

It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre.

It is required to ensure the tyres have pressure > 32psi and < 36psi before initiating the manual learning process

Post manual learning, all tyres should be filled to the placard pressure value

It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre.

Initiating the Manual Learning Process

1. Turn the ignition OFF. Press and hold the up button in steering wheel

2. Turn the ignition ON

3. Wait for the cluster’s tachometer and speedometer to rotate to highest position and then release the enter button in up position. Then observe the cluster for the Tiretronics telltale to blink, vehicle siren will indicate by 2 chrips & 2 times turn lamps blink and instrument cluster screen shows ‘TPMS MANUAL LEARNING’
If failed to enter in to the manual learning mode;

•

Try initiating the manual learning once again

•

Check if the reverse gear is engaged, if it is engaged disengage it

•

Check if the Enter button is working fine

If problem still persist, contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer for further assistance.

Starting from Front Left Tyre: Start leaking the air from the front left for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt

If the front left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and turn lamps turn on 1 time and the FL tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.

Learning the Front Right Tyre: Start leaking the air from the front right for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the front right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and turn lamps turn on 1 time and the FR tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.

Learning the Rear Right Tyre: Start leaking the air from the rear right for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the rear right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and turn lamps turn on 1 time and the RR tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.

Completing the Learning with Rear Left Tyre: Start leaking the air from the rear left tyre for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the rear left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and turn lamps turn on 1 time and the RL tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.

If rear left tyre is also learned, then 1 siren chirp is heard and turn lamps turn on 1 time and aLL tyres shows learned at respective tyre positions and ‘TPMS Manual Learning successful’ in the centre of the screen.

If learning is not successful at any point of time, or at any point of time during the learning process if the learning takes more than 90 secs of time for each tyre position then the system shall exit the learning mode and shows the ‘TPMS Manual Learning Not Successful’ screen, and 4 siren chirps is heard also turn lamps turn on 4 times.

Limitations

•

The Tiretronics monitors only tyre pressure and temperature. It does not monitor conditions such as tyre wear

•

The Tiretronics will not be able to detect an instant tyre burst and inform the driver in advance

•

There may be the possibility of getting all the tyre location indicators on the Tiretronics display blinking along with the Tiretronics telltale, on passing environment area prone to heavy power lines and RF signal. It will come back to normal condition when interference gets cleared

9.2.7 Tiretronics — Points to Remember

•

It is recommended to fill the pressure to 34 psi at a digital gauge station only

•

Every 15 days, inflate all the tyres up to 34 psi and inflation should be done at cold condition/ambient temperature

•

Pressure deviation between the Tiretronics display and gauge will depend upon the following factors:

–

Atmospheric pressure

–

Error in pressure filling gauge (not calibrated)

–

Air leakage during inflation/deflation

•

Tiretronics measures pressure of the tyre

•

Pressure deviation is defined for 0.5 psi (min) and 3 psi (max)

•

If the vehicle battery/fuse is disconnected and reconnected, it will update the pressure after the vehicle is driven or sensor is activated

•

If the vehicle tyres are rotated or any of the tyres sensors are replaced, then tires have to be learned via either manual or auto learning. Refer Tyre Auto/Manual learn process in Tiretronics section for more details

•

If more than one tyre needs to be learned, learn all 4 tyres as per manual learning procedure

•

Tiretronics is only a warning or indicating device. Pressure and temperature values displayed by the system is for indication prior to alert purposes only. The Tiretronics system should not be used as a measuring device to correlate or calibrate against other systems

•

During winter or in cold conditions, there may be chances of getting a pressure alert with the corresponding tyre location indicator in the display, if the tyre pressure is near the thresholds level. i.e. between 28 psi to 24 psi. However, this alert will get cleared after driving a few kilometers depending upon the climatic condition

9.2.8 Recommended Playcard Value

Ambient Temp. (Deg C)	Recommended Pressure Front & Rear (34 Psi Placard)
<0	28
10	29
20	31
30	32
40	34
50	35
60	37

If the vehicle was previously halted for more than 45 min & is driven less than 15 min before filling the air then the tyres shall be filled to the respective playcard as per the ambient temperature else to the next playcard value.

Example: If a vehicle was halted at a ambient of 30 deg c for 50 min and driven to a air filling station within 5 min then respective play card value will be 32.0 PSI for front & rear. Else 33.5 PSI

9.3 Front/Rear Obstacle Detection System (if equipped)

9.4 Parking Assistance System (PAS) – RPAS & FPAS (If equipped)

Parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse and in front. While Parking, PAS will detect the obstacles at the rear and front side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors and windshield. The PAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound and display about the location of the detected obstacle from the vehicle. The alert sound level will vary proportional to the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the beeps.

9.4.1 Parking Assistance System Sensors

Front Sensor Location	Rear Sensor Location

RPAS sensors are located in the rear bumper and FPAS sensors are located in front Bumper to assist driver for hassle free parking

RPAS and FPAS will give proper alerts at vehicle speed less than 8kmph.

Always keep the sensors clean and free from ice formation, dust, water etc. for proper working of the system.

Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or using a high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could be damaged.

Magnetic devices present in the detection range could vastly affect the sensor performance and the distance displayed may not be accurate.

9.4.2 Driving and Operation

•

PAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances mahindra will accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system

•

System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages which are below the ground level

•

Repainting of the sensor will affect the performance of the system

9.4.3 Activation & De-activation of PAS

•

The Vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the Parking assistance system

•

RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear engaged

•

RPAS will get deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged

•

FPAS will be activated automatically when Vehicle speed is in between 1 to 8 kmph and hand brake is dis engaged or clutch is pressed, Hand brake is disengaged and vehicle is standstill or reverse gear is engaged

•

In case of AT variant FPAS will be activated automatically when the vehicle is in D gear and hand brake is disengaged .

•

FPAS will get deactivated when vehicle speed is more than 8kmph or hand brake is engaged or reverse gear is disengaged.

•

When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the obstacles, more display bars illuminated & beeps alerts

9.5 PAS (RPAS & FPAS) Information on Instrument Cluster Screen

RPAS display on instrument cluster screen gives the following information:

. Left zone indicates obstacle on left side
. Right zone indicates obstacle on right side
. If Obstacle is in center then left and Right both zone will get highlight.

Number of Zones getting changed according to variant.

FPAS display on instrument cluster screen gives the following information:

. Left Corner zone indicates obstacle on left side
. Right Corner Zone indicates obstacle on the right side

9.6 Operation of PAS

Start the vehicle (Ignition is turned ON)

Change the gear to Reverse (engage reverse gear) and Dis engage Hand brake. RPAS & FPAS will be displayed as like below in Instrument Cluster.
The RPAS & FPAS both will be displayed as like below in the instrument cluster screen during obstacle detection

For FPAS alone, disengage Hand brake and drive the vehicle forward with speed limit within 1 to 8kmph
FPAS will be displayed as like below in the instrument cluster screen during obstacle detection.

The Beep sound can be heard from the Cluster speaker. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle detected by sensor is closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is near the vehicle.

The RPAS distance displayed will be the minimum of distances sensed by left and right sensors. And 120 cm is the maximum detection range & The FPAS distance displayed will be the minimum of distances sensed by left and right sensors 70cm is the maximum detection range

For Example: Assume 2 obstacles are placed as mentioned below:

•

Obstacle at left at 70 cm

•

Obstacle at right at 101 cm

On engaging the gear in reverse, instrument cluster will display as below:
	Since obstacle is at 70 cm in left - minimum distance is shown in the distance indicator.

	6. FPAS warning sound can be disabled using PAS Switch, available on IP.
PAS switch LED will not glow when FPAS sound is in active state and will be in ON state when PAS sound deactivated.

9.7 Pay Attention

If bars in any one of the sides are displayed with ‘X’ marks is displayed on instrumental cluster display, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.

If all bars are displayed with ‘X’ marks on instrumental cluster display, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.

Obstacle in the blind zone cannot be sensed by the system. Applicable for all sensors.

Please check the condition of the obstacle behind and in front of your vehicle before moving. In some cases, the display may be not as same as reality due to the installed sensor level, obstacle shape and reflection condition.

Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be detected at all. Applicable for all sensors.

Not all obstacles are detected from 120 cm. For instance, a person is detected from 75 cm because of the weak reflection or absorption of the waves of the clothes.

The distance indication may move up and down due to different sizes of the obstacle at different positions.

Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone, obstacle may not be detected since the ultrasonic waves are not reflected back to the sensor.

The obstacle of a conical shape may not be detected, since the ultrasonic waves get reflected away

9.8 Limitations of PAS

•

System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small objects which are below the bumper level

•

System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface, which will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by PAS

•

System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the obstacle

•

System may give false alert without obstacles while parking/reversing the vehicle on grasslands, gravels and bumpy roads considering it to be an obstacle

•

System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is not fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is overloaded

•

System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain ground to a slope terrain and vice versa

•

System may give false signal by sensing the ground when the bumper is tilted more from the normal position or when the vehicle is heavily overloaded

•

System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow and heavy wind conditions

•

The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Some obstacles for example as follows:

–

Sharply-angled objects

–

Tall or curved curb

–

Low obstacles (with height of 40 cm above ground level)

–

Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of the vehicle

•

Depending upon the shape of the obstacle and other environmental factors, the detection distance may shorten or detection may be impossible

•

Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor

•

Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once

•

Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false alarm for e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners and neon lights

•

Due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves, the vicinity of the vehicle is noisy. It may cause sensor to give false alarm

•

Front parking sensors coverage is limited to only corner area of front bumper

9.9 Rear View Camera (If equipped)

Rear View Camera is located under tail gate applique.

Rear View Camera assists the driver while reversing & manoeuvring the Car at lower speeds. It has the following features:

Normal View

Zoom-in View

Full View

Merged Corner View

Left Corner View

Right Corner View

Static & Dynamic Guidelines

Parking assistance

•

Parallel Parking

•

Vertical (Perpendicular) Parking

9.9.1 Feature Description

1. Normal View

By selecting Normal View Icon, Rear View camera provides view of vehicle's rear surrounding on the Infotainment screen.

It overcomes limitation of IRVM, where ground is visible only after longer distance from vehicle rear. Whereas with the RVC, the ground will be visible closer to Vehicle’s Rear

2. Zoom-In View

Press Zoom-In button to view objects closer and press Zoom-Out button to go back to the normal parking view.

3. Full View/Wider View

By selecting Full View Icon Rear View camera provides about wide rear view of vehicle's rear surrounding on the Infotainment screen.

Full view is wider than Normal View.

4. Merged Corner View

By selecting Merged Corner Rear View camera provides a wide view focussed on the left and right corners to provide a better visibility of crossing traffic for safe manouvre.

Merged Corner View shows merged view of rear left and right corners.

5. Left Corner View

If user wants to focus on the left side crossing traffic, then "Left Corner View" icon can be pressed to select the view.

Select “Back” Icon to switch to Merged Corner View.

6. Right Corner View

If user wants to focus on the right side crossing traffic, then "Right Corner View" icon can be pressed to select the view.

Select “Back” Icon to switch to Merged Corner View.

7. Static and Dynamic Guidelines

Static Guidelines indicate the placement of the vehicle with respect to the parking slot during parking. During parking, compare the Static guidelines against the Parking Slot Lines to know if vehicle placement is in-line with the parking slot lines.

Color coding on Static lines help in assessing the distance of obstacle from the vehicles’ rear. In the RVC Video, if Red color dashed line falls on a object on the floor then the Object is within 0.5 meter distance from the vehicle’s rear. Likewise, Red solid line indicates 0.5-1mts, Yellow indicates 1-2 mts, and Green indicates 2-3 mts.

Dynamic Guidelines (orange color in below image) indicate path, the vehicle will traverse with current steering position. As per the steering angle movement, dynamic guidelines move and show the vehicle predicted moving direction to help the driver.

8. Parking Assistance

The feature assists the driver with the help of parking overlays to park the vehicle in target parking slot. Parallel or Vertical Parking option can be selected by driver based on parking slot availability.

Overlays and guidelines are displayed regardless of the current vehicle environment. The driver is responsible for checking and ensuring that there is no obstacle in the selected parking slot.

Parallel Parking

Parallel Parking guides the driver to park the vehicle in a slot parallel to the vehicle.

A. Selecting Parking Slot

Drive ahead of the parking slot, until it is fully visible. Now select “Parallel Parking”

Icon from infotainment. After selection, Infotainment displays below screen image1.

B. Setting the steering angle:

Drive the vehicle Forward or Backward and ensure the greenish -blue rectangle [consider right rectangle if parking image slot is on right side and consider left rectangle if parking slot is on left side], is placed in the parking slot. Make sure obstacles are not present

Ensure, there is enough space (min.3ft) sideways between your vehicle and the parked vehicle before engaging reverse.

In the parking slot after the vertical pole.

•

Now start turning the steering wheel towards the direction in which parking slot is present. A shorter rectangle box will appear which will change the color according to the steering position.

When the box is green(image 2), stop turning the steering wheel and hold the position.

Green color: Represents suitable parking location. You can try an attempt to park.

Red color: Represents unsafe/potential risk parking. Your vehicle may hit the side of the vehicle already parked.

Blue color: Represents unsafe/potential risk parking. Final parking space length needed will be larger than the desired length of parking space. May lead to wrong vehicle direction movement.

Green/Blue/Red colors in this mode are for guiding the vehicle to the parking slot and it would not detect the obstacles or alert the driver in that zone. It is the sole responsibility of the driver to ensure the rear end obstacles/ vehicles which can lead to damage while parking.

C. Complete Parking

With current steering position, start moving the vehicle backward. An orange arc line will appear. When the orange arc (image 3)touches the parking slot end position, stop the vehicle

•

Now rotate the steering wheel to maximum in the opposite direction. Arc is then replaced by dynamic and static parking line. Continue backing the vehicle with the help of dynamic guideline.

•

When static guidelines are parallel to target parking slot(image 4), bring steering to centre position. Adjust vehicle backward or forward until the whole vehicle is in the target parking slot. Parking Completed

Vertical/Perpendicular Parking

Vertical/Perpendicular parking assistance guides the driver to park the vehicle in a parking slot perpendicular to the vehicle. Below are the steps to achieve Vertical parking.

Selecting Parking Slot

Drive ahead of the parking slot, until it is fully visible. Now select “Vertical

Parking” icon present on infotainment screen. After selection, Infotainment display’s below screen:

Setting the steering angle

Based on the side driver prefers to park, either blue or pink arc needs to be taken into consideration Drive the vehicle, either forward / backward and ensure that preferred side arc’s tip is touching the starting edge of target parking slot. Once done, stop the vehicle.

Turn steering wheel to the maximum position, towards direction of the parking slot. Pink/ blue overlay disappears, and the dynamic and static overlay appears on the screen as shows in the image.

Complete Parking

Hold steering in the maximum position and start driving the vehicle backwards. when static lines are parallel to target parking slot, bring steering to centre position and continue driving backward until the whole vehicle is in target parking slot. Parking Completed

9.9.2 Entry and Exit Conditions

Entry Conditions

Turn on ignition and apply the reverse gear, Infotainment will enter into ‘Rear View Camera Mode’ and displays the video.

You can also view vehicle’s rear surrounding, by selecting Rear View Camera option present on Infotainment Screen, irrespective of the gear position.

Exit Conditions

•

If the driver is not in Parallel or Vertical Parking mode and Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’ by reverse gear option, then RVC mode exits when reverse gear is disengaged

•

If the driver is not in Parallel or Vertical Parking mode and Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’, due to “Rear View Camera” selection present on the Infotainment, then RVC mode can be exited, by selecting the Cancel button appearing on the screen

•

Irrespective of RVC entry conditions, when Parallel or Vertical Parking Mode is active, driver can exit the RVC Mode using Cancel button that appears, whenever vehicle is in forward gear

•

When ignition is off

•

If equipped with FVC and (if Reverse Gear engaged or RVC screen is in Parking Mode) and FVC piano switch is pressed then Infotainment exits RVC mode and enters FVC mode.

9.9.3 Camera Maintenance

Always keep the Camera lens clean from dust. Presence of dirt on lens may lead to poor image quality.

Always use clear water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens.

Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer.

•

In case of any RVC-related issues, the Infotainment displays ‘ Please Contact Service Centre’ and vehicle needs to be taken to the Service Centre. Avoid using the Rear-View Camera under these circumstances.

•

If rear of your vehicle is damaged or if the Camera position is changed, please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center immediately.

9.9.4 System Limitations

•

Rear view camera may not operate normally, when you drive in the extremely high or low temperature area. (Operating temperature: -20°C ~ 65°C)

•

Under certain circumstances given below, the rear view camera system will work with limitation or will not function fully:

- In heavy rain, snow or fog.

- At night or in very dark places.

- If the camera is exposed to very bright light sources.

- Display may flicker, if the camera area is lit by LED or fluorescent lighting.

- If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas.

- If the camera lens got dirty or obstructed.

•

If the rear of your vehicle got damaged. And if the Camera position and the settings got changed. Please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center

•

Camera image reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing. As the display is 2-dimensional, pointed and protruding obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to recognise. Please avoid rear view camera in the above situation. It could you otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle

•

The performance gets affected sometimes due to deposition of ice, dust, heavy rain, heavy wind, heavy exhaust on the camera

•

Images shown on the display is a mirror-inverted manner, as like the rearview mirror. Make sure that no persons or animals or any objects/materials are in the manoeuvring area. Pay attention and ensure safety before manoeuvring the car. Driver is legally responsible for their car

•

The rear view camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective & inaccurately

•

Avoid using of rear view camera, if you are having eye colour blindness or impaired colour vision

•

Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be far away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increase the risk of collision with your car

•

It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park car safely

•

Rear view video is shown, whenever reverse gear is applied, but it cannot be used as a rear view monitoring system, which cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors

Rear View Camera is only meant to aid the driver and to enhance convenience while parking. It does not in any way replace the driver’s abilities and driving skills while using this system. Under any circumstances, Mahindra accepts no responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

9.10 Front View Camera (If equipped)

Front View Camera is located on front grill applique.

Front View Camera assists the driver while manoeuvring the Car at lower speeds. It has the following features:

Normal View

Zoom-in View

Full View

Merged Corner View

Left Corner View

Right Corner View

Static & Dynamic Guidelines

9.10.1 Feature Description

1. Normal View

By selecting Normal View Icon, Front View camera provides view of vehicle's front surrounding on the Infotainment screen.

2. Zoom-In View

Press Zoom-In button to view objects closer and press Zoom-Out button to go back to the normal parking view.

3. Full View/Wider View

By selecting Full View Icon Front View camera provides wide front view of vehicle's front surrounding on the Infotainment screen.

Full view is wider than Normal View.

4. Merged Corner View

By selecting Merged Corner front View camera provides a wide view focussed on the left and right corners to provide a better visibility of crossing traffic for safe maneuverer.

Merged Corner View shows merged view of front left and right corners.

5. Left Corner View	If user wants to focus on the left side crossing traffic, then "Left Corner View" icon can be pressed to select the view.
Select “Back” Icon to switch to Merged Corner View.

6. Right Corner View

If user wants to focus on the right side crossing traffic, then "Right Corner View" icon can be pressed to select the view.

Select “Back” Icon to switch to Merged Corner View.

7. Static and Dynamic Guidelines

Color coding on Static lines help in assessing the distance of obstacle from the vehicles’ front. In the FVC Video, if Red color dashed line falls on an object on the floor then the Object is within 0.5 meter distance from the vehicle’s front. Likewise, Red solid line indicates 0.5-1mts, Yellow indicates 1-2 mts, and Green indicates 2-3 mts.

9.10.2 Entry and Exit Conditions

Entry Conditions

Turn on ignition and press the FVC piano switch, Infotainment will enter into ‘Front View Camera Mode’ and displays the video.

You can also view vehicle’s front surrounding, by selecting front View Camera option present on Infotainment Screen.

Exit Conditions

•

If the driver has selected entry to ‘FVC Mode’ by selecting Front View Camera option present on Infotainment Screen or the FVC piano switch option, then FVC mode exits when reverse gear is engaged.

•

If the driver has selected entry to ‘FVC Mode’ by selecting Front View Camera option present on Infotainment Screen or the FVC piano switch option, then FVC mode exits by selecting the cancel button appearing on the screen.

•

When ignition is off.

9.10.3 Camera Maintenance

Always keep the Camera lens clean from dust. Presence of dirt on lens may lead to poor image quality.

Always use clear water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens.

Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the front view camera with a power washer.

•

In case of any FVC-related issues, the Infotainment displays ‘ Please Contact Service Centre’ and vehicle needs to be taken to the Service Centre. Avoid using the Front-View Camera under these circumstances.

•

If front of your vehicle is damaged or if the Camera position is changed, please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center immediately.

9.10.4 System Limitations

•

Front view camera may not operate normally, when you drive in the extremely high or low temperature area. (Operating temperature: -20°C ~ 65°C)

•

Under certain circumstances given below, the front view camera system will work with limitation or will not function fully:

- In heavy rain, snow or fog.

- At night or in very dark places.

- If the camera is exposed to very bright light sources.

- Display may flicker, if the camera area is lit by LED or fluorescent lighting.

- If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas.

- If the camera lens got dirty or obstructed.

•

If the front of your vehicle got damaged. And if the Camera position and the settings got changed. Please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center

•

Camera image reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing. As the display is 2-dimensional, pointed and protruding obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to recognise. Please avoid front view camera in the above situation. It could you otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle

•

The performance gets affected sometimes due to deposition of ice, dust, heavy rain, heavy wind, heavy exhaust on the camera

•

Images shown on the display is a mirror-inverted manner, Make sure that no persons or animals or any objects/materials are in the manoeuvring area. Pay attention and ensure safety before manoeuvring the car. Driver is legally responsible for their car

•

The front view camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective & inaccurately

•

Avoid using of front view camera, if you are having eye colour blindness or impaired colour vision

•

It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park car safely

Front View Camera is only meant to aid the driver and to enhance convenience while parking. It does not in any way replace the driver’s abilities and driving skills while using this system. Under any circumstances, Mahindra accepts no responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

9.11 Steering

Your vehicle is equipped with Power steering (Electric Power Steering (EPS) (or) Hydraulic Power Steering (HPS)). This system provides an external assist, so that the driver can easily rotate the steering wheel without much effort. The power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of manoeuvrability in tight spaces. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will provide mechanical steering capability to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking manoeuvres.

Continued operation with reduced power steering performance could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Have the vehicle serviced at specified intervals or whenever a power steering problem is noticed.

Keep both hands especially your thumbs on the outside of the steering wheel rim. Do not hold the steering wheel spokes.

If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned OFF or Not availability of vehicle speed / Power cut off), you can still steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:

•

Under inflated tyre(s) on any wheel(s)

•

Uneven vehicle loading

•

High crown in the centre of the road

•

High crosswinds

•

Wheels out of alignment

•

Wheels out of balance

•

Loose or worn suspension components

For HPS during initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may produce noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

Precaution to help prevent damage to the power steering pump:

•

Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left for more than a few seconds when the engine is running

•

Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fluid level. Check the low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service from an Authorized Mahindra Dealer

•

Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir, this may result in leaks from the reservoir

9.11.1 Tilt Steering

The steering wheel can be adjusted as required using the lever in the steering shroud under the steering wheel.

To tilt/adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the tilt lever down to unlock.

2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired position.

4. Push the tilt lever back up to its original position to lock the steering.

Improperly locked steering wheel could cause loss of control and lead to accidents. Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.

9.12 Steering Controls - Audio (if equipped)

The steering wheel also houses switches to control the main audio functions.

Steering Audio Operations

A: Mute	E: Source
B: Volume +	F: SEEK UP
C: Volume -	G: SEEK DOWN
D: Call Connect	H: Voice / Call Disconnect

•

SOURCE - Press SOURCE button to toggle between TUNER, USB, BT AUDIO and MYDRIVE

•

VOLUME CONTROL - Press ‘+’ and ‘- button to increase or decrease the volume

•

MUTE - Press MUTE button to mute audio while in TUNER mode and pause the song while in USB mode

•

USB MODE - Press the seek button 'UP' / 'DOWN' moves to next / previous track of MP3 and video Playing

•

TUNER MODE - Press the seek 'UP' / 'DOWN' button briefly: Manual Search, moves to selected channel. Press and hold the seek button 'UP' / 'DOWN' for 2 seconds to AUTO Search

•

Call Connect - Press to accept incoming call to the paired BT phone.

•

Call Dis Connect - Press to reject or end active call to the paired BT phone.

•

Call Dis Connect - Press to activate Alexa or OK Google or Siri voice assistant.

9.13 Cruise Control (if equipped)

Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without the need to keep your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. Never use it for city driving, inclines, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain or in bad weather conditions.

It works on the closed loop system principle to maintain the set speed of the vehicle; the system controls the fuel injection of the engine in order to maintain the set speed.

A	CRUISE ON/OFF	F	UP
B	SET +	G	ENTER
C	SET –	H	DOWN
D	CRUISE RESUME	I	FAVOURITE
E	CLUSTER MENU

Cruise control enhances your comfort while driving and allows you to effortlessly maintain the desired lane speed limit. Improper use of the cruise control can lead to an accident.

Cruise control is designed to operate above a vehicle speed of 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT for all gears except 1st and reverse gears. The cruise lamp in the instrument cluster functions only if the cruise control is active.

Cruise control will function only under the following conditions;

•

The vehicle is cruising above 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT

•

Engine RPM above 1200 RPM

•

Vehicle is in any gear except 1st and reverse

•

Clutch pedal released.

•

Brake pedal released.

•

Cruise button has to be pressed to activate cruise control

•

Cruise is activated first time in an ignition cycle by SET + / SET - button

•

Subsequent cruise engagements can be done by RESUME SET+ /SET- buttons in the same ignition cycle

Cruise control is deactivated under the following conditions:

•

CRUISE OFF button is pressed

•

Brake or clutch pedal depressed

•

If the vehicle speed exceeds the cruise set speed by 30 kmph by accelerator pedal intervention

•

If vehicle speed is increased by 10 kmph for more than 30 seconds by pressing the accelerator pedal

•

When Set+/Set- switch is pressed for more than 12 seconds (In this case, vehicle will not go into cruise mode in that ignition cycle. In order to restore the cruise function, switch OFF the ignition, wait for 30 seconds and switch ON the ignition)

•

If the vehicle is driven in cruise mode for more than one hour without any brake input in between, the engine check lamp will get ON and cruise mode will get deactivated

•

Cruise influencing error indicated by Check Engine Lamp, OBD lamp, etc.

9.13.1 Cruise Control Activation

Drive the vehicle to the desired cruising speed (any value greater than 20 kmph), press and hold the SET+ button until the cruise lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.

If cruise is deactivated (e.g. by depressing brake to handle an intervention in the road etc.) in current driving cycle, reactivate the Cruise to the last active Cruise Speed by pressing the RESUME button.

Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up or down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control. This is indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the instrument cluster.

9.13.2 Cruise Control De-activation

You can cancel cruise control in any of the following ways:

•

Press the CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel

•

Press the brake pedal

•

Gear selector moved into neutral

•

HDC or ESC becomes active

9.13.3 SET + Button

SET + button is used to activate cruise control and also to increase the cruise set speed.

To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET + button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by about 2 kmph. When you wish to continuously increase the cruising speed, press and hold the SET + button and release when the desired speed is reached.

9.13.4 SET - Button

To decrease the speed in small amounts, press the SET - button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed decreases by about 2 kmph. When you wish to continuously decrease the cruising speed, press and hold the SET- button. When the desired speed is reached, release the button.

If switch is pressed for more than 12 secs., the switch is assumed to be malfunctioning and the cruise functionality ceases to function in that ignition cycle. To resume functionality, ignition has to toggled.

The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver must at all times remain alert of road / traffic conditions and responsible for the vehicle brake operation / steering control.

Never activate cruise control in traffic or when driven in adverse road conditions (heavy rains, windy, slippery etc.)

9.13.5 RESUME Button

With the help of RESUME, you can opt for the previous set cruising speed of the vehicle in the same ignition cycle. This is best explained with the following example:

Assume, you have activated cruise mode and set the vehicle speed at 50 kmph.

Due to an obstacle or a sharp turn, you have deactivated the cruise mode either by pressing the brake pedal or by switching OFF the CRUISE control.

Vehicle comes out of the cruise mode.

When the road condition is suitable to switch over back to cruise control mode, press RESUME button once. The system activates the cruise control mode to the previous cruising speed of 50 kmph.

To resume the previous cruise set speed, the vehicle speed should be above 20 kmph.

9.13.6 Override Function

This function enables user to ramp up the cruising speed to overtake front vehicle.

The cruising speed can be increased by using accelerator pedal. User has to complete this action within 30 seconds, to maintain the cruise mode. If user exceeds the 30 seconds limit, cruise mode will be deactivated.

10 EMERGENCIES

10.1 Hazard Warning Flashers

The hazard warning flasher button is in the central bezel switch bank.

Press the button to turn ON the hazard warning flashers, all directional turn signals will flash to warn oncoming traffic.

This is an emergency warning system and should be used only when there is an emergency. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is a safety hazard for other motorists. Hazard warning flasher will work in all positions of the ignition key and even when the vehicle is fully locked.

With extended use, the hazard warning flasher may drain your vehicle battery.

10.2 Towing

Tow hook is a screw on type, and it is available in the tool kit behind the rear seats on the floor.

Remove/pry out the tow hook cover in the Front/Rear bumper using a screwdriver, Screw in the tow eye in the anti-clockwise direction (tow eye is LH threaded) by holding the cover and tighten. Fasten a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles to the towing hook.

Front Tow Hook	Rear Tow Hook

The rear tow hook should be used when your vehicle is utilized for towing other vehicles.

If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. If a towing service is unavailable in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a towing cable or chain.

10.2.1 Towing Equipment

Towing equipment are of two types:

Sling-type equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on both ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and lift the end of the vehicle off the ground. This is not a good method of towing as it may damage the vehicle's suspension and body. Avoid a tow with sling type equipment

Flat-bed equipment - Your vehicle is loaded on the back of a truck. This is the safest and best way of towing

Towing Option	2WD	Towing Condition	Wheels OFF the Ground	4WD Models
	ü	On Trailer	ALL	ü
	O	Flat Tow	NONE	O
	O	Dolly Tow	Front	O
	ü	Dolly Tow	REAR	O

10.3 Emergency Assistance

In case of emergencies, driver/customer can follow the below steps to connect with our Emergency assistance service either from the car or through mobile phone.

e-Call# : In an unfortunate event of your car meeting with an accident, triggering the airbags, your
SCORPIO-N will initiate the following actions -

	1. A call will be triggered automatically from your SCORPIO-N to 108* Ambulance Service for medical assistance
		2. Mahindra With You Hamesha team will call you back for support and guidance

* [108] number is the default option. This number can be changed based on your preference/location . Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer

^This feature is available only in cars fitted with telematics unit

# On cars without telematics unit, this function will work if a mobile phone is paired through Bluetooth and connected to the car at the time of the incident.

SOS Call from vehicle^

SOS button in Center Fascia Switch	SOS button in infotainment

For SOS call, the driver can either operate the switch located in center fascia switch (1)or touch the SOS icon in the Infotainment (2).

By operating the SOS icon, a call will be triggered automatically from your SCORPIO-N to 108* Ambulance Services for Medical assistance

RSA call from vehicle ^

By touching the RSA icon in infotainment, your SCORPIO-N will connect you to Mahindra Roadside Assistance for support.

(3) RSA icon in infotainment screen

Emergency Assistance from Mobile

10.4 Vehicle Does Not Start - Checks

Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting procedure and that you have sufficient fuel.

If the engine is not cranking or is cranking too slowly / intermittently

Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.

If the battery terminals are firmly fastened, switch ON the interior lamps.

If the lamps do not illuminate, glow dim or go OFF when the starter is cranked, then it indicates a weak or discharged battery. Try jumpstarting. Follow ‘jump starting’ instructions given later in this chapter.

Check the fuses in the Engine Compartment Fuse Box and Instrument Panel Fuse Box.

If the engine cranks normally, but does not start

If the engine is cranking normally, but if the engine does not start even after repeated cranking, Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

If the engine stalls while driving

•

Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.

•

Turn ON your hazard warning flashers and check for any malfunction lamps in the instrument cluster.

•

Turn the ignition OFF, wait for approximately 90 seconds and try starting the engine again.

•

If the vehicle still does not start, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

If the engine stalls while running, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be much harder than usual.

If the engine speed does not increase

•

If the engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem in the Engine Management System, electrical or electronic controls.

•

In case of certain faults, the engine may go to limp home mode, which is indicated by the check engine lamp.

•

Have your vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.

10.5 Engine Overheating

If the temperature gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward “H” mark. it indicates the engine overheating that may damage the engine.
When the engine overheats, the Engine Management System reduces engine power substantially and may even shut the engine OFF; it is dangerous to continue driving when the engine has overheated. You need to first cool the engine down before starting to drive again.

Follow the below instructions to cool the engine down:

•

Progressively reduce the vehicle speed and bring the vehicle to a stop at the side of the road

•

Turn ON the hazard warning flashers

•

Keep the engine running at idle

•

Engage the parking brake

•

Switch off the air conditioner

•

Wait till the engine coolant temperature drops sufficiently such that the temperature gauge is around halfway between C and H

Now switch the engine OFF and carefully open the bonnet/hood to visibly inspect the engine cooling system parts. Be cautious while doing an inspection as vehicle parts will still be too hot. Verify that the engine coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is maintained between the 'Min' and 'Max' mark. Check for possible fluid leakages. Check for damages to heat exchangers and connecting hoses. Also verify that the radiator shrouds, cooling fan blades and the engine belt all are in good condition.
If any evidence of failure is observed, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for help. In case, no system leakage/ failure is suspected, driving can be continued.
Either due to severe operating conditions or due to any system leakages or failures, the engine can get overheated. However, if the engine is getting overheated repeatedly, even in normal operating conditions, get the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.

Refer to the 'High Engine Coolant Temperature' section under the 'Instrument cluster features' chapter for details.

If the high engine coolant temperature warning is ignored, the engine shuts OFF abruptly to safeguard engine components from overheating and consequent failure. Abrupt engine shut-off can lead to uncontrollable driving condition and accidents.

Stay clear of hot and rotating vehicle parts while visually inspecting the vehicle. The coolant inside the cooling system is under high pressure and temperature. Never open the pressure cap of the degassing tank when the engine is hot. Not taking precautions may lead to serious injury to your skin/eyes.

For optimum performance of the cooling system, you must maintain the required coolant level and use only recommended engine coolant.

10.6 Jump Starting

Jump start can be performed when the battery charge is low which can be confirmed by performing the following operations:

Turn headlamp ON and check whether lights are dim

Try to start the vehicle and check whether engine cranks slowly or not crank at all.

Open the bonnet and locate the battery.

It may be necessary to remove the disabled vehicle’s battery cables from the battery terminals and clean both cables and terminals. Use a stiff wire brush to remove all corrosion. Reconnect the cables to the battery terminals before jump starting the vehicle.

The positive terminal will be marked with a plus sign (+) and will usually have a RED cable attached on it.

The negative terminal will be marked with a minus sign (-) and will usually have a BLACK cable attached to it.

A standalone booster battery can be used to start the engine when the vehicle battery is low.

Take jumper cables and unwind the red and black cables.

Wear safety gear and connect one end of red clamp of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery and other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.

Similarly, connect one end of black clamp of the jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery and other end to the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery.

10.

Once the jump starting assembly is done, crank the engine for starting.

11.

Once the vehicle gets started, carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment.

12.

Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery and the other end of the black clamp from the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery.

13.

Similarly, disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery and the other end of the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.

14.

Close the bonnet

15.

Keep the vehicle's engine running and slightly accelerate the vehicle to charge the battery.

If the problem persists on next starting cycle, please visit Mahindra Authorised Dealer

•

Once the vehicle gets started, carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment

Make sure none of the cables are dangling into the engine compartment, where they could be exposed to moving parts.

•

Remove the jumper cables once the vehicle starts. Do this in the reverse of the order in which they were attached, and don't let any of the cables or clamps touch each other (or dangle into the engine compartment)

•

Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery

•

Disconnect the other end of the black clamp from the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery

•

Disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery

•

Disconnect the other end of the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery

Replace any positive (+) red post protective covers if applicable (You have had to remove or open these in the beginning) These covers help prevent accidental short circuiting of the battery

•

Keep the vehicle's engine running. Run the vehicle above idle (slightly revved up with your foot on the accelerator). This should give the battery enough charge to start the vehicle again. If it does not start, either your battery might be dead or faulty alternator.

Improper jump starting procedures can result in battery explosion and acid burn hazard.

Loosely connected battery cables could damage the electronic control units.

To disconnect battery terminals, wait for at least 2 minutes to allow discharge of high voltage or it could lead to personal injury.

While disconnecting, always disconnect the -VE terminal first and while connecting, always connect the -VE terminal last.

Do not connect battery terminals with opposite polarity, it will lead to alternator, Electronic control unit failures.

Towing a vehicle to start could be dangerous. The vehicle being towed could surge forward when the engine starts, causing the two vehicles to collide, injuring the occupants.

Modern vehicles with electronic management systems should not be jump started without ‘protected’ jump starter leads.

10.7 Limp Home Mode

Limp Home Mode is an emergency declared by the EMS (Engine Management System) due to failure or malfunction of one/more critical sensors/actuators. In this mode, the EMS (Engine Management System) will revert back to basic minimum requirement (fuel quantity / injection timings) to aid the driver to bring the vehicle back to the nearest workshop. The drivability & fuel consumption will be greatly affected.

If vehicle acceleration worsens or if there is a drop in vehicle performance, there might be a malfunction in the engine management system which triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode. This condition is accompanied by the check engine lamp illuminating in the instrument cluster. In this mode, the vehicle speed is limited, and the accelerator pedal may not function normally. It is recommended you contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately for assistance.

If the above telltale is ON/blinking, It indicates an emergency situation declared by the EMS (Engine Management System) due to failure of one/more critical sensors/actuators and triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode.

10.8 Fuses & Relays

A fuse is electric protection device. A fuse is placed in an electrical circuit, so that when current flow exceeds the rating of the fuse, it blows off. The element in the fuse melts, opening the circuit and preventing other components of the circuit from being damaged by the over current. The size of the metal fuse element determines the rating. Once a fuse blows off, it must be replaced with a new one.

	Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment OFF before touching or attempting to change a fuse.
	Fuse puller is available at the engine compartment fuse box .

Fit replacement fuse with the same rating as the one you have removed.

You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. All fuses except high current fuses are push fit. A fuse puller should be used to remove the fuse from its position.

10.8.1 Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Engine compartment fuse box is located adjacent to vehicle battery. Release the lock to access the fuse box contents. Remove the fuse box cover by pressing the clips from both sides using both hands simultaneously. Spare fuses are provided in the fuse box for replacement of blown fuses. Ensure the correct rating fuse is replaced with the blown fuse.

“EF” Fuses (Mini Fuses)
Fuse No.	Circuit	Fuse Rating (A)
F1*	EMS Batt 1	15 (Diesel)
F1*	EMS Batt 1	30 (Petrol)
F2	EMS Batt 2 (Diesel)	10
F2	VVTIN/EX, VOP, CANISTER (Petrol)	10
F3*	HFM/FMU/Fuel Pump Relay Coil	10 (Diesel)
F3*	Ignition Coil/Fuel Pump Relay	15 (Petrol)
F4*	BMS	5
F5	Spare	—
F6	EMS ECU Permanent Batt	5
F7	Spare	—
F8	Horn	20
F9*	DRL B+	10
F10	Spare	—
F11	Spare	—
F12	EMS Load - Relays (GP/SCR/AC)/EGR Bypass	15
F12	Lamda Sensor/HFM/AC Relay Coil	15
* - If equipped

“EF” Fuses (Mini Fuses)
Fuse No.	Circuit	Fuse Rating (A)
F13	Brake Switch	10
F14	FR Blower	40
F15	Spare	—
F16	ABS Valve	25
F17	Spare	—
F18	ABS Motor	40
F19	Spare	—
F20	EMS Main Relay	40
F21 - F24	Spare	—
F25*	SCR Relay (Diesel)	10
F25*	Inter Cooler Fan (Petrol)	10
F26 - F29	Spare	—
F30	AC Compressor	10
F31	Fuel Pump	20
F32 - F36	Spare	—
F37	Starter	30
F38*	Glow Plug	50
* - If equipped

“EF” Fuses (Mini Fuses)
Fuse No.	Circuit	Fuse Rating (A)
F39	Main Batt+3	50

F40	Cooling Fan Low Speed	40
F41	Main Batt+2	60
F42	Main Batt+3	60
F43	Main Batt+1	40
F44	ABS Ignition	5
F45*	EPS Ignition	5
F46	EMS Ignition	5
F47	Water Pump (Diesel)	10
F47	Turbo Rec Valve (Petrol)	10
F48	Nox/WIF (Diesel)	10
F49*	EPS	80
F50	Radiator Fan (High Speed)	50
F51	Alternator	150
* - If equipped

Relays
Relay No.	Relay Type	Application Detail
R2	ISO Power Relay	Cooling Fan High Speed
R3*	ISO Power Relay	Glow Plug (Diesel Only)
R9	Ultra Micro Relay	Intercooler Fan (Petrol Only)
R11	Ultra Micro Relay	Fuel Pump
R13	Ultra Micro Relay	Horn
R14	Mini Relay	EMS Main
R15	Mini Relay	Cooling Fan Low Speed
R16	Mini Relay	Front Blower
R22	ISO Micro Relay	Starter
R23	Ultra Micro Relay	AC Compressor
R25*	Ultra Micro Relay	SCR (Diesel Only)
R1, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R10, R12, R17, R18, R19, R20, R21, R24, R26 & R27		Spare

10.8.2 Instrument Panel Fuse Box Opening Procedure

Wide open the driver door and slide the driver seat backwards. This fuse box as located below the Instrument Panel on the driver side

To access the IP fuse box, Pull out the fuse box cover as shown in the image.

Fuses
Fuse No.	Circuit	Fuse Rating
F1*	4WD B+	20A
F2*	ORVM SW	5A
F3	MBFM B+3	25A
F4	HVAC B+	10A
F5	MBFM B+2	25A
F6*	PKE BAT1	10A
F7	Wireless Charge/Diagnostic	5A
F8	MBFM B+1	25A
F9*	Crank	10A
F10*	ICC	10A
F11	PWR WIN RH	30A
F12	PWR WIN LH	30A
F13*	Sunroof	20A
F14	Spare
F15	Spare
F16	Roof/Sunvisor LP	10A
F17	Rear PWR WIN	30A
F18*	SC/NSC	20A/15A
F19*	RLS	5A
* - if equipped

Fuses
Fuse No.	Circuit	Fuse Rating
F20*	Power Seat	20A
F21	ACC-PKE/MBFM	5A
F22*	Blower Coil/AMP ACC	10A
F23*	ACC-RR USB Charg/INFO NSC	10A
F24	PWR Outlet	15A
F25*	RPAS IGN	5A
F26*	IGN - INHIBI	10A
F27*	P/W Smart Close RH	30A
F28*	4WD Actuator	10A
F29	PAB/SAS/CFS IP SW Bank	10A
F30	EC IGN Loads	10A
F31	IGN-Gateway/MBFM/Cluster	10A
F32*	IGN-FVC/RVC	5A
F33	IGN-Airbag	5A
F34	IGN-Info NSC/HVAC/AMP	10A
F35	IGN-PKE/Immobi	5A
F36*	P/W Smart Close LH	30A
F37*	IGN-APA	5A
F38*	Reverse Lamp	10A
* - if equipped

Fuses
Fuse No.	Circuit	Fuse Rating
F39*	W/L Charg	5A
F40*	IGN-AT/4WD	10A
F41*	AT B+	15A
F42	MBFM B+5	25A
F43*	Gateway Cont B+	5A
F44*	Cluster	5A
F45	MBFM B+4	25A
F46	PKE BAT2/Imobi	10A
F47*	ESCL Batt	10A
F48*	RR Blwr	10A
F49	Spare	10A
F50	Spare	15A
F51	Spare	5A
F52	Spare	20A
F53	Spare	25A
F54	Spare	30A
F55
F56*	FSS- Amplifier B+	30A
* - if equipped

Relays
Relay No.	Relay Type	Relay Rating
R1	-	-
R2	Power Window Ext Relay	70A
R3*	AT Solenoid Relay	20A
R4*	RR Blower Relay	20A
R5*	Accessory Start Relay	40A
R6*	Ignition Relay HC	35A
R7	-	-

10.9 Changing a Flat Tyre

In case of a flat tyre during driving, reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place well away from traffic. Park on a level spot with firm ground. Stop the engine and turn ON your hazard warning flashers.

Firmly apply the parking brake. Have everyone come out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.

Never stop your vehicle in a traffic lane to change a tyre. You could be hit by an oncoming vehicle. Keep driving until you reach a safe location.

Lifting a vehicle to change a tyre or perform maintenance is very dangerous if you do not have the requisite tools, safety equipment and training. The jack provided along with the vehicle is to be used only for changing a spare tyre. It is never to be used to perform any other maintenance or repair on the vehicle.

Never place any part of your body under any portion of the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. You could be crushed by the vehicle if it falls off a jack. Keep bystanders away from the vehicle.

Find level, solid ground that is clear of oncoming traffic. If you cannot find a safe place to stop, it is better to drive on a flat tyre and damage the rim than it is to risk being hit by oncoming traffic. After changing a flat Tyre, never store the tyre or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. This loose equipment could strike an occupant in the event of a sudden stop or collision. Store all of these items in the proper place.

The following sections outline the procedure for changing a flat tyre;

10.9.1 Warning Triangle

The warning triangle is a necessary device for your safety.

It is placed below the third row seat cushion.

Follow the below steps to access the warning triangle

•

Pull the strap behind the third row seat as shown in the image and fold the seat

•

Tumble the seat again and Open the velcro for taking the warning triangle out.

When you pull over your breaking down vehicle to a safe place, set up a warning triangle behind your vehicle. (Daytime: 100 Meters behind, Night: 200 Meters behind)

When the Vehicle has a Serious Problem during Driving

Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of traffic to a safe place. Set up the warning triangle behind your vehicle (Daytime: 100 Meters, Night: 200 Meters) to warn other vehicles

Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away from the traffic.

When your safety is secured, contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for your emergency service

10.9.2 Tool Kit

The tool kit is placed behind the rear seats on the floor. It consist of Screwdriver (+and-), Jack operating lever, Tow bar, DEO Spanner (10mm x 12mm) and Wheel spanner

1. Plug	5. Jack Operating extension Lever
2. Screwdriver	6. Tow Bar
3. Wheel Spanner	7. DEO Spanner 10mm x 12mm
4. Jack Operating Lever

10.9.3 Jack Removal Procedure

Jack is located on the left side of luggage compartment.

To remove the jack out follow the process below:

Fold the 3rd row seat and pull out the trim cover snaps as shown in the image.

Loosen the jack sufficiently .

Slide the bottom of jack towards out of the trim and take out.

10.9.4 Spare Wheel Removal

Spare wheel is located below the floor at the rear end of the vehicle. It is held in place by a securing nut underneath the rear luggage compartment floor carpet.

Locate the plug covering the securing nut below the rear luggage compartment floor carpet and remove the plug

Loosen the securing nut anti-clockwise to winch down/lower the secured spare wheel to the ground

•

Tilt and Remove the securing bracket out of the spare wheel hub

•

Remove/pull away the spare wheel

The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.

When Using the Spare Wheel

•

Spare Wheel provided is specifically designed for your vehicle.

•

Do not use more than one Spare Wheel simultaneously.

•

Drive the shortest possible distance with Spare Wheel.

•

While using spare wheel reduce speed, Avoid sharp cornering, Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

•

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a Temporary Spare Wheel is installed on the vehicle.

Refer to “ Spare Wheel” section in the Starting and Driving chapter for more details.

The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is smaller in size (T155/90 R18 113M) and for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.

10.9.5 Wheel Nut Loosening

Before loosening the wheel nut, Wheel cover/cap must be removed. To remove the wheel cover, wrap the tip of a screwdriver with cloth, insert it near the lugs of the wheel cover and pry the cover away from the wheel.

Do not try to pry off the wheel cover by hand alone. Take due care in handling the wheel cover to avoid unexpected personal injury.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle. Turn the wheel nuts anti-clockwise to loosen as per the sequence.

To get maximum leverage, fit the spanner to the nut so that the handle is on the left side. Grab the spanner near the end of the handle and push down on the handle. Be careful that the spanner does not slip off the nut. Do not remove the nuts but loosen them by one or two turns.

Do not apply force with your legs (or stand) on the wheel spanner while tightening or Loosening the wheel nuts.

A: Flat Tyre

B: Chocks Blocks

Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up. When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.

10.9.6 Jacking

Front jack up point - On the chassis long member just behind the front wheels.

Rear jack up point - Under the rear axle.

Rear Jacking Points

Front Jacking Points

Front	Rear

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle end along with the extension into the jack and turn it clockwise with the jack handle. As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, re-check that it is properly positioned. Raise it high enough ensuring the spare wheel can be installed, but not to raise up above the ‘yellow’ line. Remember you will need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tyre than when removing the flat tyre.

Make sure to set the jack properly in the jacking point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned jack will damage the underbody of the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.

•

Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing

•

Do not raise the jack with someone in the vehicle

•

When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack

•

Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the wheel

•

Usable extended height of jack is up to the yellow line/mark. Do not raise the jack above the yellow line.

•

Follow jacking instructions

•

Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack

Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.

Remove the wheel nuts. Lift the flat tyre straight off and place it aside. Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes in the wheel with the hub. Lift up the wheel and get at least the top nut inserted through its hole. Wiggle the wheel and press it back for fitting balance nuts.

Before putting on the wheels, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of wheels without good metal to metal contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while driving.

Reinstall the wheel nuts with the tapered end inward and tighten by hand. Press the wheel inward and tighten the wheel nuts further.

Never use oil or grease on the nuts. Doing so the spanner slips, damaging the nuts and may cause personal injuries. Also, nuts may loosen, and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any nut, clean before installing wheel nuts.

Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel nuts using the wheel spanner. Turn the jack-operating lever anti-clockwise using the wheel spanner to lower the vehicle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension. Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the spanner is securely engaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in the diagonally opposite order as shown. Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight.

Improperly or loosely tightened wheel nuts are dangerous. The wheel could wobble or come off. This could result in loss of vehicle control and cause a serious accident. Always make sure all the wheel nuts are properly/securely tightened to the specified torque.

When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body and all other persons are clear off the vehicle as it is lowered to the ground. Have the wheel nuts tightened with the torque spanner to 83-104Nm, as soon as possible after changing wheels.

If you have rotated, repaired, changed your tyres or changed the wheel rims, check the wheel nuts are still tight after driving about 1,000 kms (Torque 120 Nm).

Put the wheel cover into position aligning the nozzle on the wheel to the nozzle clearance on the wheel cover. Tap it firmly on the sides with your hand to snap it into place.

Restore the tools (jack, wheel spanner, Punctured tyre, etc.) in their storage locations.

Drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tyre pressure, dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage or valve damage.

11 MAINTENANCE

11.1 Dimensions

11.2 Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications
ENGINE	Diesel (175 PS)	Diesel (132 PS)	Petrol (203 PS)
Displacement/Cubic Capacity	2183 cc	2183 cc	1997 cc
Type	D22 Engine with Intercooler Turbocharger	D22 Engine with Intercooler Turbocharger	G20 Engine with Turbocharger
Compression Ratio	16 : 1	16 : 1	9.5 : 1
Max. Engine Output	128.6kW @ 3500 +/- 50 rpm	97 kW @ 3750 +/- 50 rpm	149.14 kW @ 5000 +/- 50 rpm
Max. Torque	370 Nm @ 1500 to 3000 rpm (MT) / 400 Nm @ 1750 to 2750 rpm (AT)	300 Nm @ 1500 to 3000 rpm	370 Nm (MT) / 380 Nm (AT) @ 1750 to 3000 rpm
TRANSMISSION
Type	6 Speed Manual/Automatic
No. of Gears	6 Forward, 1 Reverse
STEERING
Type/Description	Electric Power Steering - EPS (With Rack mounted motor)	Hydraulic Power Steering - HPS	Electric Power Steering - EPS (With Rack mounted motor)
SUSPENSION
Type/Description	Front: Double wishbone Suspension Rear: Multi Link Rear Suspension with Watt’s Linkage
BRAKES
Service Brake	Hydraulic & Vacuum assisted Booster with ABS
Front/Rear	Disc
Parking Brake	Mechanical Hand Operated (Conventional Type)
WHEELS & TYRES
Rim	7J X 17” (Steel & Alloy), 7.5J X 18” (Alloy) & 7JX18” (Steel)
Tyres	P255/60 R18 (or)P245/65 R17
Type	Radial Tubeless
Laden Tyre Pressure (Psi)	Front / Rear/Spare - 34
FUEL
Fuel Tank Capacity	57 liters
DEF Tank Capacity	20 liters (only for Diesel)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
System Voltage	12V
Battery Rating	70 AH (DIN)

11.3 Bulb Specification

Lamp Bulb	Wattage	Bulb Type	No. of Bulbs per Vehicle
Head Lamp - High Beam*	12V 55W	H7 55W/LED	2
Head Lamp - Low Beam*	12V 55W	H7 55W/LED	2
DRL / Front Position Lamp*		LED	—
Turn Indicator Lamp (Front/Rear)*	12V 21W	PY21W	2
Turn Indicator Lamp (Front/Rear)*		Sequential LED	2
Side Turn Indicator Lamp*		LEDs	2
Front Position Lamp*	12V 5W	W5W	2
Front Fog Lamp*		LEDs	2
Front Cornering Lamp*		LEDs	2
Rear Position Lamp		LEDs
Stop Lamp	12V 21W	W21 W	2
Reverse Lamp	12V 21W	PY21W	2
Registration Plate Lamp		LEDs	2
High Mounted Stop Lamp		LEDs	1
* - If equipped

11.4 General Owner's Information

Your vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day-to-day care is more important to ensure a smooth, trouble-free, safe and economical operation. It is the owner's responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance service is performed. Note that both the new vehicle limited warranty and emission control system limited warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See Warranty and Service Information Guide for complete warranty information.

Where to go for service?

Mahindra technicians are well trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and in dealership training programmes. They learn to work on Mahindra vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Mahindra Authorised Dealer service department does the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle reliably and economically.

Get the most from your vehicle with routine maintenance: Routine maintenance is the best way to help ensure you get the performance, dependability, long life and better resale value you expect from your vehicle. This is exactly why we've put together this Maintenance Section. It outlines the services required to properly maintain your vehicle and when they should be performed. The focus is on maintaining your vehicle while it's running great, which goes a long way toward preventing major repairs and expenses later.

Here are a few suggestions to help you get started on routine maintenance:

•

Familiarize yourself with your vehicle by going through your Owner's Manual

•

Take a few minutes to review this Maintenance Section

•

Make it a habit to use this manual to record scheduled maintenance in the warranty and Service Information Guide

•

Consult with your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all your vehicle's needs

Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your Vehicle

Prepare for the Appointment: If you have warranty work to be done, be sure to have the right papers with you. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history.

Prepare a List: Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the Service adviser/Relationship manager know about it.

Be Reasonable with Requests: If your list has several items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the Service adviser/Relationship manager and list the items in order of priority.

Need Assistance? : It is recommended talking to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership.

If an Mahindra Authorised Dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact any Mahindra Customer Care Executive. They would need the following information:

Owner's name and address, owner's telephone number (home and office), Mahindra Authorised Dealer name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), vehicle delivery date and mileage.

Warranty Information: Read the Warranty Information given in the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’ for the terms and provisions of Mahindra warranties applicable to this vehicle. Mahindra genuine parts, fluids, lubricants and accessories are available at any Mahindra Authorised Dealer. They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

Protect your Warranty: Routine maintenance is not only the best way to help keep your vehicle performing as intended, it's also the best way to protect your warranty. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specified in the warranty and Service Information Guide will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. We can't stress enough how important it is to keep records of all maintenance. Damage or failures due to neglect or lack of proper maintenance are not covered under warranty.

Keeping maintenance records is easy with the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’

It's important to document the maintenance of your vehicle. For your convenience to maintain records of service, the scheduled maintenance coupons are provided in the service coupon booklet. Every time you bring your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance, be sure to present this booklet and certify the work. Also record the date of service and mileage at the time of service. This will make record keeping easy and, should your vehicle ever require warranty coverage, you will have all the documentation to show you've properly maintained it.

Oils, Fluids and Flushing: In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic by itself, and does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Your vehicle's oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair.

Chemicals and Additives: Non-Mahindra approved chemicals or additives are not required for factory recommended maintenance. In fact, Mahindra recommends against the use of such additive products unless specifically recommended by Mahindra for a particular application.

Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That's why it's important to rely on your Mahindra Authorised Dealer to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.

When planning your maintenance services, consider your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all your vehicle's needs.

Get the most from your Service and Maintenance visits: Getting your vehicle serviced at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer adds great value to your vehicle in number of ways. Hence, it is recommended to service your vehicle at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer only.

Maintenance Interval: Mahindra establishes recommended maintenance intervals based upon engineering testing to determine the most appropriate mileage to perform the various maintenance services. This protects your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you. Mahindra recommends that you do not deviate from the maintenance schedules presented in this Maintenance Schedule.

Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions

•

Refer to relevant sections of the manual before starting

•

Set the parking brake

•

Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly

•

Turn OFF the engine and remove the key

•

Stay clear of hot vehicle parts

•

Avoid repeated contact with fluids

•

Do not let fuel, coolant and other fluids spill over electrical and hot vehicle parts

•

Keep all open flames and other burning material like cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel-related parts

Do not start/run the engine when any engine/peripheral parts are removed.

11.5 Engine Compartment – Petrol

A	Degassing Tank	D	Engine Oil filling Cap	G	Battery
B	Brake Fluid Reservoir	E	Engine Oil Dipstick
C	Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir	F	Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Diesel Layout — 175 PS

A	Degassing Tank	D	Engine Oil filling Cap	G	Battery
B	Brake Fluid Reservoir	E	Engine Oil Dipstick
C	Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir	F	Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Diesel Layout — 132 PS

A	Degassing Tank	D	Engine Oil filling Cap	G	Engine Compartment Fuse Box
B	Brake Fluid Reservoir	E	Hydraulic Steering Fluid	H	Battery
C	Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir	F	Engine Oil Dipstick

11.6 General Maintenance

Exercise extreme caution when the hood is open and engine is ON.

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed frequently. In addition to checking the items listed below, if you notice any unusual noise, fluid leakages, smell or vibration, you should investigate the cause or take your vehicle to your Mahindra Authorised Dealer or a qualified service shop immediately.

Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you intend to run the engine.

In the Engine Compartment

•

Front windshield washer fluid level

•

Engine coolant level

•

Battery condition

•

Brake/Clutch fluid level

•

Engine oil level

•

Fluid leaks

•

Hoses, joints and pipes for any abnormalities

Inside the Vehicle

•

Lights

•

Warning lamps

•

Windshield wiper and wash

•

Steering wheel

•

Seats/Seat belts

•

Accelerator pedal/Brake pedal

•

Brakes

•

Parking brake

•

Gear lever shift mechanism

Outside the Vehicle

•

Lamps

•

Fluid leaks

•

Doors and engine bonnet latches

•

Tyre inflation pressure

•

Tyre surface/thread and wheel nuts

11.7 In the Engine Compartment

Fluid Leaks: Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.

Engine Oil: Engine oil has the primary functions of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine. It plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order. Therefore, it is essential to check the engine oil regularly.

Engine Oil Consumption: It is normal for engines to consume some engine oil during operation. Causes of consumption in a normal engine are as follows:

•

Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. Thin films of oil, left over when pistons move in cylinders, are sucked into the combustion chamber due to high negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating. This oil gets burnt in the combustion chamber

•

Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burnt there

•

Engine oil consumption depends upon the viscosity and quality of the oil, and upon the conditions in which the vehicle is driven. Oil consumption will be more due to high speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A new engine may consume more oil since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls are not conditioned

11.7.1 Checking/Topping the Engine Oil

•

Make sure the vehicle is on ground level

•

Turn the engine OFF and wait a few minutes for the oil to settle down into the oil sump

•

Apply the parking brake

•

Open the bonnet, use stay rod to support the bonnet. Protect yourself from engine heat

•

Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick

•

Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again

•

If the oil level is between “Min” and “Max” marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL

•

To access the engine oil filling remove the engine top cover.

•

If the oil level is below or near the "Min" mark, add enough oil through the oil filler cap to raise the level within the “Min” and “Max” marks. Wait for few minutes after every top-up for the oil to settle down before checking the level

•

Oil levels above the “Max” mark may cause engine damage/poor performance. Put the dipstick and the oil filler cap back and ensure it is fully/properly seated

Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Engine oil capacity and grade.

Draining/Changing of engine oil should always be done by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

To avoid possible oil loss and injury due to hot blow-by gas, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.

11.7.2 Checking/Topping Engine Coolant Level

•

Park the vehicle on flat-horizontal surface. Keep the parking brake fully engaged. Shut-off the engine

•

Wait till the engine cools down and hence coolant temperature comes down to normal room temperature

•

The coolant level should be between “MIN” and “MAX” marking provided on the degassing tank

•

In case the coolant level is below the "MIN" marking, the coolant should be topped-up

•

The coolant should be filled till the level rises above the 'MIN' but remain below the “MAX” marking on the degassing tank

•

However, if the degassing tank is found to be near empty, it is recommended that the system be checked at Mahindra Authorised Dealer

Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Engine Coolant capacity and grade.

Top-up only with recommended Ready To Use (RTU) coolants for ensuring performance, anti-freezing and corrosion protection. Do not add water directly. Mixing with other brand of coolants is not recommended and should be avoided.

Draining or changing of engine coolant should always be done by Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Never open the pressure cap when the engine is hot. Hot coolant may splash resulting in serious personal injury or severe burns by the erupting liquid.

11.7.3 Checking/Topping Brake/Clutch Fluid

The brake and clutch systems are supplied fluid from the same reservoir (Applicable for manual transmission vehicle).

The brake fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the “MIN” and “MAX” lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to add fluid.

If the fluid levels are below the “MIN” mark, the performance of the systems could be compromised; the brake/clutch operation could be spongy and gear change harder. Top-up the recommended brake/clutch fluid till the “MAX” mark or contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.

Carefully clean the cap on the reservoir before you remove it and be sure no debris fall in the reservoir. Do not keep the reservoir open for longer than necessary to add brake fluid.

Use only brake/clutch fluid that meets Mahindra specifications.

Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Brake/Clutch Fluid capacity and grade.

Draining or changing of brake fluid should always be done by Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

11.7.4 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up

Top-up the windshield washer reservoirs as and when required.

The windshield washer is located behind the RH Head lamp in the engine bay.

In very cold weather conditions, fill the reservoir with washer fluid premixed with anti-freeze.

If you operate your vehicle in very low temperatures, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.

11.7.5 Fuel Filter Water Draining (If equipped)

The Fuel filter is located in LH side of the underbody as shown in the image.

The fuel filter needs to be drained when there is water entry in the fuel filter and respective tell tale ON in cluster.

Follow the below procedure to drain the water;

Park the vehicle on a ground level

Apply Parking brake and block the wheels.

Switch off the ignition

Turn the drain plug anti-clockwise 3–4 rounds, but DO NOT remove the plug

Wait till the water drains (few seconds)

Turn the drain plug clockwise to close and tighten the plug firmly

11.8 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle

Lights: Make sure the Head lights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights and other lights are all working. Check headlight aim.

Warning Messages and Lamps: Check all warning lamps appearing in the instrument cluster. Refer to the relevant sections in this manual for further details.

Seats: Check that all seat controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.

Seat Belts: Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.

Accelerator Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation, uneven pedal effort or stickiness. Check the foot well and remove obstructions, if any.

Brake/Clutch Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and proper clearance. Check the foot well and remove obstructions, if any.

11.9 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle

The following checks should be carried out from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Lamps: Check and ensure proper functioning of all exterior lamps.

Fluid Leaks: Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.

Doors and Engine Hood: Check all doors and latches including the tailgate for proper functioning. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

Tyre Inflation Pressure: Check the Tyre pressure with a pressure gauge every week.

11.10 Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a Mahindra authorized genuine battery. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals.

If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. To prevent corrosion, apply petroleum jelly to the battery terminals. Tighten loose terminals and hold down clamp nuts only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Tightening excessively may damage the battery terminals.

For Best Battery Service

•

Keep the battery securely mounted

•

Keep the battery top clean and dry

•

Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease

•

Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda

Do not disconnect battery terminals while the engine is running. This will adversely affect all electronic controllers.

While removing the battery, always disconnect the negative terminal first. And while installing the battery, ensure the negative terminal is connected last.

It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time. This will minimise the discharge of your battery during storage.

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery acid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don't lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in the eyes or on the skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.

A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep any flame or spark away from the vent holes.

Keep batteries out of reach of children. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead components. Wash hands after handling batteries.

If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock (if equipped) and the preset radio (if equipped) stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected.

The replacement battery must meet the specification of the originally fitted battery.

Checking the Electrolyte Level

Check the electrolyte level and specific gravity at intervals of three months. Check all the six cells for proper electrolyte levels. If the level is below the lower marker, add distilled water until the level reaches the upper marker.

Adding distilled water:

•

Remove the vent plugs

•

Add distilled water to all the cells that require the fluid and secure the plugs properly

11.11 Wiper Blades

Lift the wiper arm from its position. Expose the blade lip for inspection. Clean the wiper blade lips with water applied with a soft sponge. If the wiper blade is not wiping the glass satisfactorily or is worn-out, cut, cracked or bulging, get it replaced at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

11.11.1 Changing the Wiper Blade

Lift the arm and position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm.

Press the lock and pull it off the wiper blade towards left side of the user, disengage the wiper blade from arm.

Carefully insert the wiper blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

To prevent damage to the windshield, don’t let the wiper arm slap down on to it.

11.12 Appearance Care and Protection

11.12.1 Washing the Exterior

•

Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH soap

•

Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces

•

Never wash a vehicle that is ‘hot to the touch’ or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight

•

Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results

•

Dry the vehicle with a chamois cloth or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting

•

It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle

•

Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits; they can cause damage to the vehicle's paint work and trim over time

11.12.2 Engine Compartment

Do not wash the engine or engine compartment or underbody with pressurized water.

11.12.3 Exterior Chrome

•

Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo

•

Use the custom bright metal cleaners, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Apply the product as you would wax to clean chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes, and then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag

•

Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can leave scratches on the chrome surface

•

After polishing the chrome parts, you can also apply a coating of Premium Liquid Wax, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer, or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects

11.12.4 Paint Chips

•

Mahindra dealers have the exact touch-up paint to match your vehicle's color

•

Take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for paint touch-up or paint repairs

•

Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips

•

Always read the instructions before using the products

11.12.5 Alloy Wheels and Wheel Covers (if equipped)

Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat of paint finish. In order to maintain their shine:

•

Clean weekly with wheel and Tyre cleaner, which is available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water

•

Never apply any cleaning chemicals to hot or warm wheel rims or covers

•

Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents

11.12.6 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts

Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available with your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. You can use these cleaners:

1. For routine cleaning of plastic parts

2. For tar or grease spots

3. For plastic head lamp lenses

11.12.7 Windows and Wiper Blades

The front/rear windshield, side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle's glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield.

To clean these items, follow these tips:

•

The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer

•

The wiper blades can be cleaned with alcohol or Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. This washer fluid contains a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly

•

Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches

•

Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any glass parts

If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.

Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to remove decals, as it may cause damage to the glass or rear windshield heater grid lines (if equipped).

11.12.8 Interior Maintenance

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats:

•

Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner

•

Remove light stains and soil with carpet and upholstery cleaner

•

If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with a stain remover

•

Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame- retardant abilities of the seat materials

•

Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.

11.12.9 Display Maintenance & Cleaning

Infotainment/Cluster Display Maintenance:

Infotainment/Cluster display is a precise electrical product and the surface is covered with soft optical film/coating. Therefore user should take necessary precaution and care for cleaning the display visible surface.

Cleaning the display area:

•

It is recommended to use soft and micro-fiber lint free cloth to clean the display visible surface.

•

Wipe gently. Do not rub, as the optical film is sensitive to scratch formation.

•

Be careful for scratch by hard matter like finger nail or steel wool.

•

Do not try to peel off the optical film or coating on the screen, since it is attached strongly.

•

Do not add another commercial optical film on to the display visible area.

•

Do not touch the screen with oily/dirty/wet moisturized fingers as the optical film is very sensitive to stains. Incase of such an event please clean with soft cloth immediately.

•

The display visible surface must not come in contact with sharp objects or regular day to day ornaments like finger rings, watches, bracelets, bangles, car keys etc…

•

When you find a scratch on the screen, do not wipe it strongly. Otherwise it will worsen.

•

Display surface is not so strong for chemical agent. Glass cleaner including alkali or acid, sunscreen must not be used. Alcoholic thinner, petrol, abrading agent must not be used. This may cause discoloration or strain.

•

Antiseptic solution must not be used for cleaning, since it is not pure alcohol. This may cause stains and/ or discoloration.

Display care: Your SCORPIO-N has an exquisite display integrated with high-end technology. To keep the display looking new and pristine, wipe the display with a clean soft cloth.

continued usage of display with dust or dirt can create micro-scratches do not wipe dust or dirt with dry rough cloth or by hand

11.12.10 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim

Use only soft microfiber, dry cloth to clean Instrument Panel/Interior Trim.

Clean the instrument panel/Interior trim areas with neutral PH soap and water using soft microfiber / cotton cloth / sponge, then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth; you may also use Dash and Vinyl Cleaner on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.

•

Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection

•

Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument pane and interior trim

If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on the interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:

•

Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth

•

Apply vinyl cleaner to the wiped area and spread around evenly

•

Apply cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area and allow this to set in at room temperature for 30 minutes

•

Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the area with a rubbing motion for 60 seconds

•

Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth

Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel.

11.12.11 Leatherette Seats (where applicable)

Your leatherette seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the leather:

•

To clean, use a soft microfiber / cotton / sponge cloth with a leather and vinyl with approved cleaners. Dry the area with a soft cloth

•

To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the leather care kit, available from an Mahindra Authorised Dealer

•

Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating

In some instances, a color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing meets leather upholstery. If this occurs, clean the leather immediately to avoid permanent staining.

11.12.12 Underbody

Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt. You can also use an anti-corrosion spray for the underbody to avoid rusting and corrosion especially for vehicles in coastal places.

11.13 Air Conditioning System Maintenance

Your vehicle's air-conditioning is a sealed system. Any major maintenance, such as recharging should be done by a qualified technician. However, you can do a few things by yourself to make sure the air conditioning works efficiently.

Run the air-conditioning system at least once a week, even during the cold weather months. Run it for at least ten minutes with the engine running at normal operating temperature. This circulates the lubricating oil contained in the refrigerant.

Whenever you get the air-conditioning system serviced, make sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling system. This system captures the refrigerant for re-use. Releasing the refrigerant into the atmosphere may cause damage to the environment.

11.14 Vehicle Storage

If you are leaving your vehicle for more than 2 weeks you may want to take stopping to protect your battery. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air mode and high blower speed setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

It is recommended storing the vehicle in a covered, clean, dry, well levelled, ventilated and closed place.

11.15 Winter Care

Dealing with Ice: Make sure you have window ice scrapers and de-icers for the locks. When you're stuck, having a small shovel is useful to dig out of the snow. The weight of a bag of sand in the trunk will give added traction in rear-wheel drive vehicles and can be used to sprinkle on the snow and ice to gain better traction. And don't forget personal protection such as a warm coat, hat, gloves and a blanket, in case you get stuck in a storm.

Keep Enough Fuel in the Tank: Never let the fuel level in the tank drop below the half-full mark. A sudden storm with unexpected heavy rains could leave you stranded for hours. Having adequate fuel supply will allow you to idle the engine from time to time to keep warm.

Do not: Tap the ice on the window to crack it or chip it for a good place to start scraping. You could end up cracking more than the ice and end up with a cracked or shattered windshield/window

Pour warm or hot water on the windshield to melt ice. This will crack your windshield

During Winter Storage: Start the engine occasionally, here are a few pointers to keep in mind:

•

Run it in a well-ventilated area. Carbon monoxide can build up quickly

•

Run for a minimum of 20 minutes to allow the engine to come up to the normal operating temperature. This will allow the oil to circulate and will also open up the thermostat so that your radiator anti-freeze circulates as well

•

Start up the air conditioner and/or heater and run both for about 10 minute. Again, circulating fluids is essential for good life of the system

Exterior: Wash and wax your car to provide an extra layer of protection to your paint.

Vinyl and Rubber: Use a good conditioner on all vinyl and rubber parts to prevent from drying out.

Interior: Clean the glass, shampoo the carpets, dig in between the seats to see what's there, clean the upholstery in all nooks and corners.

Engine: Check all hoses and wires to make sure everything is in good condition and replace any that need to be. The last thing to do is to make sure the internal components of the engine remain lubricated and don't corrode.

If the engine is being started after a very long period of non-use, warm up the engine at an idle speed for 2-3 minutes before driving the vehicle.

11.16 Head Lamp Bulb Replacement (if equipped)

Below procedure is applicable only for variants having Head lamp bulbs.

To replace the head lamp bulb:

•

Ensure ignition is switched OFF

•

Remove rear dust cover from the head lamp

•

Remove the bulb assembly with connector from the head lamp by unlocking the wire clamp

•

Detach the bulb assembly from the wiring connector near to the head lamp

•

Insert the connector into the new bulb (of the same wattage), and follow the reverse procedure to assemble the bulb assembly in the headlight assembly

•

Clamp the bulb assembly by wire clamp properly

The head lamp bulb can be replaced without removing the head lamp assembly from the vehicle. The head lamp assembly has been removed here for illustration purpose only.

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

To avoid burn injuries, do not replace the light bulbs when they are hot. Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and are to be handled with special care. Mishandling it may cause the bulb to burst or shatter. Hold the bulb with its metal/plastic holder/base and do not touch the glass part with bare hands.

Using bulbs with units of higher output capacity/wattage is illegal and may damage your vehicle’s electrical system.

Replacement bulbs must meet the specification of originally fitted bulbs.

12 INFOTAINMENT – Z4

12.1 Safety Precautions

Before using this device, take some time to read through this Instructions Manual.

Knowledge of the operation procedures will help in getting the best performance out of your new Infotainment System. Figures from the display and panel presented in this manual are examples provided for best explaining how the commands are used. Thus, display figures presented may be different from those actually presented on the device display. Illustrations, technical information, specifications and descriptions of this brochure were correct until the date of printing. We safeguard the right to make any required amendments according to the ongoing development and improvement.

To avoid risk of damage and/or fire, observe the following precautions;

•

To avoid short-circuits, never insert metallic objects (for instance: coins or metallic tools) into the unit.

•

If you notice that the unit is releasing smoke or strange smell, promptly disconnect the supply and consult the nearest or Mahindra service Center.

•

Pay attention not to let the unit fall down, and neither beat the device strongly. Internal glass components of the unit may be damaged, making it non-operative.

•

This system has a Capacitive type touch panel. Select the desired option in the screen using his / her finger. Do not use any sharp objects on the touch screen. On selection the selected item is highlighted as an acknowledgement.

12.1.1 Cleaning of the Unit

If the front panel of this unit is dirty, clean it with a dry cloth or slightly soaked in water. If the front panel is too dirty, clean it with a cloth moistened with neutral soap and then repeat the prior operation.

Do not use any cleansing spray with this unit, as that can affect its mechanical parts. If you clean the front panel with a rough cloth that may scratch the surface.

Features described herein are subjected to availability depending on vehicle variants. Please contact authorized personal for more information.

12.1.2 User Controls

Touch Screen Display

The Infotainment system is equipped with a 8.0” touch screen TFT display.

It displays information about Media (AM/FM, USB, Bluetooth music & etc.,) Vehicle controls & settings

Bezel Buttons

The bezel input keys are located below the infotainment system screen on the dashboard to provide quick access to frequently used functions to the driver/ passenger.

It has 8 push type shortcut keys + 2 rotary knob.

A: Volume Knob	F: Back Button
B: Mute/Power Button	G: Setting Button
C: Media Button	H: Favourite Screen Button
D: Phone Button	I: Tuner/Scroll Knob
E: Home Button	J: Select Button

Steering Wheel Control (SWC)

Infotainment system can be controlled by Steering wheel switch mounted on the left side of the steering wheel.

A: Mute	E: Source
B: Volume +	F: SEEK UP
C: Volume -	G: SEEK DOWN
D: Call Connect	H: Voice / Call Disconnect

Mute switch is for muting the audio playing in Infotainment

Volume control can be done with the help of this switch to increase the volume, move the switch upwards and to decrease it move the switch downwards.

Call connect is used to accept the incoming call & also it enable the driver to open the contacts list in Infotainment & make the call.

Source switch is used change the source of audio playing in the Infotainment whether USB or FM.

Toggle up/down switch can be used for toggling up/down the menu list of Infotainment.

Call Disconnect switch is used when the call is over, and the user wants to cut it then switch can be pressed.

This provide the flexibility of controlling the infotainment system while driving, without any distraction

12.2 Landing Screen

Home screen which provides combination of Entertainment, Driving Information & Vehicle Controls.

Home Screen:The Home Screen is the main screen for the user to interact with the Infotainment System. The Home Screen is displayed when the home button is pressed.

Radio: When Radio is playing, station name & frequency will be shown in Radio screen. To seek up/down, touch the seek buttons. To access radio screen, Touch the Radio icon in the home screen menu.

Music: When any music is playing name of source & song will be displayed. To change a song, press the next/ previous buttons. To pause music, press pause button.

To access music source (e.g.: USB, My Drive, Radio etc.) screen, touch the respective icon from the home screen.

Phone: When Phone is paired to Infotainment system via Bluetooth, name of the phone will be shown. To access call logs, phone settings or contact list, press the corresponding icon from the home screen. To access phone screen, Touch the icon

Music Landing Screen

Radio: On pressing radio icon in the home screen, it will take you through radio full view mode. In radio full view mode, the frequency can be adjusted using the scale, station list can be updated using auto store with respect to location.

Split Screen Functionality

User can see Radio, Media, Phone, and other Infotainment screens alongside, without the need to switch between them. User can access the Split screen by pressing the home button from bezel.

12.3 Settings

How to access All settings screen

Swipe the home screen tiles from right to left and select settings icon from the screen

Settings are grouped and named in familiar headings with familiar icons on right side of screen

12.3.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

How to connect phone via Bluetooth in Infotainment?

User can connect Bluetooth using any of the below methods, in Bluetooth settings.

Add device: Kindly ensure, Mobile device should be in bluetooth settings screen to accept the connection

Bluetooth discoverability: Kindly ensure, Mobile device start scan after discoverability is turned On

My contacts are taking time to load in IVI?

Based on the Mobile device and number of contacts, loading time may vary from few seconds to few minutes

Bluetooth Music is not playing in Infotainment?

After connecting mobile device to bluetooth, user need to select his device for media in device list and then select bluetooth music source in Infotainment to Play music.

Few Phone Contacts are not visible in Infotainment Screen?

Ensure that your phone book contacts do not have special characters before their name. If there are such contacts, please rename them.

I can’t Accept or decline Whatsapp call from IVI?

IVI will support bluetooth phone voice call and supportability of Whatsapp, MS Team call depends on the controls provided by Mobile device/app to Infotainment

Next /Previous, fast forward/rewind etc. controls not working for Bluetooth music?

The availability of the features/control is dependent on the Bluetooth version of phone device and music application used in phone.

While playing USB song album art not displaying?

Album art will display in the screen, only if the song has album art information

While playing songs from USB, few files are getting skipped?

If the Infotainment system comes across a corrupt music track in media source, the system might skip to next music track in the media source.

Sources are disabled in Media menu screen?

Source will be active only when device is connected e.g., for USB, Pendrive should be connected.

12.4 Appendix

Abbreviations

Acronym	Description
BT	Blue tooth
SWC	Steering Wheel control
ICC	Intelli Command Control
IVI	In Vehicle Infotainment

13 INFOTAINMENT - Z6, Z8

13.1 Safety Precautions

Before using this device, take some time to read through this Instructions Manual.

To avoid risk of damage and/or fire, observe the following precautions;

•

To avoid short-circuits, never insert metallic objects (for instance: coins or metallic tools) into the unit.

•

If you notice that the unit is releasing smoke or strange smell, promptly disconnect the supply and consult the nearest or Mahindra service Center.

•

Pay attention not to let the unit fall down, and neither beat the device strongly. Internal glass components of the unit may be damaged, making it non-operative.

•

13.1.1 Cleaning of the Unit

Do not use any cleansing spray with this unit, as that can affect its mechanical parts. If you clean the front panel with a rough cloth that may scratch the surface.

Features described herein are subjected to availability depending on vehicle variants. Please contact authorized personal for more information.

13.1.2 User Controls

Touch Screen Display

The Infotainment system is equipped with a 8.0” touch screen TFT display.

It displays information about Media (AM/FM, USB, Bluetooth music & etc.,), Vehicle controls & settings

Bezel Buttons

The bezel input keys are located below the infotainment system screen on the dashboard to provide quick access to frequently used functions to the driver/ passenger.

It has 8 push type shortcut keys + 2 rotary knob.

A: Volume Knob	F: Back Button
B: Mute/Power Button	G: Setting Button
C: Media Button	H: Favourite Screen Button
D: Phone Button	I: Tuner/Scroll Knob
E: Home Button	J: Select Button

Steering Wheel Control (SWC)

Infotainment system can be controlled by Steering wheel switch mounted on the left side of the steering wheel.

A: Mute	E: Source
B: Volume +	F: SEEK UP
C: Volume -	G: SEEK DOWN
D: Call Connect	H: Voice / Call Disconnect

Mute switch is for muting the audio playing in Infotainment

Volume control can be done with the help of this switch to increase the volume, move the switch upwards and to decrease it move the switch downwards.

Call connect is used to accept the incoming call & also it enable the driver to open the contacts list in Infotainment & make the call.

Source switch is used change the source of audio playing in the Infotainment whether USB or FM.

Toggle up/down switch can be used for toggling up/down the menu list of Infotainment.

Call Disconnect switch is used when the call is over, and the user wants to cut it then switch can be pressed.

This provide the flexibility of controlling the infotainment system while driving, without any distraction

13.2 Landing Screen

Home screen which provides combination of Entertainment, Connectivity, Vehicle Controls & Navigation information

Home Screen Functionality

Home Screen: The Home Screen is the main screen for the user to interact with the Infotainment System. The Home Screen is displayed when the Home icon is Pressed or Home button is pressed.

Radio: When Radio is playing, station name & frequency will be shown in Radio Tile To seek up/down, touch the seek buttons. To stop Radio, press stop button. To access radio screen, Touch the tile.

Music: : When any Music is playing name of source & song Name will be displayed To change a song, press the next/ previous buttons. To pause music, press pause button To access music source (e.g.: USB, My Drive, Radio etc.) screen, touch the tile

Phone: When Phone is paired to Infotainment system via Bluetooth, name of the phone Will be shown To access call logs, phone Settings or contact list, Press the corresponding short cut cons in the tile to access phone screen, Touch the tile

Navigation: This Tile provides access to Navigation. To set the route or directly access favourite (Saved destination), Press the corresponding short cut icons in the tiles To see MAP, Touch the tile

Applications: This Tile provides direct access To connected apps.

Music Landing Screen

Radio: On pressing radio tile in the home screen, it will take you through radio full view mode. In radio full view mode, the frequency can be adjusted using the slider or by rotating clockwise and anti-clockwise Right side rotary knob available below the display, favorite station can be stored and viewed, station list can be updated with respect to location.

BT Music: On pressing music tile in the home screen it will take you through music full view mode of currently active music source, here bluetooth music full view mode is explained as an example.

Split Screen Functionality

User can see Radio, Media, Phone, and other Infotainment screens alongside, without the need to switch between them. User can access the Split screen by swiping left to right on the home screen.

To add contents on the tiles, long press on the tiles In Split- screen, user can choose the content for each tile and resize the tile based on his preference also.

Quick Access Drawer Functionality

User can open the Quick Access Drawer for effortless access to the system information and control. Quick Access Drawer gives user a swift way to access handy features like Volume control, Media controls, Notifications and many more.

App Drawer Functionality

App Drawer: The App Drawer lets users browse their available apps and folders in a vertically scrolling grid and launch the one they selected. Users can access the App Drawer by swiping the bottom bar. They can also customize whether their Apps are outside or inside folder created by the user.

App Drawer contains both Native system apps and Connected Car Apps. Based on the usage of Apps, reordering will be done automatically.

13.3 Settings

How to access All settings screen

Press settings Icon available on the top right corner of the home screen.

Settings are grouped and named in familiar headings with familiar icons on right side of screen also user can access the remaining setting by swiping right to left on the All settings screen. Some settings which are needed frequently are provided up front as quick settings in left side of screen.

Settings Page 1

Settings Page 2

13.3.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

How to connect phone via Bluetooth in Infotainment?

User can connect Bluetooth using any of the below methods, in Bluetooth settings.
Add device: Kindly ensure, Mobile device should be in Bluetooth settings screen to accept the connection
Bluetooth discoverability: Kindly ensure, Mobile device start scan after discoverability is turned On

My contacts are taking time to load in IVI?

Based on the Mobile device and number of contacts, loading time may vary from few seconds to few minutes

Bluetooth Music is not playing in Infotainment?

After connecting mobile device to Bluetooth, user need to select his device for media in device list and then select Bluetooth music source in Infotainment to Play music

Few Phone Contacts are not visible in Infotainment Screen?

Ensure that your phone book contacts do not have special characters before their name. If there are such contacts, please rename them.

I can’t Accept or decline WhatsApp call from IVI?

IVI will support Bluetooth phone voice call and supportability of WhatsApp, MS Team call depends on the controls provided by Mobile device/app to Infotainment

During active call, I’m getting Navigation Prompts?

During call, Navigation prompts will still come so user don’t miss any direction. User can adjust the volume of navigation prompts as required

Next /Previous, fast forward/rewind etc. controls not working for Bluetooth music?

The availability of the features/control is dependent on the Bluetooth version of phone device and music application used in phone

While playing USB song album art not displaying?

Album art will display in the screen, only if the song has album art information

While playing songs from USB, few files are getting skipped?

If the Infotainment system comes across a corrupt music track in media source, the system might skip to next music track in the media source

10.

Date & Time in my Infotainment is Incorrect?

User can Sync to GPS or manually set Date & time in settings. After selecting Sync to GPS, need to drive vehicle few Kms in open sky to ensure proper date and time based on the time zone selected.

11.

Sources are disabled in QAD?

Source will be active only when device is connected e. g., for USB, Pen drive should be connected.

12.

Can I reduce the Navigation Volume?

Yes, user can adjust Navigation or other source volume, in Audio Settings

13.

Alexa not responding to my query?

Few of the Alexa In car control commands might not work based on the vehicle variant (AC, Window, Sunroof & etc.,).

Also, Alexa might not hear your query, in case background music or noise is High.

14.

How to connect Alexa?

Step 1: Click on the settings button in Infotainment Home Screen

Step 2: Click and open Alexa icon

Step 3:Click on the “Get started” button to get the code

Step 4:Provide sometime to system to fetch code from internet.

Step 5: Infotainment will display code to activate.

Step 6 & 7: Open mobile browser and Go to url : www.amazon.com/code and login to your amazon account(If new user please create amazon account). Enter the code seen in the screen in the box provided and click on continue button.

Step 8:Once login is successfully user will see screen with “Done” button. Press “Done” to complete.

15.

What all vehicle related commands I can use for Alexa?

Following are vehicle specific commands that user can use based on the vehicle variant

In car controls (Works only inside the car with or without internet connection)

Increase Volume – Alexa increase volume

Decrease Volume - Alexa, Decrease Volume

Mute - Alexa, mute

Unmute - Alexa, unmute

Increase Brightness - Alexa, Increase Brightness

Decrease Brightness -Alexa, Decrease Brightness

Maximum Brightness - Alexa, Maximum Brightness

Minimum Brightness - Alexa, Minimum Brightness

Bluetooth Audio- Alexa, play from BT audio

10.

FM-Alexa, play FM Radio

11.

AM-Alexa, play AM Radio

12.

USB-Alexa, play from USB

13.

Play Media – Alexa, resume music

14.

Pause Media -Alexa, Pause song

15.

Next Song -Alexa, Next Song

16.

Previous Song -Alexa, Previous Song

17.

Tune to FM/AM Station / Favourite -Alexa, tune to 93.5

18.

Exit navigation/Route -Alexa, Exit navigation

19.

Open Sunroof -Alexa, Open Sunroof

20.

Close Sunroof -Alexa, Close Sunroof

21.

Open Windows - (will open only driver seat window)

22.

Close Windows (will close only driver seat window)

23.

AC ON -Alexa, turn ON AC

24.

AC OFF -Alexa, Turn OFF AC

25.

Reduce Fan Speed - Alexa, Reduce Fan Speed

26.

Increase Fan Speed - Alexa, Increase Fan Speed

27.

Maximum Fan Speed - Alexa set fan speed maximum

28.

Minimum Fan Speed - Alexa set fan speed minimum

29.

Increase Temperature - Alexa, Increase Temperature

30.

Decrease Temperature - Alexa, Decrease Temperature

31.

Increase Temperature by X degrees - Alexa, Increase Temperature by 5 degrees

32.

Decrease Temperature by X Degrees - Alexa, Decrease Temperature by 5 Degrees

33.

Set Temperature to specific value - Alexa, Set Temperature to <specific value>

16.

What are all different Online commands categories Alexa Support?

Following are the Online command categories for Alexa (Works only with internet connection inside the car)

Search for location - Alexa, Search for location <location name>

Search for POI - Restaurants - Alexa, search nearby restaurants/ coffee shop

Search for POI - Fuel Stations - Alexa, nearby Fuel Stations

Search for POI - ATM - Alexa, nearby ATM

Search for POI - Rest Area - Alexa, near by rest area

Search for POI - Hospital - Alexa, nearby hospital

Navigate to the location - Alexa, Navigate to the <location name>

General Information Enquiry - Alexa, tell me about Chennai/ tell me about Sachin Tendulkar

Weather updates - Alexa, how is the weather today

10.

Online content streaming - Alexa, tell me a story

11.

Online music from Specific MSP - Alexa, play music/ Bollywood songs

12.

News Updates - Alexa, news update/ today's news

13.

Alexa Home Control - Alexa, turn on hallway light (make sure account has smart home device like bulb etc. are synced)

14.

Alarm, Timer, Reminders - Alexa, reminder to pick up dad tomorrow at 10 AM/ Set alarm for 6 AM tomorrow

15.

To do list, Shopping list - Alexa, add pen to shopping list

17.

How to use Mahindra Alexa custom skills for Scorpio-N?

Prerequisite –

•

User needs to have the Alexa app installed in their phone.

•

User needs to have the AdrenoX Connect app installed & registered in their phone.

Step 1:

•

Press the hamburger menu on top right corner to open the menu tray

•

Open ‘Settings’

Step 2:

Click on ‘In-Home Alexa’ under the Settings menu

Step 3:

•

Click on ‘Continue’

•

This will redirect to the Amazon Alexa app

Step 4:

•

User needs to link their Amazon Account with the AdrenoX Connect App

•

Click on the ‘Link’ button

Step 5:

•

Once linked, open the AdrenoX Connect app through the pop-screen as shown

Step 6:

•

Account linked successfully will be displayed

Step 7:

•

Now open the Amazon Alexa app to grant permissions for the Mahindra Skills

•

Click on ‘More’ Button to open the menu tray in Amazon Alexa app

•

Open ‘Skills & Games’ option

Step 8:

•

Go to ‘Your Skills’ section

•

Click on ‘Mahindra’ Skill

Step 9:

•

Click on ‘Settings’.

Step 10:

Click on ‘Manage account permissions’

Step 11:

•

Check or tick all the boxes to provide/grant permission to access the respective fields

•

Click on ‘SAVE PERMISSIONS’

Step 12:

Once permissions are granted the following screen will be displayed.

Step 13:

Once this is done, user can experience or use the Remote Commands through Alexa enabled devices

13.4 Appendix

Abbreviations

Acronym	Description
BT	Blue tooth
SWC	Steering Wheel control
IVI	In Vehicle Infotainment

14 ANNEXURE

14.1 Emission Control System – Multi Languages Alerts

14.1.1 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Assames

14.1.2 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Bengali

14.1.3 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Gujarathi

14.1.4 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Hindi

14.1.5 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Kannada

14.1.6 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Malayalam

14.1.7 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Marathi

14.1.8 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Oriya

14.1.9 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Tamil

14.1.10 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Telugu